Explorer90 105en

USE AND MAINTENANCE
EXPLORER 90 -> 15001

EXPLORER 105 -> 15001
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.19.54
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.19.54
USE AND MAINTENANCE

EXPLORER 105 -> 15001
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.19.54
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.19.54
PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes the operation and maintenance of your tractor in its most generic and common configuration. The standard
configuration of the tractor and its equipment may vary from country to country. For further information on the equipment packages
available in your market, please contact your nearest dealer.
Follow the instructions provided in this manual carefully.
Should you need any further clarification regarding the contents of this manual, please do not hesitate to contact one of our service
centres, which will gladly provide you with any information you need in order to operate and maintain your loader correctly and safely
and thus avoid risk of personal injury or damage.
The manufacturer declines all liability for damage caused by operations performed but not envisaged in this document; or for any
damage derived from the improper use of the tractor or lack of expertise in performing maintenance operations, or failure to follow
the prescribed procedures.
This Operation and Maintenance Manual constitutes an integral part of the tractor.
It must therefore be kept with care and, if one day you decide to resell the tractor, please hand over this manual to the new owner.
Important
CAUTION
Always consult your dealer before carry out any modifications to the tractor. Any unauthorised modifications to the
machine shall automatically release the manufacturer from all liability for any resulting damage or injury.
1.
Do NOT attempt to operate the tractor without having first read and understood this manual. It is the responsibility of the purchaser and of the user to read this Operation and Maintenance Manual and to follow the safety recommendations, operating
and maintenance instructions herein.
Make sure that you are familiar with all the safety instructions on the warning notices represented in this manual and on the
tractor. If you do not understand any of the instructions, contact your authorised dealer to obtain further clarification.
If this tractor is to be lent or hired out to anyone, it is the owners responsibility to ensure that any prospective users have read
and fully understood the Operation and Maintenance manual before using the tractor, and that they have received suitable
instruction on the safe and correct use of the vehicle.
The operator is responsible for carrying out a daily inspection of the tractor and its maintenance and must make sure that any
parts are repaired or renewed when their continued use could render the tractor unsafe or when they could damage or cause
the premature wear of other components. NEVER attempt to carry out repairs or adjustments unless fully competent.
When renewing parts, it is essential to use original parts only. The use of NON original parts, in addition to invalidating the
manufacturers warranty, could cause extensive damage to the tractor.
This tractor has been designed to be used in various agricultural applications. Any use of the tractor for an application for
which it is not intended shall be deemed incorrect use. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage or injuries sustained as a result of the incorrect use of the tractor.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Warnings
Since the production process may be modified subsequent to the printing of this manual, the instructions, illustrations, specifications
or other information in this manual may not correspond exactly to your tractor.
In any event the manufacturer reserves the right to apply modifications to the product at any time without notice.
Handover of the tractor to the customer

l
l
Ensure that the customer is aware of the important safety instructions contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Indicate to the client the importance of observing current standards, regarding above all speed of operation and braking systems for trailers.
Provide detailed explanations of the instructions given in the handbook on using the controls, transmission, digital display,
maintenance, starting and stopping the tractor, using components such as the lift, and front and rear PTO.
To the owner of the new tractor
Practical experience in the field is the key to the success of your new tractor, as regards both its design and manufacture. For many
years, our tractors have been used for the widest range of applications in all possible conditions. However even the best products
require proper care and maintenance from the user.
To obtain the best performance from your tractor, read this manual carefully before starting work or carrying out any maintenance.
Make sure that you understand the meaning of all the warning notices on the tractor and the safety instructions contained in this
manual. Keep this manual ready to hand for consultation whenever a problem or query arises. Do not attempt to make any repairs or
I
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.19.56
PREFACE
adjustments unless you fully understand the correct procedure and the implications. Always contact your dealer if you require further
information or assistance.
This manual has been prepared with the aim of helping the owner and/or operator to carry out all the operations related to
the operation and maintenance of the tractor.
This manual has been divided up into different main sections as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Introduction
Identification
Safety
Getting to know the tractor
Using the tractor
Parking the tractor
Routine maintenance
Fault diagnosis
Wheels
Electrical equipment
Technical data
An index of the subjects dealt with in the various sections is found at the start of the Manual.
An alphabetical index is provided at the end of the Manual.
The indications in the manual regarding left, right, front and rear refer to the point of view of the operator sitting in the operators seat.
Consequently, the right and left sides of the tractor correspond respectively to the right and left side of the driving seat.
II
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.19.57
INDEX
PrefaceI
ImportantI
WarningsI
I
I
1 - IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - List of model serial numbers
1.2 - Identification plates
1.2.1 - Tractor identification plate
1.2.2 - Tractor serial number
1.2.3 - Engine number
1.2.4 - Engine identification plate
1.2.5 - Cab/ROPS identification plate
1.3 - Original spare parts
1.4 - Warranty
1.4.1 - Delivery and installation
1.4.2 - Warranty procedure
1.4.3 - Transport
1.4.4 - Post-warranty assistance
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
2 - SAFETY
2.1 - Introduction
2.2 - Practical advice on safe working procedures
2.2.1 - Protect the Environment
2.3 - General safety rules
2.4 - Accident prevention and personal safety
2.4.1 - Safety clothing and equipment
2.4.2 - Exposure to noise
2.4.3 - Protection and safety devices
2.4.4 - Daily check of the tractor and implements
2.4.5 - Boarding and alighting from the tractor
2.4.6 - Parking the tractor
2.4.7 - Cleaning the tractor
2.5 - Operation
2.5.1 - Start
2.5.2 - Checking indicator lights
2.5.3 - Starting fluids
2.5.4 - Auxiliary equipment
2.5.5 - Towing safely
2.5.6 - Driving on the road
2.5.7 - Overturning
2.6 - Maintenance
2.7 - Safety roll bar (ROPS)
2.7.1 - Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS)
2.7.2 - Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS)
2.7.3 - Operator Protective Structure (OPS)
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-16
III
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.19.58
INDEX
2.7.4 - Use of hazardous substances
2.8 - Safety cab
2.8.2 - Emergency exits
2.9 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor
2.9.1 - Decommissioning the tractor
2.9.2 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor
2.10 - Safety warning notices
2.10.1 - Adhesive safety warning decals
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-22
3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR

3.1 - Exterior views of the tractor
3.1.1 - Exterior views of tractor with ROPS
3.1.2 - Exterior views of tractors with standard cab
3.1.3 - Exterior views of tractors with high-visibility cab roof
3.2 - Access to the driving position
3.2.1 - Access to the driving position for tractors with platform and ROPS
3.2.2 - Access to the driving position for tractors with cab
3.3 - Operator seat
3.3.1 - Operator seats
3.3.2 - GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery
3.3.3 - GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and fabric upholstery
3.3.4 - Seat type GRAMMER MSG93/721 with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery
3.3.5 - Seat belt
3.3.6 - Passenger seat (EXPLORER 105 -> 20001)
3.3.7 - Passenger seat belt
3.4 - Steering wheel
3.4.1 - Steering wheel
3.5 - Rear-view mirrors
3.5.1 - External rear-view mirrors
3.6 - Instruments and controls for platform tractors
3.6.1 - Instruments and controls for tractors equipped with platform and safety roll bar
3.7 - Instruments and controls for cabbed tractors
3.7.1 - Instruments and controls for cabbed tractors
3.8 - Instruments and tractor controls
3.8.1 - Instrument panel
3.8.2 - Console switches
3.8.3 - Steering wheel stalk control
3.8.4 - Right-hand console
3.8.5 - Control switches in cab roof lining - left-hand side
3.8.6 - Control switches on cab roof lining - right-hand side
3.8.7 - Ventilation system
3.8.8 - Heating system
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-9
3-12
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-21
3-21
3-23
3-23
3-32
3-34
3-36
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-43
IV
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.20.00
INDEX
3.8.9 - Air conditioning system
3.8.10 - Cab air filter
3.8.11 - Cab
3.8.12 - Operation & Maintenance Manual
3.8.13 - Fire extinguisher
3.8.14 - Hazard warning triangle
3.8.15 - Wheel chock
3.8.16 - Toolbox
3.9 - Other controls
3.9.1 - Control pedals
3.9.2 - Clutch pedal
3.9.3 - Brake pedal
3.9.4 - Parking brake lever (EXPLORER 105 -> 15001, EXPLORER 90 -> 15001, EXPLORER
90 -> 20001)
3.9.5 - Park Brake (EXPLORER 105 -> 20001)
3.9.6 - Accelerator pedal
3.9.7 - Electronic hand throttle
3.9.8 - Transmission controls for tractors with mechanical shuttle
3.9.9 - Transmission controls for tractors with hydraulic shuttle
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-52
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-54
3-55
3-55
3-55
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-60
3-60
3-61
3-62
4 - USING THE TRACTOR

4.1 - Introduction
4.1.1 - Engine - first 50 operating hours
4.2 - Starting - Stopping the engine
4.2.1 - Starting the engine:
4.2.2 - Switching off the engine
4.2.3 - Turbocharging using the turbocharger
4.3 - Transmission
4.3.1 - Transmission
4.3.2 - Mechanical shuttle
4.3.3 - Hydraulic shuttle
4.4 - Four-wheel drive - Differential lock
4.4.1 - Engaging front-wheel drive
4.4.2 - Front and rear differential locks
4.5 - Braking
4.5.1 - Brakes, SEPARATE BRAKES Valve
4.5.2 - Hydraulic trailer braking
4.5.3 - Mixed-automatic air braking system
4.6 - Rear PTO
4.6.1 - Power take-off
4.6.2 - Rear PTO (540-1000 rpm)
4.6.3 - ECONOMY MODE power take-off
4.6.4 - Ground speed power take-off
4.6.5 - Automatic power take-off
4.7 - Front PTO
4.7.1 - Front power take-off (1000 rpm)
4.8 - Hydraulic rear lift
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-11
4-11
4-14
4-14
4-16
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-29
4-29
4-32
V
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.20.00
INDEX
4.8.1 - Hydraulic lift
4.8.2 - Mechanically controlled rear load sensing lift
4.8.3 - Electrohydraulically controlled rear lift
4.9 - Hydraulic front lift
4.9.1 - Front lift
4.10 - 3-point linkage
4.10.1 - 3-point linkage
4.11 - Hydraulic system
4.11.1 - Hydraulic system
4.11.2 - Remote valve
4.11.3 - Types of remote control valve
4.11.4 - Spool valve controls
4.11.5 - Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic service couplers
4.11.6 - Behaviour of the oil flow in the hydraulic circuit connecting the couplers and the actuator
cylinders on the implement
4.12 - Towing devices
4.12.1 - Towing devices (EXPLORER 90 -> 15001, EXPLORER 90 -> 20001)
4.12.3 - Adjusting the height of the towing hitch
4.12.4 - Drawbar
4.12.5 - Angle brackets for towing hitches
4.12.6 - Towing hitch with lock pin
4.12.7 - Standard long hitch support frame
4.12.8 - Towing hitch with safety lock
4.12.9 - Semi-automatic towing hitch
4.12.10 - Automatic towing hitch
4.12.11 - Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame
4.12.12 - Mechanical Pick-up Hitch
4.12.13 - Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch
4-32
4-32
4-35
4-41
4-41
4-43
4-43
4-47
4-47
4-47
4-49
4-51
4-53
4-53
4-59
4-59
4-61
4-63
4-65
4-66
4-66
4-66
4-67
4-67
4-68
4-69
4-69
4-71
5 - STORING THE TRACTOR

5.1 - Operations prior to long term garaging
5.2 - Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of inactivity
5-2
5-3
6 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.1 - Maintenance operations
6.1.1 - Maintenance intervals
6.1.2 - Washing the tractor/attached implements
6.2 - Fluids / lubricants and fill volumes
6.3 - Service intervals
6.4 - Maintenance and inspection schedule
6.5 - Accessing the engine compartment
6.5.1 - Accessing the engine compartment
6.6 - Daily intervention
6.6.1 - General inspection of the tractor
6.6.2 - Checking the engine oil level
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-7
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-10
VI
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.20.00
INDEX
6.6.3 - Checking coolant level
6.6.4 - Checking the fuel level
6.6.5 - Check the electrical system
6.7 - Maintenance every 50 hours
6.7.1 - Checking the transmission oil level
6.7.2 - Grease the rear axle
6.7.3 - Greasing the front axle (2WD)
6.7.5 - Checking clutch and brake reservoir oil level
6.7.6 - Check the battery
6.7.7 - Greasing the rear 3-point linkage
6.7.8 - Checking wheels and tyres
6.8 - Maintenance every 100 hours (1st service)
6.8.1 - Checking the braking distance
6.8.2 - Checking engine drive belt tension
6.8.3 - Changing the engine oil
6.8.4 - Changing the engine oil filter cartridge
6.8.5 - Checking radiator cleanliness
6.8.6 - Changing the fuel filter
6.8.7 - Parking brake lever control - Park Brake control
6.8.8 - Checking the window washer system
6.8.9 - Cleaning the cab ventilation system filters
6.8.10 - Checking the oil pipelines
6.9.1 - Check front PTO oil level (4WD)
6.9.2 - Checking the front PTO
6.10.1 - Set engine valves clearance and fuel injectors
6.10.2 - Changing the transmission oil filters
6.10.3 - Checking the differential lock system
6.10.4 - Checking the braking system with safety brakes valve
6.11 - Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least once a year
6.11.1 - Fuel injection pump maintenance
6.11.2 - Cleaning engine air filter - Changing air filter cartridge and internal safety cartridge
6.11.3 - Starter motor maintenance
6.11.4 - Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear brakes
6.11.5 - Front wheel hub bearings (2WD)
6.11.6 - Cab heating system maintenance
6.11.7 - Cab air conditioning system maintenance
6.11.8 - Bleeding the hydraulic clutch circuit
6.12 - Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least every two years
6.12.1 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit
6.12.2 - Changing the transmission oil
6.12.3 - Changing the front wheel hub oil (2WD)
6.12.4 - Changing the differential oil, planetary reduction unit oil and side final drives oil (4WD)
6-11
6-11
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-18
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-32
6-32
6-35
6-35
6-36
6-36
6-36
6-40
6-40
6-41
6-42
6-42
6-44
6-45
6-45
6-46
6-47
6-48
VII
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.20.01
INDEX
7 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.1 - Towing the tractor
7.1.1 - Towing with the engine running
7.1.2 - Towing with the engine off
7.2 - Safe transport of the tractor
7.3 - Lifting the tractor
7.4 - Engine troubleshooting
7.5 - Gearbox troubleshooting
7.6 - Front and rear power take-off troubleshooting
7.7 - Front-wheel drive troubleshooting
7.8 - Brakes troubleshooting
7.9 - Lift troubleshooting
7.10 - Hydraulic system troubleshooting
7.11 - Hydraulic remote valves troubleshooting
7.12 - Cab troubleshooting
7.13 - Electrical system troubleshooting
7.14 - Fault diagnosis
7.15 - Transmission and hydraulic shuttle alarms
7.15.1 - Display of alarms
7.16 - Instrument panel alarms
7.17 - PTO selfdiagnosis indicator light
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-18
7-20
7-20
7-22
8 - WHEELS
8.1 - Introduction
8.1.1 - General information regarding tyres
8.1.2 - Punctures
8.1.3 - Wheel nut/bolt tightening torques
8.2 - Tyre combinations
8.2.1 - Permissible tyre combinations
8.2.2 - Calculation of the mechanical lead
8.2.3 - Tyre load capacities
8.3 - Track width calculation
8.3.1 - Minimum track width
8.3.2 - Track width adjustment
8.3.3 - Adjustment of the front fenders (2WD)
8.3.4 - Adjustment of the front fenders
8.4 - Ballasting
8.4.1 - Handling ballast weights
8.4.2 - Ballast for tractor
8.4.3 - Front ballast with cast-iron blocks
8.4.4 - Front one-piece ballast block
8.4.5 - Ballast for wheels with metal discs
8.4.6 - Ballast for wheels with water-filled tyres
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-8
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-17
8-18
8-18
8-18
8-19
8-19
VIII
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.20.02
INDEX
9 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.1 - Battery
9.1.1 - Battery
9.2 - Cab fuse box
9.2.1 - Cab fuse box
9.2.2 - Key to fuse and relay symbols
9.3 - Lights for road use
9.3.1 - Lights for road use
9.3.2 - Headlight alignment
9.3.3 - Road lights - North America version
9.4 - Work lights
9.4.1 - Work lights for tractors with platform
9.4.2 - Work lights for tractors with cab
9.4.3 - Interior courtesy light
9.5 - Accessories
9.5.1 - Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment
9.5.2 - Power outlet sockets
9-2
9-2
9-5
9-5
9-6
9-12
9-12
9-14
9-15
9-18
9-18
9-20
9-22
9-25
9-25
9-25
10 - TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - Declaration of conformity
10.2 - Technical data of the tractor
10.2.1 - Technical data
10.2.2 - Fuel technical characteristics
10.2.3 - Biofuels - technical characteristics
10.2.4 - Coolant
10.2.5 - Noise levels
10.2.6 - Vibration referred to the operator position
10.3 - Dimensions and weights
10.3.1 - Tractor dimensions, weights and speeds
10.4 - Implement attachment diagrams
10.4.1 - Implement coupling holes diagram
10-2
10-4
10-4
10-7
10-9
10-10
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-14
10-19
10-19
IX
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.20.03
INDEX
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.20.04
1
2
3
4
10
1 - IDENTIFICATION
1-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.20.04
IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - LIST OF MODEL SERIAL NUMBERS
This Operation and Maintenance Manual covers the following models:
Tab. 1 - Technical data

EXPLORER 105 -> 15001 EXPLORER 90 -> 20001
-> ZKDW7002W0TS 15001

2WD - 4WD
O
O
-> ZKDW7302W0TS 15001

2WD - 4WD
O
O
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
VARIANTS
Identifying serial number

SUPPORT
Platform/ROPS
Safety cab
X - Standard
-> ZKDW7602W0TS 20001 -> ZKDW7902W0TS 20001

2WD - 4WD
2WD - 4WD
O
O
X
O - Optional
The authorised dealer is obliged to provide the necessary Technical Assistance and to offer technical support through his own service
centre and specialised personnel to ensure that the tractor is capable of offering its maximum performance.
Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Tractor model:
Tractor identification number:
Engine model
Engine number:
Date of purchase:
Dealers name:
Dealers telephone number:
5
6
7
8
9
10
1-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.20.04
IDENTIFICATION
1.2 - IDENTIFICATION PLATES
1.2.1 - Tractor identification plate
The tractor serial number is stamped on an aluminium plate located on the RH side of the instrument panel.
Type of tractor
Vehicle identification number (V.I.N. - 17-character alphanumeric code)
1.
2.
Fig. 1
Designation of the tractor

Year of manufacture
1.
2.
Fig. 2
1.2.2 - Tractor serial number
The tractors serial number is punched on the right-hand side of the front axle
support.
Fig. 3
1.2.3 - Engine number
10
The engine serial number is punched on the right-hand side of the engine block.
Fig. 4
1-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.20.13
IDENTIFICATION
1.2.4 - Engine identification plate
The engine identification plate is fixed to the left side of the crankcase.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Production plant
Engine technical data
U.S. EPA regulation year
Engine serial number
ENGINE TYPE
Engine power approval body
Emissions approval
ECE approval (power)
EPA family number
Year of manufacture
Fig. 5
1.2.5 - Cab/ROPS identification plate

The cab/ROPS identification plate is fixed:
l
l
on the RH side of the cab

on the base of the ROPS
The
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
figure
highlights
the
following
information:
Manufacturer
Cab type
Serial number
Tractor model
O.C.D.E. approval number.
Homologation number
Structure class in compliance with EN 15695-1 (Hazardous substances)
Fig. 6
6
7
8
9
10
1-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.20.13
IDENTIFICATION
When ordering replacement parts it is essential that the user communicates all the information that identifies the exact tractor model
and its serial number, the engine model and the engine serial number. This information is also important to obtain the best possible
technical service.
1.3 - ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS
Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:
l
l
l
l
l
Tractor model
Tractor serial number
Engine model
Engine number
Date of purchase
Dealers name
Dealers telephone number
IMPORTANT:
The use of ORIGINAL PARTS will ensure that the perfect operating efficiency of your tractor is maintained and that
running costs are kept to a minimum.
When ordering replacement parts, please supply the following information:

Tractor and engine serial number (if the replacement part belongs to the engine).
Part name and part number.
1.
2.
The use of non-original parts or improper installation of parts will automatically invalidate the tractors warranty.
The spare parts catalogue is not included in the use and maintenance manual but is instead managed by the dealer, which offers
service assistance directly
IMPORTANT:
10
To be informed on the serial numbers position (tractor and engine) refer to the Identification plates chapter in the
section.
1-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.20.18
IDENTIFICATION
1.4 - WARRANTY
1.4.1 - Delivery and installation
The dealer is required to perform certain tasks on delivery of the tractor to the customer. Carry out a complete check in order
to ensure the tractor can be used immediately; illustrate the safety regulations and provide detailed explanations of the instructions given
in the Use and Maintenance manual on using the controls, maintenance procedures, starting and stopping the tractor, and the use
of all equipment, including the lift and PTO. All persons who will be using the tractor must attend the training session.
Note
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any claims arising following the installation of non-approved components,
implements or connections or unauthorised modifications or replacements.
For the period of coverage of your tractor check the terms in the warranty certificate.
The warranty includes the replacement of defective parts and the relative labour, excluding tractor transport costs from the
end customer to the dealer/importer and/or its authorised workshops and vice versa.
The warranty only applies if the tractor has been used in compliance with the manufacturers instructions and has not been subject
to tampering. The warranty will be invalidated immediately if modifications and/or repairs are executed by persons lacking the necessary authorisation from SAME DEUTZ-FAHR.
The warranty will be invalidated also in the following situations:

l
l
l
l
l
l
Failure to observe and execute the maintenance programmes and the obligatory services prescribed by the manufacturer;
Modifications carried out without the permission of SAME DEUTZ-FAHR;
Repairs or maintenance work performed with non-original spare parts;
Incorrect use of the tractor;
Improper use of implements or incorrect mounting of implements;
Use of lubricants/fuel with specifications other than the specifications prescribed and recommended by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR.
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR cannot be held liable for any damage to the tractor occurring due to improper use or malfunctions of other
equipment connected to the tractor.
The warranty covers exclusively damage and/or malfunctions of the tractor. Users are not entitled to any coverage in respect of lost
production, or presumed or proven damage occurring to implements coupled to the tractor.
Exclusions from the warranty:

l
l
l
l
l
l
All consumable materials and materials subject to normal wear and tear (e.g. batteries, clutch/brake discs, lubricants, filters,
belts, fuel...);
All consumable materials such as oil and fluids;
Damage and/or breakages deriving from failure to observe/perform the operations prescribed in the periodic maintenance
programmes illustrated in the Use and Maintenance Handbook;
Damage caused by incorrect repairs performed by unauthorised workshops or personnel;
Damage due to lost production and/or loss of crops;
Costs arising from the hire of replacement tractors during downtime of the tractor caused by repairs carried out under warranty;
Breakage of all types of glass, windows (doors, rear window, windscreen).
1.4.2 - Warranty procedure
Proper use of the tractor combined with regular maintenance is essential to prevent malfunctions. However, if malfunctions occur
during the period of validity of the warranty, observe the following procedure:
l
contact the dealer from which the tractor was purchased immediately, specifying the tractor model and serial number. The end
customer is obliged to report all faults or defects concerning the tractor no later than 8 days after any such faults or defects
are first observed, on pain of invalidation of the warranty;
provide your dealer with as much information as possible. The dealer should therefore know the number of operating hours,
the type of work performed by the tractor and the symptoms of the problem. Remember that standard maintenance operations
such as, for example, setup and adjustment of brakes/clutch, and the supply of service materials (oil, filters, fuel and antifreeze
liquid) are not covered by the warranty.
10
1-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.20.20
IDENTIFICATION
The dealer from which you purchased the tractor is solely responsible for the warranty so we strongly advise that all maintenance and
any repairs that may become necessary be entrusted to your dealer. If the tractor is moved to a different location, inform your dealer
so that the warranty responsibility can be transferred to the dealer closest to the area in which the tractor is being used.
1.4.3 - Transport
If no arrangements are made with the new dealer, all services provided by the latter will be charged at standard rates.
10
Workshop technicians and dealers authorised by the SAME DEUTZ-FAHR group are fully trained and kept up to date on the tractors,
service procedures and the use of modern diagnostic instruments and equipment. They are regularly provided with service bulletins
and are in possession of all the relevant workshop manuals and all the necessary technical information to ensure that repairs and
service operations are performed to the highest standards.
To get the most from your tractor it is essential to continue to carry out regular maintenance checks and servicing even after the end
of the warranty term. Consult your dealer for all the main service operations: have the tractor checked over by a skilled technician
between one service and the next.
1.4.4 - Post-warranty assistance
1-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.20.21
IDENTIFICATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.20.21
1
2
3
4
10
2 - SAFETY
2-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.20.22
SAFETY
2.1 - INTRODUCTION
The symbol shown below, associated with the words Danger, Warning or Caution, used in this manual and on the decals affixed to
the tractor, indicates the degree of risk encountered. Failure to observe the Danger, Warning or Caution notices may result in serious
injury or death. These notices are accompanied by appropriate safety instructions, generally contained within a box.
DO NOT ignore these instructions; your safety is at risk!
2
3
Fig. 7
DANGER
Indicates an imminent risk of serious damage, injury or death.
4
CAUTION
Indicates an imminent risk of serious damage, injury or death.
WARNING
Indicates a potential risk of minor or moderate damage. The word also serves as a warning against actions that could
lead to a hazardous situation.
Make sure that anyone who uses the tractor has read this manual carefully and has fully understood the procedures for working in
complete safety.
Observe all the safety instructions given in this manual and the safety warning notices on the tractor itself.
Use the tractor in a safe and responsible manner.
Each time this symbol appears it signifies: Caution! Be careful! Your safety is at risk.
The instructions on the use of the tractor must be given to each person prior to using the tractor for the first
time and at least once a year thereafter.
8
9
10
2-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.20.28
SAFETY
It is not possible to foresee all potentially hazardous situations. The safety precautions and danger warnings in this manual cannot
therefore by themselves guarantee total safety. If you choose to operate and/or maintain the tractor in a manner that departs from
the prescribed methods, it is your responsibility to ensure that by doing so you are not putting the safety of yourself or others at risk.
Make sure that the tractor is not damaged or rendered unsafe by your chosen methods of use/maintenance.
Make sure that all personnel who are required to use the tractor have practical experience of how to operate the controls and that
they have read all the information regarding maintenance and safety regulations given in this Manual.
The safety information provided in this manual does not replace national or local safety regulations, which may be supported
by legislative provisions or the terms of insurance agreements. Check, therefore, that your tractor is fitted with the correct equipment, as
prescribed by local laws and regulations.
Read this manual in its entirety before using the tractor; make sure you understand how to operate all the controls. All control systems
and devices have their operating limits, so make sure that you know the characteristics of the tractor as regards speed control, braking, steering, stability and loading capacities before putting the tractor to work.
2.2 - PRACTICAL ADVICE ON SAFE WORKING PROCEDURES
Make sure that all operators have read and understood this Manual. Failure to adhere to these recommendations could result in
serious injury or even death.
Ensure that all operators are in possession of an appropriate driving licence and meet the minimum age limits in accordance with the
requirements of local law.
2.2.1 - Protect the Environment
10
Fig. 8
It is illegal to pollute wells, water courses and the soil. Use depots for the disposal
of wastes especially authorised for the collection of spent oil, thinners, etc. If in
doubt or for more detailed information consult your Dealer or local authorities.
2-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.20.29
SAFETY
2.3 - GENERAL SAFETY RULES
l
l
In addition to the instructions given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual, observe all general safety and accident prevention rules.
Always follow the highway code when driving on public roads.
Before starting work, familiarise yourself with all the controls and instruments and their respective functions. It may be too late
to do this once you are already working.
The tractor is equipped with roll bar or cab designed to protect the operator.
Before starting the engine, check that all the tractor controls are in neutral position.
Always fasten the seat belt. If the tractor is fitted with a roll bar, the seat belt
should NOT be fastened when the roll bar is in the lowered position.
Ensure that the seat belt is properly tensioned. Make sure that the seat belt
is not twisted or trapped in the seat frame before fastening it.
Check the condition of the seat belt frequently; if damaged or worn it MUST
be replaced.
3
4
Fig. 9
Start engine ONLY when seated in operators seat.
5
6
Fig. 10
NEVER start the engine by shorting the starter motor connections to avoid
sudden unexpected movement of the tractor.
DANGER
Make sure that the rubber cover is installed on the starter motor
relay.
8
Fig. 11
l
Before starting work check that the tractor/implement operating area is clear (e.g. check for the presence of persons, children,
etc.). Ensure that you always have a good field of view.
Make sure that that there is plenty of space in all directions for tractor, cab, roll bar and implements.
10
2-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.20.33
SAFETY
Never start the engine in an closed space. Ensure the area is adequately
ventilated.
Do not weld or heat any painted parts. Toxic fumes could be given off. Remove paint by abrasion first, before heating the part. Always perform these
operations in a suitable well-ventilated area.
Fig. 12
Before refuelling always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.
NEVER refuel when the engine is still hot
NEVER refuel in the presence of naked flames or sparks: diesel fuel is
highly inflammable. Clean up any fuel spills immediately! Do not smoke
during refuelling.
DO NOT fill the fuel tank right to the filler neck; always allow room for expansion of the fuel.
l
l
Wear close-fitting clothing. Avoid wearing loose-fitting jackets, shirts or ties.

Passengers may only be carried safely if the tractor is equipped with a proper passenger seat and all the relevant requirements of the local highway code are satisfied. If not, the carrying of passengers is PROHIBITED.
DO NOT allow anyone to sit on the roll bar or on the fenders.
Fig. 13
Before leaving the operator position, remember to lower the 3-point linkage and/or any implement mounted on the tractor. Put
all controls in neutral, apply the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (on tractors with mechanical gearbox),
remove the key from the ignition switch and to turn the battery earth switch to off (where present).
When the tractor is in operation, do not allow anyone to approach the drive
shaft, hooks, swinging drawbar, link arms, PTO shafts, lifting cylinders,
drive belts, pulleys or any other moving parts. Make sure that all protections
and guards are correctly installed in their respective locations.
DANGER
DO NOT allow anyone to climb on the implement or other equipment, including trailers, except for certain harvesting
machines specifically designed to carry one or more persons during harvesting operations (not for transportation).
CAUTION
10
Fig. 14
Perform maintenance work on the cardan shaft and on the power

take-off solely with the PTO disengaged, the engine switched off
and the ignition key removed.
2-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.20.37
SAFETY
The tractor may be equipped with a radar for measuring ground speed. The
radar emits microwaves at low power, but it is anyway advisable to KEEP
CLEAR of the emission zone when the radar is operating.
1
2
Fig. 15
Keep heat well away from pipes and hoses containing pressurised fluids.
Heating pressurised pipes and hoses can cause inflammable fluids to spray
out and cause serious burns to you and others nearby.
3
4
Fig. 16
Avoid contact with pesticides. Tractor cabs, when fitted, do NOT protect you against inhaling dangerous pesticides. Meticulously follow the manufacturers directions for using and handling pesticides. Always wear the required personal protective
equipment (respirator, face mask, etc.) even in the cab.
6
7
8
9
10
2-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.20.38
SAFETY
2.4 - ACCIDENT PREVENTION AND PERSONAL SAFETY
CAUTION
Some of the illustrations in this manual show the tractor with panels or guards and panels removed for the sake of clarity. Do not use the tractor unless these guards and panels are fitted correctly. If it is essential to remove these guards
or panels in order to repair the tractor, they MUST be refitted before starting the tractor.
2.4.1 - Safety clothing and equipment
Wear the appropriate protective clothing and safety equipment for the task in hand.
Equip yourself with the following:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Fig. 17
a hard hat
safety spectacles or face shield visor
protective gloves (neoprene for chemical products, leather for heavy work)
ear defenders
respirator or filter mask
waterproof clothing
reflective clothing
safety footwear
For safety reasons, it is also advisable to keep a fire extinguisher and first aid kit
in the tractor.
Fig. 18
DO NOT wear loose fitting clothing, jewellery, chains or other accessories. ALWAYS tie back long hair, which otherwise could become
entangled in control levers or in other parts of the tractor.
Do not wear headphones to listen to the radio or music while operating the tractor.
2.4.2 - Exposure to noise
The tractor and any implements mounted or attached to it constitute a source of noise, the intensity and frequency of which can be
measured using the appropriate instruments.
10
exposure to excessive and/or prolonged noise can cause serious damage, not just to the hearing but also to general health.
The higher the noise level (dbA) and the greater the duration of exposure, the higher the risk. The combination of both these
factors can expressed in the value LEP (level of personal exposure to noise).
you therefore need to know the noise level generated by the tractor. For further information, refer to the Technical Data Section in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
the use of hearing protection is essential when the noise level exceeds a certain value and/or when operating the tractor for
prolonged periods. The point at which action is to be taken is generally when the level of personal exposure reaches or exceeds 85 db(A). Various types of protection are available, including ear defenders, ear plugs and helmets.
Anyone who uses the tractor must know that:
2-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.20.38
SAFETY
2.4.3 - Protection and safety devices
Ensure that all the tractor safety devices are in places and properly secured. Make sure that all guards, protections and safety signals
are properly installed in accordance with specifications and are in good condition.
Some of these devices are NECESSARY and, depending on local regulations, may be legally required in order to operate your tractor
in safety.
DO NOT remove or disconnect any of the safety devices.
To improve the safety of the operator and other personnel in the vicinity, check that the tractor is equipped with:
l
l
l
l
l
seat belts
PTO shaft shield
Rear-view mirrors
SMV (slow moving vehicle) sign, additional safety guards, additional lights and decals.
hazard warning triangle.
2.4.4 - Daily check of the tractor and implements

l
Before starting work, check over the tractor and any attached implements and make sure that all the devices are in place and
in good working order.
Carry out all the maintenance/adjustment operations indicated in the Maintenance Section of this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
CAUTION
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.
CAUTION
5
l
l
l
l
l
7
l
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is still hot. The radiator is under pressure when hot, and if
opened, boiling liquid and steam can escape and cause serious injury to yourself and anyone else in the vicinity. Before removing the radiator cap, stop the engine and wait for the circuit to cool down.
Inspect the roll bar/cab and seat belt for signs of damage.
Damaged protective devices and damaged/worn seat belts MUST be renewed.
Make sure that any implements or attachments are installed correctly and, in the case of PTO-driven implements, that the PTO
shaft rpm matches the rotation speed of the implement.
Check inflation pressures and check tyres for cuts or swellings. Worn or damaged tyres must be changed immediately.
Check the efficiency of the service and parking brakes. If necessary, adjust the parking brake or have it adjusted by your dealer
or authorised service centre.
Check that the PTO shaft shield and the cover are installed when the PTO is NOT in use.
Check the hydraulic systems of the tractor and the implement. Any leaks or damaged parts MUST be repaired or replaced.
CAUTION
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death.
High-pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER
use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate
attention from medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
Before pressurising the fuel or hydraulic circuits, check that the connections are tight and that the hoses, unions, etc, are not
damaged. Before disconnecting any components in the fuel or hydraulic circuits, make sure that circuit is depressurised.
2.4.5 - Boarding and alighting from the tractor
Climb up and down from the operator position slowly, facing the tractor, using the handrail and access steps.
9
10
2-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.20.44
SAFETY
To avoid falling, always maintain three points of contact at a time (both hands on
the handrails and one foot on the steps or one hand on the handrail and both feet
on the steps).
Fig. 19
l
l
l
DO NOT use the control levers for handholds.

DO NOT climb up using the pedals as footholds.
DO NOT attempt to board or alight from the tractor when it is moving; wait until it has come to a complete stop.
NEVER jump down from the tractor, unless in an emergency.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Apply the parking brake.

Move all controls to the neutral position, (remember to disengage the PTO).
Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor to the ground;
Stop the engine.
Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes; on tractors with hydraulic gearboxes, always place chocks under
the wheels.
Remove the ignition key.
Alight from the tractor.
2.4.6 - Parking the tractor
Carry out the following operations before alighting from the tractor:
The tractor must be parked differently depending on the terrain and operational status of the engine:
l
l
Parking the tractor with the engine off

Parking the tractor with the engine running;
Parking the tractor on steep slopes

l
l
l
l
Apply the handbrake.

Move all controls to the neutral position;
Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor, to the ground;
Stop the engine;
Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes.
Parking the tractor with the engine running

l
l
l
Check that no-one is in the vicinity of the tractor;

Check that the tractor is parked on level ground;
Move all drive controls to the neutral position.

To park the tractor on slopes, proceed as indicated previously depending on the situation.
The chocks should normally be positioned under the rear wheels by a second person, who must stand to the side of the tractor at
all times.
If it is necessary to park the tractor on a steep slope, even for a short time, position chocks under the rear wheels to prevent it from
moving. It is in any case preferable not to park the tractor on sloping terrain.
10
If no assistant is available for this purpose, before alighting from the tractor the operator must fully engage the parking brake, check
that tractor is not moving, and then carefully position the chocks under the wheels while standing to the side of the tractor.
2-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.20.45
SAFETY
2.4.7 - Cleaning the tractor
l
l
Keep the area under the hood and the operator position clean.
Clean the access steps, the pedals and the floor of the operator position. Clean up any oil and grease. Brush away dust and
mud. During winter months, remove snow and ice.
Remove all tools, buckets, chains and hooks.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.20.45
SAFETY
l
l
l
l
l
2.5.1 - Start
DO NOT use the tractor while under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
The tractor speed must ALWAYS be adapted to suit the ground conditions. Avoid sharp turns when travelling up, down or
across slopes. Do not drive at high speed or corner with the differential lock engaged. When driving on slopes, never depress
the clutch or change gear.
Only attach trailers and/or implements in the specified manner. The operation, steering and braking characteristics of the
tractor are different when coupled to implements and trailers and when ballast is fitted. Check that the steering and braking
characteristics are adequate.
Before starting the engine, check that all the tractor controls are in neutral position. This is to prevent accidental movement of
the vehicle or starting of PTO-driven implements.
Start engine ONLY when seated in operators seat.
ONLY operate the controls when seated in the operators seat.
Move over to the side of the road to allow faster vehicles to overtake. Before turning, use the direction indicator and slow down.
Ensure that all the lights on the tractor are kept clean.
Make sure that the weight of a towed trailer without brakes does NOT EXCEED that of the tractor. The distance required for
the tractor to come to a stop increases with its speed as the inertia of the towed load increases, particularly on slopes.
Only use the 3-point linkage to hitch implements designed for the purpose; do not use it as a towing hitch. For towing use the
rear towing hitch (the front hook is for use in emergencies only). The rear towing hitch must NEVER be set to a position that
is higher than the rear axle.
The travel speed must be such as to allow complete control and stability of the tractor at all times. Where possible avoid operating tractor near ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce speed when turning on slopes and on rough, slippery or muddy
ground.
For safety reasons, it is good practice to engage a suitably low gear before tackling an incline.
DO NOT use ether based products to help start the engine when cold. Follow the instructions given in the Cold starting
heading.
2.5 - OPERATION
Meticulously follow the procedures recommended in the Section Use of the tractor in this Operation and Maintenance Manual. The
Using the Tractor section describes the procedure for normal starting, cold starting and emergency engine starting with a second
battery.
l
l
l
l
adjust the seat to suit your requirements

fasten the seat belt
apply the parking brake
put all levers in neutral
for tractors equipped with a mechanical lift, check the position of the levers
In addition to the measures indicated above pay special attention to monitoring the indicator lights and the use of fluids for starting.
2.5.2 - Checking indicator lights
In all cases, before starting the engine:
After starting, check all the indicator lights and instruments. Check that everything is functioning correctly.
If the tractor does not respond correctly to any of the controls, DO NOT use it until the fault has been rectified.
2.5.3 - Starting fluids
In cold climates, the tractor may be equipped with a thermostarter; for operating instructions, see the paragraph Starting.
2.5.4 - Auxiliary equipment

l
Implements and trailers must only be attached to the tractor using the appropriate hitches or drawbars. Implements or trailers
may only be towed from the rear towing hitch (the front hitch is only to be used in emergencies). The height of the rear towing hitch should never be positioned at a height that exceeds that of the rear axle. Only use the 3-point linkage with suitable
implements; do not use it as a tow bar.
10
DO NOT use aerosol spray starting aids to start the tractor when the thermostarter is connected to the electrical system. If ether comes into contact with the thermostarter it can cause an explosion and thus damage the engine and/or
cause serious injury.
DANGER
2-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.20.46
SAFETY
CAUTION
Do not stand or allow anyone else to stand between the tractor and the implement, unless the engine is shut off and
the key removed from the starter switch, the parking brake applied, a gear engaged and all attachments or implements
lowered to the ground.
l
For applications using PTO-driven implements with the tractor stationary, always put the gearbox in neutral, apply the parking
brake and chock the wheels of the tractor and the implement itself. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter Parking the tractor.
DO NOT use PTO drive shaft extensions or adapters that extend the drive shaft or universal joints beyond the protection of
the PTO shield.
Only use attachments and implements approved by the tractor manufacturer.
DANGER
DO NOT attempt to uncouple hydraulic connections or adjust implements with the engine running and the PTO rotating. To do so could result in very serious injury or death.
l
Check that the 3-point linkage is adjusted correctly (see Adjustment of the 3-point linkage in the Section Use of the Tractor)
in order to ensure that a sufficient number of threads are engaged on the threaded couplings.
Meticulously follow the producers instructions when storing and handling chemicals. Also follow the instructions of the manufacturers of the equipment designed for the application of chemical products.
Before using attachments or implements, read the relative Instruction Manual carefully and follow all the safety instructions.
CAUTION
A front loader (with fork or bucket) must be fitted with a load restraining device (round bales, rolls of fencing, wire, etc,)
to prevent the load, when raised, from rolling down from the lift arms onto the driving position and crushing the driver.
Inadequately secured objects and loads may fall and injure persons in the vicinity of the tractor.
l
l
DO NOT overload an attachment or trailed implement. Use the proper ballast weights to maintain the stability of the tractor.
Use the safety chain when transporting implements to prevent them becoming detached from the drawbar. Using the appropriate adapters, attach the chain to the towing hitch support or to another anchor point on the tractor. The chain should have only
enough slack to allow cornering. Use chains of suitable size and strength for the weight of the trailed implement.
Make sure that each trailerable implement is equipped with a safety chain to connect it to the tractor.
2.5.5 - Towing safely
For the maximum towable loads, refer to the paragraph Maximum towable loads in the Technical Data Section.
l
Maintain a suitable speed taking into account the weight of the trailed load and the gradient, remembering that braking distances will be greater than with just the tractor. Trailed loads with or without brakes that are too heavy for the tractor or that
towed at too high speed may cause the operator to loose of control of the tractor.
Always take into consideration the total weight of the implements and their loads.
CAUTION
When a trailer is hitched to the tractor, before you leave the driving seat remember to put all the controls in neutral, apply the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (if the tractor has a mechanical transmission) and remove
the key from the starter switch. If the tractor is not parked on level ground, ALWAYS place chocks under the wheels of
both the tractor and the trailer. For further information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter Working with
stationary implements in the safety section of this manual.
l
When trailers are hitched to the tractor, before you leave the operator seat remember to put all the controls in neutral, apply
the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (with mechanical transmissions) and remove the ignition key. ALWAYS
chock both the tractor and the trailer wheels. The best way to transport a tractor that has broken down is to transport it on a
low loader. Always secure the tractor to the loader bed with chains. Before transporting the tractor on a low loader or on a
railway wagon, make sure that the engine hood, doors, openable roof (if present) and windows are all closed and securely
fastened. Never tow the tractor at speeds in excess of 10 kph. An operator must stay in the operator position to steer and
brake the tractor.
10
2-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.20.53
SAFETY
2.5.6 - Driving on the road
DANGER
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
2.5.7 - Overturning
Comply with the highway code, including regulations concerning speed limits, correct use of lights, hazard warning lights and
slow moving vehicle warning signs.
When driving the tractor on the road, insert the connecting latch to lock the two brake pedals together. This is to ensure effective, even braking on both sides.
Make sure that that there is plenty of headroom before passing under power lines, bridges, etc.
Raise all implements to their lowest transport position and lock them in this position.
Disengage the power take-off and the differential lock.
Use the correct pin for the towing hitch and secure with its locking cotter.
Make sure that all necessary outline markings and the hazard warning lights (if required by local regulations) are in place and
in working order.
Clean all lights required for road use, front and rear, and make sure they are in working order.
The SMV (Slow Moving Vehicle) sign, the rotating beacon, flashing lights or other high-visibility equipment must be used in
compliance with the statutory rules of the highway code.
Fix the swinging towing hitch in a fixed position using the safety locks. If required by the rules of the highway code, affix the
appropriate safety warnings to the load.
DO NOT use work lights during transfer on public roads.
Make sure that the load does not obscure the hazard warning lights or other lights.
The SMV notice must be visibly displayed on the rear of the tractor.
Take extra care when driving on snow covered or icy roads.
When driving downhill never exceed the speed limit for the road and your vehicle and do not allow the engine speed
to exceed the maximum permissible rpm.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Never tow semi-mounted implements, trailers or agricultural machines by attaching them to the top link of the threepoint linkage. This could cause the tractor to rear up or overturn backwards.
DO NOT disengage the clutch or change gear after starting to drive down a slope.
For safety reasons, the tractor is equipped with a roll-over protective structure (ROPS), in the form of a fixed roll bar or cab, and seat
belts.
The following precautions should be taken to prevent the possibility of overturning:

l
l
l
l
l
Adjust the track width to suit the task in hand.

If the tractor is equipped with a front loader, keep the bucket and load as low as possible
A tractor with a front loader with loaded bucket should travel in reverse down a downhill slope and forwards on an uphill slope
On rough terrain, moderate the speed to avoid losing control of the steering.
To avoid roll over, always drive the tractor carefully and at a safe speed, especially on loose ground, when crossing ditches or
slopes or turning tight corners.
DO NOT attempt to make tight turns at high speed.
10
Fig. 20
In the event of overturning, grip the steering wheel firmly and do not attempt to
abandon the vehicle until it is completely stationary. If the cab doors do not open,
leave the operator position through the safety hatch identified by the relative decals.
2-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.20.55
SAFETY
l
Use extreme caution when working with the tractor on steep inclines.
Always drive straight up or down slopes, as traversing slopes across the
gradient could cause the tractor to overturn.
2
Fig. 21
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
When travelling up or down hill (on an incline) keep implements as close to the ground as possible.
An unloaded tractor or a tractor with a rear-mounted implement should tackle uphill gradients slopes in reverse and downhill
gradients travelling forwards.
DO NOT freewheel down a slope with the clutch disengaged or the gearbox in neutral.
When carrying out tasks requiring high tractive force, engage 4WD, if available.
Only loads suited to the tractor power output may be towed, see the Technical Data Section.
When towing a load at transport speed or in the field, lock the drawbar in the central position and use the safety chain.
NEVER tow by hitching to the top link of the 3-point linkage or from any point higher than the centre of the rear wheels.
Always use the towing hitches approved by the manufacturer and the corresponding lock pins.
Use front ballast weights to increase the stability of the tractor when towing heavy loads or to counterbalance a heavy rearmounted implement.
If the tractor is hitched to a heavy load or a fixed object, improper use of the clutch can cause the tractor to overturn.
If the front of the tractor starts to rise up, reduce speed and, if necessary, disengage the clutch immediately.
Reduce your speed when working on loose or slippery ground and when unseen hazards could be hidden by branches or
leaves.
DO NOT use the tractor to herd animals.
6
7
8
9
10
2-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.20.56
SAFETY
2.6 - MAINTENANCE
DO NOT carry out any maintenance of the tractor with the engine running
or still hot, or with the tractor in motion.
Incorrect connection of the battery terminals or incorrect connection of the

battery to a battery charger could damage the electrical system or even
cause the battery to explode. NEVER connect the battery terminals together. The acid electrolyte contained in the battery is highly corrosive and can
cause burns or even blindness if it enters the eyes. In an enclosed space
it is toxic. Never smoke or allow a naked flame in the vicinity when filling or
topping up the battery with electrolyte. Always wear safety goggles when
carrying out operations on the battery.
Before carrying out repairs or adjustments consult your Dealer and, if necessary, arrange to have the work carried out by
specialised technicians.
The implement and /or the tractor must be supported on suitable wooden blocks or stands. DO NOT use hydraulic jacks.
Before carrying out adjustments and/or maintenance of the electrical system, disconnect the lead from the negative (-) battery
terminal.
Fig. 23
NEVER use your hands to trace an oil or fuel leak. Use instead a piece of
wood or cardboard for this purpose. Always discharge the pressure before
disconnecting any part of a pressurised circuit. If engine oil, hydraulic fluid
or any fluid from a pressurised circuit penetrates your skin, seek medical
assistance IMMEDIATELY.
Regularly check the brakes; keep the brake fluid reservoir topped up. Make sure that the brakes are always correctly adjusted,
especially when towing trailers.
Fig. 22
10
Before carrying out any welding or repair work on a wheel or rim, ALWAYS remove the tyre first. In all cases, if you do not have
the necessary equipment or experience to do the job in complete safety, contact your Dealer.
Periodically check the tightness of all the nuts and bolts, especially the wheel and rim nuts. Tighten to the specified torques
(for torque values, refer to the Maintenance Section).
Fig. 24
2-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.20.56
SAFETY
2.7 - SAFETY ROLL BAR (ROPS)
The term ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) refers to the structural elements intended to protect the operator, secured by a seat
belt, from being crushed in the event of the vehicle overturning.
Today, all tractors must be equipped with ROPS or safety cabs approved to international OCDE/EEC standards. However, the presence of these safety devices is
not in itself sufficient to guarantee total protection if the operator does not ensure
that it is used correctly. Seat belts are another important safety feature and should
be worn whenever the tractor is in motion, except in the case described below.
3
Fig. 25
CAUTION
When a tractor equipped with a folding ROPS is being used in a situation in which it is necessary to lower the ROPS,
the seat belt must not be worn for as long as the ROPS is kept in the lowered position. This is to enable the operator
to jump off the tractor should be about to overturn. However, the seat belt must be used whenever the tractor is operated with the ROPS in the raised position.
CAUTION
The degree of protection afforded by the ROPS will be reduced if the device is damaged or modified. If the ROPS has
been involved in an accident in which the tractor overturned, or it has been modified in any way, it must be replaced
immediately.
Important:
The ROPS, the operators seat and all the fixings of the safety system must be thoroughly checked after any type of
accident and any damaged parts must be renewed. DO NOT attempt to repair or weld the ROPS. NEVER make any
modifications to the safety cab. For example, it is strictly forbidden to drill or weld the ROPS in order to install accessories.
The term FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) identifies the protective structure installed on a tractor in order to avoid or limit
operator risk in the event of falling objects during normal operation.
DANGER
This tractor is not equipped with a FOPS. If work must be performed in areas subject to the risk of falling objects from
above, consult your dealer before starting work so that the tractor can be equipped with an appropriate protective
structure.
OPS (Operator Protective Structure) identifies the protective structure installed on a tractor in order to minimise risk of operator injury
caused by objects penetrating into the operator position area.
DANGER
This tractor is not equipped with an OPS. If work must be performed in areas subject to the risk of the penetration of
objects into the operator position, consult your dealer before starting work so that the tractor can be equipped with an
appropriate protective structure.
10
2-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.20.56
SAFETY
DANGER
10
If the chemical manufacturers directions for use of the hazardous substance (e.g. pesticide) recommend the use of personal
protections, said protections must be used also while spraying the product.
The tractor equipped with ROPS does not provide any protection when using hazardous substances. Use all the personal protective equipment suitable for the tasks in hand and relative substances, in compliance with the requirements
of statutory legislation in your country.
2-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.20.56
SAFETY
2.8 - SAFETY CAB
The term ROPS refers to the structural elements intended to protect the operator, secured by a seat belt, from being crushed in the
event of the vehicle overturning.
Today, all tractors must be equipped with safety cabs approved to international
OCDE/EEC standards. However, the presence of these safety devices is not in
itself sufficient to guarantee total protection if the operator does not ensure that it
is used correctly.
3
Fig. 26
CAUTION
The degree of protection afforded by the safety cab will be reduced if the device is damaged or modified. If the cab
has been involved in accident in which the tractor overturned, or it has been modified in any way, it should be replaced
immediately.
Important:
The safety cab, the operators seat and all the fixings of the protective system must be thoroughly checked after any
type of accident; all damaged parts must be renewed. DO NOT attempt to repair or weld the ROPS. NEVER make
any modifications to the safety cab. For example, it is strictly forbidden to drill or weld the cab in order to install accessories.
2.8.2 - Emergency exits
If exit from the cab side doors is blocked (following an accident or vehicle overturn)
the alternative safety exits are indicated by decals.
7
Fig. 27
The possible safety exits are:

l
l
Rear window hatch (All tractors)

Front window (for versions with openable front window).
The expression F.O.P.S. (Falling Object Protective Structure): refers to a structure installed on the tractor intended to eliminate or
reduce the risk to the operator of injury from falling objects during normal use of the vehicle.
DANGER
10
This tractor is not equipped with a FOPS. If work must be performed in areas subject to the risk of falling objects from
above, consult your dealer before starting work so that the tractor can be equipped with an appropriate protective
structure.
2-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.20.56
SAFETY
OPS (Operator Protective Structure) identifies the protective structure installed on a tractor in order to minimise risk of operator injury
caused by objects penetrating into the operator position area.
This tractor is not equipped with an OPS. If work must be performed in areas subject to the risk of the penetration of
objects into the operator position, consult your dealer before starting work so that the tractor can be equipped with an
appropriate protective structure.
DANGER
European standard EN 15695-1 is applicable to the cabs of agricultural or forestry tractors and self-propelled sprayers.
In accordance with the stipulations of EN 15695-1 regarding cab classification, measurement of the internal positive pres
sure differential must be carried out in conformance with ISO 14269-5:
l
l
the engine operating at nominal speed;

the maximum quantity of air drawn from outside the cab (recirculation closed);
fan set to maximum speed.
The following terms and definitions are applied:

Hazardous substances: substances such as dust, vapours and aerosols, with the exception of fumigants which can be dispersed during the application of plant protection products and liquid fertilisers, which may have a harmful effect on the operator.
m Dust: general term identifying solid air-borne particles, finely divided and sedimented
m aerosol: suspension of solid, liquid or solid and liquid particulate in a gaseous medium with a negligible fall rate (generally less than 0.25 ms-1)
m Vapour: gaseous phase of a substance whose liquid or solid state is stable at 20 C and 1 bar (absolute).
The purpose of the standard is to limit the exposure of the operator (driver) to hazardous substances when applying plant protection
products and liquid fertilisers.
DANGER
Use all the personal protective equipment suitable for the tasks in hand and relative substances, in compliance with
the requirements of statutory legislation in your country.
This cab, even when closed, does not protect against the inhalation of hazardous substances. If the manufacturers instructions for
using these substances recommend personal protective equipment, wear the equipment even in the cab.
Cabs are classified as follows:

l
l
l
Category 1: The cab does not provide protection against hazardous substances.
Category 2: The cab provides protection exclusively from dust.
Category 3: The cab provides protection from dust and aerosol.
Category 4: The cab provides protection from dust, aerosol and chemical vapours.
The classification category, as stipulated by ISO 14269-5, of the cab installed on this range of tractors is given below:
l
l
the engine operating at nominal speed

the maximum quantity of air drawn from outside the cab (recirculation closed)
with fan at maximum speed

EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
10
Hazardous substances
protection category CAB
14 - CAB / ROPS
2-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.20.56
SAFETY
Avoid contact with pesticides
This cab, even when closed, does not protect against the inhalation of hazardous pesticides. If the manufacturers instructions for use
of the pesticide recommend personal protective equipment, wear the equipment even in the cab.
Before leaving the cab, ensure you are wearing all the personal protective equipment indicated in the instructions for use of the
substance.
Before entering the cab, remove all contaminated clothing and footwear in order to keep the cab interior clean.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.20.56
SAFETY
2.9 - DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL OF THE TRACTOR
2.9.1 - Decommissioning the tractor
When the tractor becomes inoperative, transfer it to a suitable location to take it out of service and place a clearly visible notice on it
informing of its decommissioned status.
2.9.2 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor

l
l
l
l
The tractor contains:
Fluids (hydraulic system, cooling system, etc.);

Gas (air conditioning system, accumulators, etc.);
Acid (batteries);
Heavy components of the machine;
WARNING
The tractor must be dismantled exclusively by authorised and qualified companies.
Legislation in some countries state that the organisation accepting the tractor (complete with license plates, logbook and owners
certificate or supplementary document) must, at the time of consignment of the tractor, issue an attestation of receipt that relieves
the user from any responsibility after consignment of the tractor (fines, accidents, etc.). The document must also show details of the
authorisation of the breaker.
Take the tractor directly to the dealer if you intend to purchase a new tractor.
IMPORTANT
None of the tractor materials are toxic or harmful so they can be handled without taking precautions.
The tractor is composed of steel, aluminium and plastic components: therefore the majority of the material can be recycled so the
scrapping procedure should involve sorting of the materials for subsequent reuse or differentiated disposal.
Lubricants and fuel must be disposed of in accordance with environmental regulations.
CAUTION
CAUTION
10
Use exclusively suitable tools and lifting devices, in compliance with the relevant regulations and legislation.
2-21
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 21
21/05/2012 13.20.57
SAFETY
2.10 - SAFETY WARNING NOTICES
2.10.1 - Adhesive safety warning decals
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fig. 28
10
2-22
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 22
21/05/2012 13.20.59
SAFETY
ALWAYS keep safety labels clean and legible. Replace any missing, damaged or paint-obliterated labels. Replacement labels can be ordered from your Dealer. The locations of safety labels and the parts codes for ordering them are
specified in this chapter. When replacing a part that carries a safety label, make sure that a label of the same type is
applied to the new part. Do not use fuel or solvents etc. to clean safety labels. Use a clean cloth dampened in soapy
water.
Position of safety decals
10
CAUTION
Fig. 29
2-23
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 23
21/05/2012 13.21.02
SAFETY
1.
Position: RH pillar (tractor with platform), on the right front lower glass panel (tractor with cab)
CODE
2.9939.272.0
TITLE
-
TEXT
Read and comply with the operating instructions and
safety precautions prior to operation.
IMAGE
2
3
Fig. 30
2.
Position: above the PTO guards.

CODE
2.9939.274.0
TITLE
-
TEXT
Take great care when using the PTO.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
manual
IMAGE
4
5
Fig. 31
3.
Position: on starter motor solenoid.

CODE
2.9939.295.0
TITLE
-
TEXT
IMAGE
Do not board the tractor when it is moving. Use caution when working on the electrical system Disconnect the negative lead from the battery before removing the cover over the solenoid valves and working on
the electrical system.
manual
Fig. 32
4.
Position: RH pillar (tractor with platform), on the window to the right of the drivers seat, near the pillar (tractor with
cab).
CODE
2.9939.296.0
TITLE
-
TEXT
Always fasten the seat belt.
manual
IMAGE
9
10
Fig. 33
2-24
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 24
21/05/2012 13.21.03
SAFETY
Position: On the brake and clutch oil reservoir.
CODE
2.9939.297.0
TITLE
-
TEXT
Before topping up the brake oil, refer to the user and
maintenance manual
IMAGE
5.
Position: on the right and left rear fenders.

CODE
2.9939.271.0
TITLE
DANGER
TEXT
Stand clear when using controls to move 3 point
hitch.
IMAGE
Fig. 35
Position: on right and left side of the engine radiator.

CODE
2.9939.273.0
TITLE
DANGER
TEXT
Keep hands clear of fan and belts while engine is
running.
IMAGE
Fig. 36
CODE
2.9939.280.0
TITLE
DANGER
TEXT
Do not remove the cap of the expansion tank cap
when the engine is hot because the circuit is pressurised and can injure the operator.
Read the instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
IMAGE
Position: engine cooling circuit expansion tank.
8.
7.
6.
Fig. 34
10
Fig. 37
2-25
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 25
21/05/2012 13.21.03
SAFETY
9.
Position: On the engine cooling system radiator
CODE
2.9939.329.0
TITLE
CAUTION
TEXT
Consult the Operation and Maintenance manual to
identify the type of liquid to be used in the cooling
system.
IMAGE
2
3
Fig. 38
10.
Position: On the rear window hatch.
CODE
2.9939.450.0
TITLE
-
TEXT
IMAGE
Indicates the emergency exit to use if it is not possible
to exit the cab through the doors:
Fig. 39
11.
Position: On the front grille of the hood.

CODE
2.9939.465.0
TITLE
-
TEXT
IMAGE
General hazard warning! Shearing hazard! Keep
clear of moving parts! Some parts of the machine can
reach very high temperatures, with a consequent risk
of burns!
6
Fig. 40
12.
Position: On right and left sides of the engine radiator, the right and left side panels, rear remote valves.
CODE
2.9939.449.0
TITLE
DANGER
TEXT
Danger. Very hot parts! Burns hazard!
IMAGE
8
Fig. 41
9
10
2-26
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 26
21/05/2012 13.21.03
SAFETY
Position: On left-hand fender (platform tractor), on rear cross member of cab (cabbed tractor).
TITLE
-
TEXT
Indicates the position in which the fire extinguisher
must be installed.
IMAGE
CODE
2.9939.448.0
Fig. 42
Position: LH front pillar (tractor with cab).

CODE
2.9939.471.0
TITLE
IMPORTANT
TEXT
IMAGE
During field work, only the operator must be inside the
cab. The presence of a passenger in the cab is only
permitted during road transport.
14.
13.
10
Fig. 43
2-27
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 27
21/05/2012 13.21.04
SAFETY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2-28
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 28
21/05/2012 13.21.04
1
2
3
4
5
10
3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

TRACTOR
3-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.21.04
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR

3.1 - EXTERIOR VIEWS OF THE TRACTOR
3.1.1 - Exterior views of tractor with ROPS
2
3
4
5
Fig. 44 - Front view of tractor in version with platform and ROPS
6
7
8
9
Fig. 45 - Rear view of tractor in version with platform and ROPS
10
3-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.21.06
3.1.2 - Exterior views of tractors with standard cab
Fig. 46 - Front view of tractor in version with standard safety cab
10
Fig. 47 - Rear view of tractor in version with standard safety cab
3-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.21.09

3.1.3 - Exterior views of tractors with high-visibility cab roof
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 48 - Front view of tractor in version with high-visibility safety cab
6
7
8
9
Fig. 49 - Rear view of tractor in version with high-visibility safety cab
10
3-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.21.12

3.2 - ACCESS TO THE DRIVING POSITION
3.2.1 - Access to the driving position for tractors with platform and ROPS
Steps and handrail
Access to the driving position is provided by steps (1) with two wide, non-slip
treads and a handrail (2) positioned in front of the access.
Fig. 50
3.2.2 - Access to the driving position for tractors with cab
Access steps and handrail
Fig. 51
Access to the driving position is facilitated by wide steps (1) with two or three nonslip treads and by two handrails (2), one on the door and the other next to the lock.
External lock
Wide doors fitted with key operated locks ensure easy entry into the cab.
Turn the key to the right to lock the door and to the left to unlock it.
Double-locking handles help prevent accidental opening of the doors.
When unlocked, press button (1) to open the doors from the outside.
10
Fig. 52
3-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.21.14

Internal lock
Opening the doors from inside the cab is achieved by an outwards movement of
lever (2) located on the door lock alongside the operator
2
Fig. 53
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.21.14

3.3 - OPERATOR SEAT
3.3.1 - Operator seats
The following operator seats may be installed on these tractors:

l
l
MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery, for platform tractors equipped with safety roll bar.
MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and fabric upholstery, for tractors equipped with cab.
MSG93/721 seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery, for tractors with cab.
3.3.2 - GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery
DANGER
The ample drivers seat is anatomically contoured and upholstered in non-slip material.
The seat can be adjusted to the desired weight, forward/backward positioning and backrest angle; it can therefore be
perfectly adjusted to suit the weight and stature of the driver.
Never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.
Fig. 54 - View of GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat
Lever for backward/forward seat adjustment

Seat spring firmness adjustment lever
Height adjustment knob
Lever for adjustment of the seat angle
Seat firmness adjustment indicator
Adjustable armrests
Head restraint
IMPORTANT
10
A buzzer alarm sounds for approximately 10 seconds if the engine is switched off without having first fully pulled up the
parking brake lever. The alarm also sounds if the driver leaves his seat while the engine is running.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.21.15

Seat adjustments
1.
Backward/forward seat adjustment

Pull the lever (1) upwards to move the seat forwards or backwards to suit
the stature and personal preference of the driver.
2
Fig. 55
2.
Seat spring firmness adjustment

Move lever (2) alternatively clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the firmness according to the weight of the driver. The indicator
(5) shows the seat firmness adjustment level.
4
5
Fig. 56
3.
Height adjustment
Turn the knob (3) to positions from 0 to 3 to raise and lower the seat. The
selected position is shown by a yellow indicator alongside the knob.
6
7
Fig. 57
4.
Adjustment of the seat angle

Pull the lever (4) upwards to vary the angle of the backrest according to the
personal preference of the driver.
8
9
Fig. 58
10
3-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.21.17
Adjustment of the side armrests

Pull the armrests (6) upwards to lock them in the vertical position according
to the personal preference of the driver.
5.
Fig. 59
Adjustment of the head restraint

Pull the head restraint (7) upwards to adjust its height. To completely remove the head restraint, pull upwards and then release the locking tabs.
6.
3.3.3 - GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and fabric upholstery
Fig. 60
DANGER
The ample drivers seat is anatomically contoured and upholstered in non-slip material.
10
The seat can be adjusted to the desired weight, forward/backward positioning and backrest angle; it can therefore be
perfectly adjusted to suit the weight and stature of the driver.
3-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.21.18
1
2
3
4
Fig. 60 - View of GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lever for backward/forward seat adjustment

Seat spring firmness adjustment lever
Height adjustment knob
Lever for adjustment of the seat angle
Seat firmness adjustment indicator
Adjustable armrests
Head restraint
IMPORTANT
Seat adjustments
1.
Backward/forward seat adjustment

Pull the lever (1) upwards to move the seat forwards or backwards to suit
the stature and personal preference of the driver.
8
9
Fig. 60
10
3-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.21.19
Seat spring firmness adjustment

Move lever (2) alternatively clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the firmness according to the weight of the driver. The indicator
(5) shows the seat firmness adjustment level.
2.
Fig. 60
Height adjustment
Turn the knob (3) to positions from 0 to 3 to raise and lower the seat. The
selected position is shown by a yellow indicator alongside the knob.
3.
Fig. 60
Adjustment of the seat angle

Pull the lever (4) upwards to vary the angle of the backrest according to the
personal preference of the driver.
4.
Fig. 60
Adjustment of the side armrests

Pull the armrests (6) upwards to lock them in the vertical position according
to the personal preference of the driver.
10
Fig. 60
5.
3-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.21.21

6.
Adjustment of the head restraint

Pull the head restraint (7) upwards to adjust its height. To completely remove the head restraint, pull upwards and then release the locking tabs.
2
Fig. 60
3.3.4 - Seat type GRAMMER MSG93/721 with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery
DANGER
The generously sized operators seat with pneumatic suspension is contoured to provide good all-round support and is upholstered
in non-slip material.
The seat features automatic adjustment to the operators weight, plus adjustments for forward/backward positioning, backrest angle
and lumbar support; it can therefore be perfectly adjusted to suit the weight and stature of the operator.
The seat is equipped with electro-pneumatic suspension to ensure maximum comfort, even when travelling at high speeds over
rough ground; the operator rides on a cushion of air that protects him from all bumps and jolts.
The system incorporates a compressor housed inside the seat base that automatically adjusts the suspension to suit the weight of
the operator.
6
7
8
9
10
Fig. 61 - View of GRAMMER MSG93/721 seat with pneumatic suspension

1.
2.
Lever for forward/backward adjustment

Lever for adjustment of the backrest angle
3-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.21.22
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fig. 61 - View of GRAMMER MSG93/721 seat with pneumatic suspension

Lever for adjustment of seat height in accordance with the operator weight
Weight adjustment indicator
Folding armrest
Knob for lumbar support adjustment
IMPORTANT
Seat adjustments
Forward/backward adjustment
Pull up on the lever (1) to move the seat forwards or backwards to suit the
stature and personal preference of the driver.
10
Fig. 62
1.
3-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.21.23

2.
Adjustment of the backrest angle

Pull lever (2) upwards to vary the backrest angle according to the preference of the driver.
2
Fig. 63
3.
Seat height adjustment in accordance with operator weight

Push lever (3) upwards to start the compressor, which raises the seat to the
desired height. Pull the lever to discharge the air from the shock absorber
and lower the seat to the desired position.
The selected position is shown by an indicator (4) next to the knob.
4
Fig. 64
4.
Lumbar support adjustment

Turn knob (5) to increase or reduce the depth of lumbar support.
6
Fig. 65
7
8
9
10
3-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.21.24

3.3.5 - Seat belt
The seat belt is adjustable. Carry out the following adjustments before starting the engine.
Fig. 66
To fasten the seat belt, insert blade (1) into slot (2).
To release the seat belt, press button (3).
The length of the seat belt can be adjusted as follows:

pull end (4) to shorten the belt
Fig. 67
pull end (5) to lengthen the belt
Fig. 68
WARNING
Always fasten your seat belt. The use of a seat belt reduces the risk of serious injury in case of an accident.
3.3.6 - Passenger seat (EXPLORER 105 -> 20001)

Your tractor is designed to carry just one person. In some countries it is permitted to fit a passenger seat supplied by
the manufacturer. Check first whether the tractor is homologated to carry a passenger.
CAUTION
The carrying of passengers is not permitted unless the tractor is equipped with a suitable seat. When using the passenger seat, observe local regulations, including those of the insurance company regarding injury at work.
10
DANGER
3-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.21.24

CAUTION
During field work, only the operator must be inside the cab.
The passenger seat is located on the left-hand side of the cab;
To close the seat proceed as shown below:
l
l
Move backrest (1) forwards

Turn backrest (1) and cushion (2) clockwise.
3
Fig. 69
3.3.7 - Passenger seat belt
The passenger seat is equipped with a seat belt.

Always fasten your seat belt to reduce the risk of serious injury in case of an accident. To fasten the seat belt, insert blade (1) into slot (2).
To release the seat belt, press button (3).
5
Fig. 70
6
7
8
9
10
3-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.21.25

3.4 - STEERING WHEEL
3.4.1 - Steering wheel

Adjustment
Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. Check that the steering wheel is firmly fixed in position
before driving the tractor.
The steering wheel is telescopic to allow both tilt and height.
DANGER
To adjust the height, turn the knob (1) anticlockwise to release the steering column, position the steering wheel at the desired height and then lock the steering
wheel by turning the knob clockwise.
Fig. 71
To adjust the tilt angle, pull the lever (2) upwards to release the steering column,
tilt the steering wheel to the desired angle and then lock the steering column by
pushing the lever downwards.
10
Fig. 72
3-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.21.25

3.5 - REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
3.5.1 - External rear-view mirrors

WARNING
If one or both rear-view mirrors accidentally fold inwards, stop the tractor immediately and reposition correctly.
For maximum control when performing difficult manoeuvres it is vital that the rear-view mirrors are correctly adjusted.
Adjust both rear-view mirrors.
Position the mirrors to obtain a clear view of the side of the tractor and the implement from the driving seat.
Horizontal adjustment
Loosen knob (1) and adjust the length of the arm. Retighten the knob after adjustment.
4
Fig. 73
Vertical adjustment
Tilt the mirror manually to obtain the best view from the operators seat.
6
Fig. 74
The mirror arms rotate about their pivots and can be turned inwards towards the
tractor to reduce the overall width of the vehicle.
As they rotate, the mirror arms pass through preset intermediate positions.
8
Fig. 75
9
10
3-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.21.25
3.6.1 - Instruments and controls for tractors equipped with platform and safety roll bar
3.6 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS FOR PLATFORM TRACTORS
Fig. 76 - Panoramic view of controls for tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle
Control panel
Steering wheel
Lights switch, horn
Ignition switch
Pedal controls
Lift controls
Controls for gearshift, speed range, mini creeper speed
Shuttle control
Parking brake
Hand throttle
Remote control valve levers
Control buttons console
PTO controls. (540/1000 PTO, Eco PTO, Groundspeed PTO)
Front wheel drive
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
3-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.21.27
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 77 - Panoramic view of controls for tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle
6
7
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Control panel
Steering wheel
Lights switch, horn
Ignition switch
Pedal controls
Lift controls
Shuttle control
Parking brake
Hand throttle
Front wheel drive
9
10
3-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.21.29

3.7 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS FOR CABBED TRACTORS
3.7.1 - Instruments and controls for cabbed tractors
Fig. 78 - Panoramic view of controls on tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle and mechanical lift
Control panel
Steering wheel
Lights switch, horn
Ignition switch
Pedal controls
Lift controls
Shuttle control
Parking brake
Hand Throttle
Front wheel drive
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
3-21
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 21
21/05/2012 13.21.30
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 79 - Panoramic view of controls on tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle and electronic lift
6
7
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Control panel
Steering wheel
Lights switch, horn
Ignition switch
Pedal controls
Lift controls
Shuttle control
Park Brake control
Hand Throttle
9
10
3-22
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 22
21/05/2012 13.21.31

3.8 - INSTRUMENTS AND TRACTOR CONTROLS
3.8.1 - Instrument panel
Fig. 80 - View of instrument panel
Tachometer
Total hour meter
PTO speed indicator
Fuel gauge
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning lights
Control pushbuttons
Digital clock
Trip hour meter / Alarms indicator
Shuttle status display (only for tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle)
Tractor speed indicator
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
IMPORTANT:
Some of the indicator lights described below may not be enabled on your tractor.
Tachometer
The engine tachometer indicates the speed of rotation of the engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).
10
The instrument panel is equipped with an analogue rev counter.
3-23
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 23
21/05/2012 13.21.34

Analogue rev counter
1
2
Fig. 81
Total hour meter

The total number of engine operating hours are displayed in the second zone of
the central display.
4
5
Fig. 82
PTO speed indicator

The third band of the display shows the PTO speed. Selecting the front PTO
switches on the warning light alongside the display and when the output shaft
starts to turn, the display will show the speed of rotation.
6
7
Fig. 83
The fourth band of the display shows the speed of the rear PTO engage/disengage control. On engaging the rear PTO, the indicator light alongside the display
illuminates and when the output shaft starts to turn, the display will show the speed
of rotation. The indicator light at the bottom of the display will illuminate to indicate
the type of PTO in use: SYNCRO/ECO/540/1000.
9
Fig. 84
10
3-24
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 24
21/05/2012 13.21.35

Fuel gauge
This gauge indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank.

When the needle enters the red section of the scale this indicates the LOW FUEL
condition, signalled also by the warning light located alongside.
Fig. 85

EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
150
150
150
Tank capacity litres
150
13 - FUEL TANK
WARNING
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.
Coolant temperature gauge

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
The bands indicate the various temperatures of the coolant:
l
l
end of blue zone = operating temperature

start of red zone = engine overheating
end of red zone = switch off engine immediately
Fig. 86
When the needle enters the red zone also the alarm light will illuminate.
CAUTION
10
If the needle moves into the red section, switch off the engine immediately.
3-25
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 25
21/05/2012 13.21.36

Warning lights
1
2
3
4
Fig. 87
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
8
11.
12.
13.
14.
10
15.
Tractor sidelights on - Green

ON - Indicates that the sidelights and low beam headlights are on
Main beam headlights - Blue
ON - Indicates that the main beam headlights are on
Direction indicators and hazard warning lights ON - Green
Flashes during operation of direction indicators or hazard warning lights
First trailer direction indicators and hazard warning lights ON - Green
Second trailer direction indicators and hazard warning lights ON - Green
Low brake fluid level - Red
ON - Indicates brake fluid is below minimum level.
Trailer braking system low pressure - Red
ON - Indicates insufficient hydraulic oil pressure in the trailer braking system
Parking brake applied - Red
ON - Indicates the parking brake is applied.
Alternator charge insufficient - Red
ON - Starter key set to START
OFF - After engine started
ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: check that the alternator drive belt is not broken; otherwise contact a Service Centre
ALARM warning light - Orange
ON - Indicates a tractor operating fault. When the warning light is on an audible alarm will sound intermittently.
In this situation the user may complete the work in hand but should take the tractor to an authorized service centre as soon
as possible.
ALARM warning light - Red
ON - Indicates a tractor operating fault. When the warning light is on the audible alarm will sound continuously.
In this situation the user must switch off the engine immediately and contact an authorized service centre.
Clogged filter or gearbox oil low pressure - Red
ON - Change the gearbox oil filter
N.B. In winter the warning light may remain illuminated for longer while the oil warms up.
Clogged air cleaner - Red
ON - Air cleaner clogged: clean
Clogged hydraulic oil filter - Red
ON - Renew oil filters
Low engine oil pressure - Red
ON - Starter key set to START
OFF - After engine started
ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: contact an authorised Service Centre
3-26
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 26
21/05/2012 13.21.37
Fig. 87
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
5
6
19.
18.
17.
Transmission oil pressure - Yellow

ON - Indicates low oil pressure.
Differential lock engaged - Orange
ON - Indicates activation of the differential locks, which inhibits steering
Four-wheel drive engaged - Orange
ON - Indicates engagement of four-wheel drive
Engine preheating - Yellow
ON - Indicates the engine preheating stage
HARE range engaged indicator light - Green
ON - Speed selection in fast version (hare symbol).
TORTOISE range engaged indicator light - Green
ON - Selection of medium speed range (tortoise symbol).
SNAIL range engaged indicator light - Green
ON - Speed selection in slow version (snail symbol).
Gearbox oil - Yellow
ON - Indicates low gearbox oil pressure
PTO clutch engagement - Red
ON - Indicates PTO clutch engaged
Engine speed memory button - Orange
ON - indicates that engine operation is governed by a speed stored in memory
Activation of ASM/SBA system - Red
ON - Signals activation of the ASM/SBA system
Activation of the STOP&GO system - Yellow
ON - Signals activation of the STOP&GO system
Hydraulic system unlocked light - Yellow
ON - Indicates that the hydraulic system is unlocked.
Automatic PTO activation - Yellow
ON or INTERMITTENT - Indicates activation of PTO in automatic mode
PTO unlocked indicator light - Yellow
ON - Indicates that the PTO is unlocked
16.
CAUTION
10
If the low engine oil pressure warning light stays on after the engine has started, switch off the engine.
3-27
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 27
21/05/2012 13.21.39

Setting parameters with the control buttons
The two buttons (1-2) on the instrument panel are used set certain operating parameters and to select the various display functions.
Press buttons (1-2) simultaneously for a few moments until an audible signal sounds indicating that the following functions may be set:
l
l
l
Clock
Wheels constant
Instrument panel brightness
Fig. 88
Digital clock
The clock has a 12 hour cycle; the top line of the display indicates the
respective half of the day:
l
l
AM - Morning
PM - Afternoon
5
Fig. 89
To set the time, proceed as follows:

l
l
6
l
l
Press both buttons (1-2) simultaneously to enable clock setting.

Press button (1) to select the hours or minutes (the selected digits will
flash).
Press button (2) to change the hours / minutes.
Press and hold down button (1) until you hear a beep then release the
button.
7
Fig. 90
IMPORTANT
When making this adjustment, the display will show the letters AM to indicate hours from 0-12, or PM to indicate hours
from 12-24. You can now access the wheel constant function; use of this function is restricted to authorised service
centres.
Wheels constant
IMPORTANT
This parameter setting must be changed only by an authorized service centre if rear tyres of different size are fitted
to the tractor.
After selecting the wheels constant function, proceed as follows:
l
l
10
Briefly press button (2) increase the selected digit by one unit at a time.
Briefly press button (1) to move from one digit to the next.
Press and hold down button (1) until you hear a beep then release the button.
Enter the value from the table corresponding to the size of rear tyre fitted.
3-28
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 28
21/05/2012 13.21.40

Tab. 4
PULSES PER 25 METERS
480/70R20
11.2R24
360/60R24
320/70R24
440/65R20
12.4R24
360/70R24
420/65R30
9.5R28
380/70R24
440/65R24
11.2R28
14.9R24
12.4R28
420/70R24
480/65R24
13.6R28
380/70R28
16.9R24
14.9R28
12.4R32
420/70R28
14.9R30
420/70R30
16.9R28
9.5R38
480/70R28
540/65R28
12.4R36
16.9R30
480/70R30
540/65R30
13.6R36
320/70R20
TYRE
4155
4113
4035
3924
3888
3783
3750
3591
3474
3417
3309
3177
3153
3060
3039
2964
4550
Located on the right-hand side of the dashboard is a plate indicating that all reprogramming of the engine ECU as regards the wheels constant must be carried out
exclusively at service centres authorized by manufacturer.
Dataplate code 2.9939.087.0 (if this dataplate becomes defaced it can be ordered
as a replacement part).
Fig. 91
IMPORTANT:
Changing the wheels constant value will partially alter the displayed tractor speed values.
10
Press and hold down button (1) again until you hear a beep indicating you have moved on to the next function: instrument panel
lighting brightness.
3-29
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 29
21/05/2012 13.21.40

Instrument panel brightness
On entering this function, the display shows the message LUM followed by a flashing letter to indicate the current selected brightness setting.
The letters indicate:
l
l
H - (High): High brightness

M - (Medium): Medium brightness
L - (Low): Low brightness
Fig. 92
To change the brightness setting, proceed as follows:

l
l
Briefly press button (2) to select the required level of brightness from those available (High - Medium - Low).
Press and hold down button (1) until you hear a beep then release the button.
Partial hour meter - Display of alarms
Partial hour meter

This display shows the number of tractor operating hours since the last reset.
This function is signalled by the hourglass symbol.
To reset the partial hour meter, briefly press button (2).
5
6
Fig. 93
IMPORTANT
The count is lost if the battery lead is disconnected
Display of alarms
Tractor alarms are signalled by:
l
l
a letter and a number on the display to the right of the instrument panel
an alarm warning light on the instrument panel
a buzzer
The letter on the display identifies the electronic unit in which the alarm was detected:
1.
2.
Letter shown on the display

m T: Transmission (only for tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle)
m I: Instrument (Instrument panel)
Alarm number
10
Fig. 94
3-30
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 30
21/05/2012 13.21.41

l
The severity level of the alarm is indicated by which of the warning lights is
illuminated:
High severity alarm (1)
The buzzer sounds continuously.
Medium severity alarm (2)
The buzzer sounds intermittently.
IMPORTANT:
Low severity alarms are not signalled by the warning light or the
buzzer, only the letter and number on the display.
Fig. 95
IMPORTANT:
To clear active alarms contact your authorized service centre.
Shuttle status display

Only for tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle
The
indicator
lights
show
the
selected
travel
direction.
(Upper light on - forward drive engaged)

(Lower light on - reverse drive engaged)
Travel direction not engaged
Fig. 96
1.
2.
3.
two
Tractor speed indicator
The speed of the tractor is shown in the top band of the display.
(the value is given in km/h or mph depending on the factory setting for the
intended market).
10
Fig. 97
3-31
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 31
21/05/2012 13.21.41

3.8.2 - Console switches
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ignition switch
Hazard warning lights switch
Corner lights control switch
Rotating beacon control switch (for tractors with platform, safety roll bar and
electronic 4WD engagement control)
Control switch for work lights positioned on both sides of the cab (for tractors with high-visibility cab roof)
Headlights switch
Cigar lighter (for tractors equipped with platform and roll bar)
Front PTO control switch (for tractors with cab and mechanical lift)
5.
6.
7.
Fig. 98
Ignition switch
Only for platform tractors with safety roll bar
Starter switch (1) is a key-operated device for starting and stopping the engine. A
rubber flip-open cover protects the switch from moisture.
l
4
5
Fig. 99
Only for tractors equipped with cab

The starter switch (1) is a key-operated device for starting and switching off the
engine.
l
6
7
Fig. 100
The ignition switch has the following three positions:
Electrical circuit disabled: - (STOP position)

To switch off the engine, operate the starter switch by turning the key to the STOP position. The key can
then be removed from this position.
Electrical circuit enabled: - (ON position)

The alternator charge and engine oil pressure warning lights illuminate on the instrument panel.
10
3-32
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 32
21/05/2012 13.21.42
Starting the engine: - (START position)

Operates the starter motor. When the engine starts, release the key, which will return to the ON position.
Before starting the engine, make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated. DO NOT run the engine in an enclosed area.
Exhaust gases can cause asphyxia.
CAUTION
Hazard warning lights switch
The hazard warning lights are activated by pressing this switch. This causes all the
direction indicators to flash simultaneously. Button (1) is equipped with an indicator
light that illuminates when the function is on. This switch can be activated even
when the engine is off and the key is removed.
Fig. 101
Headlights switch
This rocker switch (1) has three positions to control the headlights used for
driving on public roads:
Position 1 - Lights off and flasher enabled by lifting the stalk upwards.
Position 2 - Sidelights on and flasher enabled by lifting the stalk upwards.
When the headlights are switched on, the corresponding indicator light on
the instrument panel will illuminate green. The indicator light symbol is the
same as that shown on the switch, which will illuminate amber.
Position 3 - Headlights on dipped beam and flasher enabled by lifting the
stalk upwards.
IMPORTANT:
Fig. 102
The lights may also be activated when the engine is switched off.
A warning buzzer will sound if the starter key is removed when the
lights are on.
Corner lights control switch
Press the top part of the switch (1) to turn on the front work lights, press the bottom
of the switch (1) to turn them off. When the work lights are on, the symbol on the
switch (1) will illuminate amber.
10
Fig. 103
3-33
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 33
21/05/2012 13.21.42

Side work lights control switch
Only for tractors equipped with cab

Press the top part of the switch (1) to turn on the work lights positioned on both
sides of the cab. Press the bottom part of the switch (1) to turn the lights off.
When the work lights are on, the symbol on the switch (1) will illuminate amber.
l
2
Fig. 104
Flashing beacon switch

Only for platform tractors with safety roll bar
Press the top part of the switch (1) to turn on the flashing beacon.
When the flashing beacon is on, the symbol on the switch (1) will illuminate.
l
4
5
Fig. 104
3.8.3 - Steering wheel stalk control
On tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle, the steering wheel stalk control operates the:
1.
direction indicators, headlights, headlight flasher and horn
7
Fig. 105
On tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle, the steering wheel stalk control operates the:
1.
2.
direction indicators, headlights, headlight flasher and horn

Hydraulic shuttle control
2
1
9
Fig. 106
10
3-34
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 34
21/05/2012 13.21.43

Steering column switch
l
l
l
l
The steering column switch is a lever used to control the following:

Direction indicators
Headlights flasher
Switch headlights between dipped and main beam
Horn activation
Direction indicators
Fig. 107
Push the stalk forwards to activate the right direction indicator.

Pull the lever backward to activate the left direction indicator.
Lights switch
With all the lights off or the headlights on, pull the lever upwards to flash the main
beam headlights.
Fig. 108
With the headlights dipped, push the lever downwards to switch to main beam and
vice versa.
10
Fig. 109
3-35
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 35
21/05/2012 13.21.44

Horn
Press the tip of the lever to activate the horn.
2
Fig. 110
Shuttle control lever on steering column

l
The lever for engagement of the hydraulic shuttle has the following positions:
l
l
l
Position 0: Drive NOT engaged

Position 1: FORWARD drive engaged
Position 2: REVERSE drive engaged
To operate the lever, release it by pulling towards the steering wheel, then push it
forwards or backwards as required.
5
Fig. 111
3.8.4 - Right-hand console
Right-hand console for tractors equipped with platform and safety roll bar
The easily-identifiable controls on the right-hand console are arranged so that the most important ones are nearest the operator.
7
8
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10
Fig. 112
6.
7.
8.
Hand throttle
Front PTO control
Rear PTO control
Differential lock control
4WD engagement control
Rotating beacon switch
Cigar lighter
Cup/bottle holder
Rear lift controls
3-36
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 36
21/05/2012 13.21.45
Fig. 112
Remote valve control levers

Engine speed memory button
9.
10.
Right-hand console for tractors equipped with cab and mechanical lift
Fig. 113
Hand throttle
Rear PTO control
Rear lift controls
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
10
Right-hand console for tractors equipped with cab and electronic lift
3-37
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 37
21/05/2012 13.21.46
1
2
3
Fig. 114
4
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Rear lift controls

Rear lift lock control
Front PTO control
Rear PTO control
Automatic PTO control
Cup/bottle holder
Cigar lighter
3.8.5 - Control switches in cab roof lining - left-hand side

l
only for tractors equipped with standard cab roof
The easily-identifiable controls are arranged on the front left-hand side of the cab roof so that the most important ones are nearest
the driver.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Rear worklights switch
Front worklights switch
Rear screen wiper and washer pump switch (if available)
Windscreen washer pump switch
Windscreen wiper switch
8
Fig. 115

Equipped with an integral amber warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the flashing beacon.
10
3-38
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 38
21/05/2012 13.21.47

Equipped with an integral green warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the rear worklights
positioned on top of the cab.
Equipped with an integral green warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the front worklights
Rear screen wiper and washer pump
Equipped with an integral amber warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the rear screen wiper
and washer pump.
The switch has three positions:
l
l
Position 0 - Rear screen wiper off

Position 1 - Rear screen wiper on
Position 2 - Rear screen washer pump on.
Equipped with an integral amber warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the windscreen washer pump.

Equipped with an integral amber warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the windscreen wiper.
l
l
Position 0 - Windscreen wiper off

Position 1 - Windscreen wiper on, normal wiping
Position 2 - Windscreen wiper on, high speed wiping
3.8.6 - Control switches on cab roof lining - right-hand side

only for tractors equipped with high-visibility cab roof
The easily-identifiable controls are arranged on the front right-hand side of the cab roof so that the most important ones are nearest
the driver.

Rear screen wiper and washer pump switch
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fig. 116
3-39
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 39
21/05/2012 13.21.47

Control switch for activating the washer pump. The pump continues to operate until the switch is released.
The windscreen wiper works in conjunction with the washer and operates for a further 5 seconds after the
switch has been released.

Equipped with an integral green warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the front worklights
3
Equipped with an integral green warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the rear worklights
4
Control switch for activating the windscreen wiper.

l
l
l
Position 0 - Windscreen wiper off

Position 1 - Windscreen wiper on, intermittent wiping
Position 2 - Windscreen wiper on, continuous wiping
Rear screen wiper and washer pump switch

Control switch for activating the rear screen wiper.
l
l
l
Position 0 - Rear screen wiper off

Position 1 - Rear screen wiper on
Position 2 - Rear screen wiper on and rear screen washer pump on

Equipped with an integral amber warning lamp that illuminates to signal activation of the warning beacon.
8
3.8.7 - Ventilation system
To start and adjust the ventilation system, turn the blower selector to the required speed.
With the ventilation system functioning slight pressurisation is obtained of the cab interior. This ensures that ambient air can enter
exclusively through the filter located behind the front grille.
The fan selector can be operated also when the ignition key is simply inserted in the ignition switch.
The air flow is divided and oriented by positioning the vents appropriately.
10
3-40
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 40
21/05/2012 13.21.48

Ventilation controls
Cab ventilation control (1) is located on the front central part of the roof lining.
The control has the following positions:

l
l
l
Position 0: Blower off

Position 1: Blower at minimum speed
Position 2: Blower at medium speed
Position 3: Blower at maximum speed
Fig. 117

Cab ventilation control (1) is located on the front right-hand side of the cab roof
lining.
l
The control has the following positions:

l
l
l
l
Position 0: Blower off

Position 1: Blower at minimum speed
Position 2: Blower at low-medium speed
Position 3: Blower at medium-high speed
Position 4: Blower at maximum speed
Fig. 118
Air outlet and recirculation vents for tractors with standard cab roof
Fresh outside air is drawn through the filter integrated in the cab roof (in the rear part of the roof) and distributed throughout the cab
interior by directable and adjustable outlet vents.
The outlet vents are positioned as follows:
Fig. 119
Six outlet vents in the front central part of the cab roof lining
Fig. 120
10
The air flow for windscreen demisting is distributed through the slot along the top
of the instrument console; for rapid demisting, temporarily close all other air vents.
3-41
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 41
21/05/2012 13.21.48
One recirculation vent is located on each side at the rear of the cab roof.
Recirculation vent fully closed: fresh outside air is drawn exclusively through the
front grille and is filtered though a paper filter positioned inside the rear part of the
roof. Recirculation vent fully or partially open: provides partial recirculation of air
in the cab.
2
Fig. 121
Air outlet and recirculation vents for tractors with high-visibility cab roof
Fresh outside air is drawn through the filter integrated in the cab roof (along both sides of the roof) and distributed throughout the cab
interior by directable and adjustable outlet vents.
The outlet vents are positioned as follows:
Six air vents (three per side) at the front of the cab roof lining.
4
5
Fig. 122
The air flow for windscreen demisting is distributed through the two slots at the
front of the cab roof lining, between the windscreen and sun blind; for rapid demisting, temporarily close all other air vents.
7
Fig. 123
Four air vents (two per side) on the console located alongside of the operator
position.
9
10
Fig. 124
3-42
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 42
21/05/2012 13.21.49
Two air vents (one per side) at the rear of the cab, next to the cab pillars.
Fig. 125
One recirculation vent is located on each side at the rear of the cab roof.
To adjust air recirculation use specific lever (1):
l
Recirculation vent fully closed; air is drawn in entirely from outside the cab.
Recirculation vent fully or partially open; provides partial recirculation of air
in the cab.
Fig. 126
3.8.8 - Heating system

System controls
Turn control knob (2) to activate the heating system and adjust the temperature; set the blower to the desired speed using selector
(1).
The system is switched on and adjusted by means of the control located on the front of the cab roof lining (standard roof) or on the
front right side (high-visibility roof).
To warm up the cab quickly, turn the control knob to the maximum position and set the blower to maximum speed.
For rapid demisting of the windscreen, simply turn knob (2) to maximum position, turn blower knob (1) to maximum speed and close
the front outlet vents.
In this way, the warm air flow will be directed towards the slot located under the windscreen.
Once the required temperature has been reached, adjust the system as required.
Only for tractors with standard roof
Ventilation control
Heating control
1.
2.
10
Fig. 127
3-43
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 43
21/05/2012 13.21.50

Only for tractors with high-visibility roof
1.
2.
Ventilation control
Heating control
2
Fig. 128
Using the heating system
Tips on use of the heating system

l
Before starting the engine ensure that the ventilation system is switched off (simply switch off the ventilation fan) to avoid
overloading the tractor battery.
If the ventilation system has been running for prolonged periods at full power instead of switching it off suddenly allow it to run
for at least 20 seconds at minimum speed.
On switching on the system you should immediately feel an air flow from the vents. If not, switch off the system and locate
the fault.
Do not use the heating system in particularly dusty conditions.
Configuration of the heating system

The heating system consists of two units:
l
l
Ventilation unit (1) and heater matrix (2), located inside the cab roof lining.
Heat is supplied from engine coolant manifold (3). If the system fails to work, check the fuse in the terminal block located in
the cab roof lining.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blower
Heater matrix
Engine coolant manifold
Air cleaner
Directable outlet vents
Air recirculation vents
7
Fig. 129
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blower
Heater matrix
Engine coolant manifold
Air cleaner
Directable outlet vents
Air recirculation vents
9
Fig. 130
10
IMPORTANT
WORKING IN DUSTY ENVIRONMENTS: if necessary you can increase cab pressurisation to prevent the infiltration
of dust. In these cases it is advisable to close the air recirculation vents.
3-44
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 44
21/05/2012 13.21.50

3.8.9 - Air conditioning system
System controls
CAUTION
DANGER
Should the air-conditioning system piping develop a visible leak, do not approach with a naked flame, refrigerant gas
is inflammable and on combustion produces highly toxic substances.
The refrigerant in the air conditioning system can cause severe lesions.
The system is switched on and adjusted by means of the control located on the front of the cab roof lining (standard roof) or on the
front right side (high-visibility roof).
1.
2.
Ventilation controls
Air conditioning control
Fig. 131
Turn fan selector (1) to start the ventilation system and use control knob (2) to
adjust the temperature.
To cool the cab quickly, turn control knob (2) to the maximum position and set the
blower to maximum speed.

1.
2.
Blower and heater control

Temperature control
Fig. 132
Press button (1) to switch on the system and adjust by means of control (2).
Turn fan selector (1) to start the ventilation system.
To cool the cab quickly, turn control knob (2) to the maximum position and set the
blower to maximum speed.
l
l
l
l
l
Open the adjustable vents fully;

First turn the ventilation control knob and then turn on the air conditioner by pressing the control button;
If the tractor has been in the sun for a prolonged period, open the doors for a few minutes to allow the warm air to escape
from the cab.
Close the doors and set the recirculation control so that all the airflow is taken from inside the cab.
Once the required temperature has been reached, adjust the ventilation system and air recirculation control as required.
To cool the interior of the cab proceed as follows:
After a few minutes of operation the sight glass above the receiver-drier should be clear and free of air bubbles. Otherwise switch off
the system and consult our specialised personnel.
IMPORTANT
10
When working in dusty environments, if necessary you can increase cab pressurisation to prevent the infiltration of
dust; in these cases it is advisable to close the air recirculation vents.
3-45
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 45
21/05/2012 13.21.51

3.8.10 - Cab air filter
The cab air filters are designed to remove dust from air but do not afford protection against the chemical vapours emitted
by pesticides applied by sprayers.
When disposing of used filters, follow the regulations applicable locally regarding disposal of cartridges contaminated with harmful
substances.
CAUTION
The cab ventilation system filter must always be of the paper type; exclusively when working with hazardous substances (e.g. pesticide spraying) this filter must be replaced with a specific filter for the type of operation.
If the cab is not able to maintain the required air pressure level, carry out the following checks to identify the cause:
l
l
l
l
Set the blower to maximum speed and close the cab doors, rear hatch and windows. If the tractor is equipped with a roof
hatch, check that it is properly closed.
Check that the air filters are not clogged or obstructed.
Check the condition of the seals around the doors and windows in the cab.
Check the apertures for levers/tie-rods through to the outside of the cab.
If it is not possible to identify the cause by the above checks, contact an authorised service centre.
Special filters
CAUTION
Before working with harmful substances the external cab air filters (and internal, if installed) must be replaced with
special filters (e.g. activated carbon filters).
CAUTION
Follow the information supplied by the chemicals manufacturer company regarding protection against harmful substances.
CAUTION
Injury or death could result from prolonged periods of exposure to pesticides. When replacing the cab filters use exclusively original cartridges.
IMPORTANT:
These filters can never offer total protection against toxic substances.
IMPORTANT:
Special filters are removed and refitted in the same way as normal filters.
When spraying chemical substances the cab interior can be slightly pressurised. When the cab ventilation is activated the
air pressure inside the cab will increase relative to the outside air pressure, this pressure difference helps prevent the ingress of harmful
vapour. However, we strongly recommend that you scrupulously adhere to the safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of
the chemical substance.
Advice on safe working procedures:
l
9
l
10
l
l
When replacing the filters wear all the required personal protective equipment, replace the standard dust filter with the special
filter only if this is required by the operation to be carried out.
After each use, the filter should be removed from the cab and replaced in its original packaging, and the standard dust filter
should be installed. The carbon filter should be carefully sealed in its packaging in order to maintain its efficiency.
This filter, providing it is used for a total of no more than 200 hours, has a maximum service life of 36 months from the time the
package is first opened (the date of manufacture is marked on the filter).
The filter should be removed during use of the tractor for any applications other than spraying indicated by the manufacturer,
dust would clog the filter element in a very short time.
Do not wash the filter or clean it with compressed air.
Used filters must be consigned to specialised waste disposal centres.
3-46
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 46
21/05/2012 13.21.51

Change the active carbon filter after 200 hours of use or after 36 months. If the odours of any toxic substances used
become noticeable inside the cab, immediately change the filter and check the seal.
DANGER
When spraying pesticides, always follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the chemical product and the implement used for spraying.
3.8.11 - Cab
WARNING
Rear window hatch

The cab rear window hatch can be opened to two alternative positions by means of the folding and extendible handle.
Partial opening of the rear window

Grip handle (1), lift it and then push outwards, keeping handle (2) attached to the
anchoring support.
Fig. 133
Fig. 134
Complete opening of the rear window

Grip handle (1), lift it and then push outwards; now disengage handle (2) from the
anchor support.
10
Fig. 135
Closing the rear window

Grip handle (1) with one hand and pull it inwards while, with your other hand,
keeping handle (2) attached to the anchoring support. Then push handle (1) downwards.
3-47
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 47
21/05/2012 13.21.51

Openable front window
The tractor is equipped with an openable front window. Turn the lever (1) anticlockwise to open. The window can now be pushed forwards to a position in which it is
held by two gas springs.
2
Fig. 136
Openable roof hatch
The cab roof features a large window allowing improved visibility when operating
a front loader.
The roof hatch opens to allow ventilation; a sliding sunshield protects the cab from
direct sunlight.
5
Fig. 137
To open the hatch, first slide the sunshield fully backwards. Grip the handle and
turn it clockwise to disengage the safety catch, then push the handle upwards.
6
7
Fig. 138
Sunblind
Pull the blind downwards as required; it will automatically lock in position. Pull the
release catch and the sunblind will roll back up automatically.
9
Fig. 139
10
3-48
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 48
21/05/2012 13.21.53

Interior light
The interior light is located on the front left-hand side of the cab roof lining.
To switch it on, press the transparent cover.
Fig. 140

The interior light is located on the left-hand side of the cab roof lining.
To switch it on, press the transparent cover.
Fig. 141
Controls illumination light
Controls illumination light (1) in the roof lining (RH side) can be turned on by
means of switch (2).
This light illuminates the control console to the right-hand side of the operators
seat.
Fig. 142
Cable access hatch for routing external implement control cables into the cab
At the rear right-hand side of the cab there is a small flap through which control
cables for external implements may be routed into the cab.
To open the flap, first open the rear window hatch, then unscrew the locking catch
(1) and tilt the flap (2) backwards.
10
Fig. 143
3-49
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 49
21/05/2012 13.21.53
Close the flap as soon as the implement control cables have been routed into the
cab.
2
Fig. 144
Provision for radio

The radio is an optional feature.
WARNING
Check that the tightness of all retaining nuts and bolts to ensure that the radio is fixed firmly and cannot fall out of its
housing.

The radio housing is located on the front right-hand side of the cab roof lining.
l
5
6
Fig. 145

The radio housing is located on the left-hand side of the cab roof lining.
l
7
8
Fig. 146
9
10
3-50
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 50
21/05/2012 13.21.54

Loudspeakers for Radio
The tractor is equipped with two loudspeakers (one on each side) installed at the
rear of the cab.
Fig. 147

The tractor is equipped with two loudspeakers (one on each side) installed at the
rear of the cab.
Fig. 148
Cigar lighter
For tractors with mechanical lift only.
The cigar lighter (1) is located on the instrument panel; the lighter socket can also
be used as a 12V outlet.
Fig. 149
For tractors with electronic lift only.

The cigar lighter (1) is located on the right-hand side near the lift controls; the
lighter socket can also be used as a 12V outlet.
10
Fig. 150
3-51
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 51
21/05/2012 13.21.55

Storage compartment
Storage compartment (1) is located on the RH side of the tractor at the rear of
the auxiliary control valve levers. May also be used as a bottles and cans holder.
2
Fig. 151
3.8.12 - Operation & Maintenance Manual
The Operation & Maintenance manual contains all the information necessary to operate and maintain the tractor in safety
To prevent accidents, observe all the safety rules contained in the manual.
The manual must be kept on the tractor at all times. A special mesh pocket (1) on
the rear of the drivers seat is provided for this purpose.
5
Fig. 152
3.8.13 - Fire extinguisher

WARNING
The fire extinguisher must be in good working condition at all times and must always be installed its designated position! Adhere strictly to the servicing and inspection intervals specified by the manufacturer of the extinguisher.
Depending on the tractor equipment level, the extinguisher may positioned as follows:
l
l
Tractors with safety roll bar: on the left-hand fender;

Tractors with cab: behind the driving seat.
For tractors with safety roll bar

Two fixing holes are provided in the left rear fender which are to be used to mount the fire extinguisher bracket.
Bracket (1) must be fixed with the two screws (2).
9
10
Fig. 153
3-52
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 52
21/05/2012 13.21.57
The extinguisher (1) must be installed on the bracket.
Fig. 154
The bracket and fixing screws can be ordered from your dealer.
for tractors with cab

Two fixing holes are provided behind the operator seat, to be used to mount a fire extinguisher bracket.
Bracket (1) must be fixed to the pillar with the two screws (2).
Fig. 155
The extinguisher (1) must be installed on the bracket.
Fig. 156
The bracket and fixing screws can be ordered from your dealer.
3.8.14 - Hazard warning triangle
Fig. 157
10
Hazard warning triangle (1) is located at the rear of the tractor on the LH fender.
3-53
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 53
21/05/2012 13.21.59

3.8.15 - Wheel chock
IMPORTANT:
If you need to park on a steep gradient - more than 15 (33% gradient) - place chocks under the rear wheels to immobilise the tractor. It is any case the tractor should not be parked on a steep gradient.
The wheel chock is located at the rear of the tractor on the RH fender.
The wheel chock must be used in the following situations:

l
l
when the tractor is parked on a slope

when carrying out repairs or maintenance.
3
Fig. 158
The chocks must be located under the wheels as shown in the figure.
5
Fig. 159
3.8.16 - Toolbox
The tool box (1) is located on the right-hand side of the tractor, at the rear of the
access steps.
To open the tool box:
l
l
Remove drive belt (2)

Remove the toolbox using handle (3)
8
Fig. 160
9
10
3-54
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 54
21/05/2012 13.21.59

3.9 - OTHER CONTROLS
3.9.1 - Control pedals

Control pedals
Clutch pedal
Left brake pedal
Right brake pedal
Brake pedal connecting latch
Accelerator pedal
Fig. 161
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.9.2 - Clutch pedal

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal or keep it partially depressed when driving as this could cause premature
wear of the clutch plates.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not depress the clutch pedal or put the gearbox in neutral when driving downhill.
WARNING
Avoid keeping the clutch pedal depressed when the tractor is stationary. Select neutral, even when stopping for brief
periods.
The clutch disengages when the clutch pedal on the left of the operator position
is pressed.
When you intend to disengage the clutch, first reduce engine revs and then fully
depress the clutch pedal.
When the pedal is released after selecting a gear, apply the accelerator pedal appropriately to prevent sudden jolts in the movement of the tractor.
Once you have released the clutch pedal, remove your foot from it because even
slight pressure can result in premature wear of the clutch plate.
Fig. 162
3.9.3 - Brake pedal

CAUTION
When travelling downhill, and particularly when towing an implement or trailer, avoid prolonged use of the brakes by
selecting a low gear and using the braking action of the engine.
CAUTION
10
Do not brake using just one brake pedal when:

the differential lock is engaged; at high speeds; when towing a trailer .
3-55
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 55
21/05/2012 13.22.00
The service brakes are hydrostatically-operated wet disc brakes.

The tractor is equipped with two rear brakes, positioned on the rear axle shafts
upstream of the final reducers, and two front brakes positioned on the wheel hubs.
The front and rear brakes are applied simultaneously by pressing the brake pedals.
If latch (1) connecting the two pedals together is released, right-hand brakes (3)
may
be
operated
separately
from
left-hand
brakes
(2).
1.
2.
3.
Latch connecting the two brake pedals together

LH brake pedal
RH brake pedal
Fig. 163
3.9.4 - Parking brake lever (EXPLORER 105 -> 15001, EXPLORER 90 -> 15001, EXPLORER 90 -> 20001)
WARNING
Apply the parking brake after shutting off the engine and before leaving the driving position. For further information
on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter Working with stationary implements in the safety section of this
manual.
WARNING
When applying the parking brake, the lever must always be pulled up all the way
IMPORTANT:
A visual and audible alarm (buzzer) is emitted if, after switching off the engine, the parking brake lever is not moved
to the fully engaged position.
IMPORTANT:
A visual and audible alarm (buzzer) is emitted if you leave the drivers seat with the engine running without having first
fully pulled up the parking brake.
IMPORTANT:
Each time you apply the parking brake you must also engage four-wheel drive (applies only to tractors equipped with
mechanical four-wheel drive engagement).
The parking brake, which is completely independent from the service brakes, is
applied by pulling the brake lever upwards.
To manually disengage the parking brake, press the button on the end of the lever
and push the lever down.
9
Fig. 164
When the parking brake is applied, the warning light on the instrument panel illuminates.
IMPORTANT:
10
Each time the parking brake is applied, four-wheel drive will also be engaged automatically
and the relative indicator light will illuminate on the instrument panel (applies only to tractors
equipped with electro-hydraulic four-wheel drive engagement).
3-56
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 56
21/05/2012 13.22.00

Parking the tractor
l
l
l
The tractor must be parked differently depending on the terrain and operational status of the engine:
Parking the tractor with the engine running;

l
l
l
l
l

Move all controls to the neutral position;
Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor, to the ground;
Stop the engine;
Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes.
Engage four-wheel drive (applies only to tractors equipped with mechanical four-wheel drive engagement).
l
l
l
l
Parking the tractor with the engine running

Check that no-one is in the vicinity of the tractor;
Check that the tractor is parked on level ground;
Move all drive controls to the neutral position.

To park the tractor on slopes, proceed as indicated previously depending on the situation.
If it is necessary to park the tractor on a steep slope, even for a short time, position chocks under the rear wheels to prevent it from
moving. It is in any case preferable not to park the tractor on sloping terrain.
If no assistant is available for this purpose, before alighting from the tractor the operator must fully engage the parking brake, check
that tractor is not moving, and then carefully position the chocks under the wheels while standing to the side of the tractor.
The chocks should normally be positioned under the rear wheels by a second person, who must stand to the side of the tractor at
all times.
3.9.5 - Park Brake (EXPLORER 105 -> 20001)

CAUTION
Apply the Park Brake control after shutting off the engine and before leaving the operator position.
IMPORTANT:
A visual and audible alarm (buzzer) is emitted if the Park Brake is not activated after switching off the engine.
IMPORTANT:
A visual and audible alarm (buzzer) is emitted if you leave the drivers seat with the engine running without having first
activated the Park Brake.
IMPORTANT:
Each time you activate the Park Brake you must also engage four-wheel drive (applies only to tractors equipped with
mechanical four-wheel drive engagement).
l
l
The Park Brake acts on all four wheels, by automatically engaging four-wheel drive. The control has the following functions:
Parking brake
Emergency brake
Use the Park Brake control to slow down the tractor only in emergencies, i.e. when an anomaly is detected in the
service brakes control system.
10
CAUTION
3-57
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 57
21/05/2012 13.22.00

The Park Brake control is located to the left of the operator position.
1
2
Fig. 165
When the Park Brake control is engaged, the following warning lights turn on the dashboard:
Park Brake
Front wheel drive
5
Park Brake engagement/disengagement
To activate the Park Brake as a parking brake proceed as follows:
l
l
move lever (1) from 1st position (A) to 2nd position (B);
raise ring (2);
holding the ring in its raised position, move the lever from 2nd position (B)
to stop position (C);
release lever.
Raise ring (2) to disengage. Lever (1) automatically returns to the release position
(A), i.e. brake disengaged.
7
Fig. 166
To activate the Park Brake as an emergency brake proceed as follows:

l
move lever (1) from 1st position (A) to 2nd position (B);
Release the lever to disengage the brakes.
9
Fig. 167
10
3-58
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 58
21/05/2012 13.22.01

The Park Brake control is an electrohydraulic device and it increases or decreases the pressure in the brake circuit in relation to the
lever position.
l
lever in position A: brake disengaged;

between position A and position B: braking force modulation range (for use
in emergency braking only);
lever in position B: the brake ensures the maximum braking force within the
modulation range (for use in emergency braking only);
lever in position C: parking brake engaged (tractor immobilised).
Operation
Fig. 168
Safety disengagement in the event of a malfunction of the tractor

IMPORTANT
With the engine switched off, the Park Brake control can be disengaged once before the system tank empties.
If the tractor must be moved or the following conditions are present:

l
l
tractor stationary;
Impossible to start engine;
Park Brake control has already been disengaged once.
Move the tractors controls to the following conditions:

l
l
Park Brake disengaged;

ignition key to START;
four wheel drive switch to OFF.
IMPORTANT
With the controls at the above settings, the four wheel drive warning light stays on.
Operate the pump manually to repressurise the circuit, until the 4WD indicator light goes out.
To run the pump, proceed as follows:
remove cover (1) positioned behind the Park Brake control.
10
Fig. 169
3-59
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 59
21/05/2012 13.22.01

l
l
turn pump control (2) anticlockwise to unlock it;

press the control repeatedly to repressurise the circuit;
press the control all the way down and turn clockwise to lock.
2
Fig. 170
3.9.6 - Accelerator pedal

Use this pedal to vary the speed of the engine.
4
5
Fig. 171
3.9.7 - Electronic hand throttle

WARNING
When driving on the road, use the accelerator pedal only and never the hand throttle.
6
Electronic hand throttle for tractors equipped with platform and safety roll bar
1.
2.
3.
Mechanical hand throttle

Graduated scale
7
8
Fig. 172
The hand throttle control consists of a lever (1) which can be used to increase or decrease the engine speed.
Alongside the lever there is a graduated scale (2) that indicates the engine speed.
The lever position determines minimum engine speed.

Button (3) stores the current engine speed. A warning light on the dashboard lights up to confirm that the value has been stored.
If pressed again, the button calls up the stored value.
10
3-60
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 60
21/05/2012 13.22.01

Electronic hand throttle for tractors with cab
1.
2.
3.
For tractors equipped with mechanical lift

Graduated scale
Fig. 173
For tractors equipped with electronic lift

1.
2.
3.
Fig. 174
1.

Graduated scale
Fig. 175
The memory buttons located on the instrument panel and on the right-hand console perform the same function.
The hand throttle control consists of a lever (1) which can be used to increase or decrease the engine speed.
Alongside the lever there is a graduated scale (2) that indicates the engine speed.
The lever position determines minimum engine speed.

Button (3) stores the current engine speed. A warning light on the dashboard lights up to confirm that the value has been stored.
If pressed again, the button calls up the stored value.
WARNING
Never go away and leave the tractor with the engine running, unless absolutely necessary. In this case, put all the gear
levers in neutral and pull the parking brake lever right up. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter Working with stationary implements in the safety section of this manual.
3.9.8 - Transmission controls for tractors with mechanical shuttle
l
l
l
10
The transmission is composed of different units:

a 5-speed gearbox
a 3-speed range gearbox (L-M-V) with Slow (L), Medium (M) and Fast (V) speeds.
a super-reduction unit providing creep speed ranges (SR).
3-61
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 61
21/05/2012 13.22.02

l
l
1.
2.
a Hi-Lo unit that provides two speeds.

a mechanical shuttle for forward and reverse travel.
Main gear lever
Range shift lever
2
3
Fig. 176
1.
Shuttle lever
4
5
Fig. 177
3.9.9 - Transmission controls for tractors with hydraulic shuttle

WARNING
Never go away and leave the tractor with the engine running, unless absolutely necessary. In this case, put all the gear
levers in neutral and pull the parking brake lever right up. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter Working with stationary implements in the safety section of this manual.
l
l
l
l
l
1.
2.
a 5-speed gearbox
a 3-speed range gearbox (L-M-V) with Slow (L), Medium (M) and Fast (V) speeds.
a creeper with creep speed ranges (SR).
a Hi-Lo unit that provides two speeds.
an electrohydraulic shuttle, with a control lever on the steering column, that selects forward and reverse travel.
Main gear lever
Range shift lever
8
9
Fig. 177
10
3-62
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 62
21/05/2012 13.22.03

Shuttle lever
1.
10
Fig. 178
3-63
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 63
21/05/2012 13.22.03
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3-64
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 64
21/05/2012 13.22.04
1
2
3
4
5
10
4 - USING THE TRACTOR
4-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.22.04
USING THE TRACTOR

4.1 - INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 - Engine - first 50 operating hours
The tractor is delivered to the customer ready for use at full engine power thanks to the stringent testing phase that the engine
undergoes in our test room.

However, in the first 50 hours of use do not subject the tractor to full power full load operation for prolonged periods in order to allow
the piston rings to adapt properly to the cylinders and various moving parts to bed in correctly.
During this interval it is potentially harmful to run the engine at idle speed for prolonged periods and also to run it at high speeds in no
load conditions; this would result in bedding in of engine components in a manner different from that which would deliver maximum
efficiency throughout the full service life of the engine.
The safety seal on the engine governor is applied by the manufacturer and ensures that the power output of your
tractor does not exceed the declared and approved value. Any tampering with this seal on the governor will void the
warranty for the entire tractor with immediate effect.
In the first hours of use of the machine, the following procedures must be adhered to:
l
l
l
l
At each start-up allow the engine to run at low speed for a few minutes;
Do not use the engine continuously at low revs or at high revs with low loads;
During the first 20 service hours do not use the engine with excessively high loads; use the tractor in full load conditions for
periods that are gradually longer;
Before switching off the engine allow it to idle for a few minutes;
Adopt due care and attention when performing the checks and servicing operations listed below:
m engine oil level
m engine oil change
m renewal of oil filter
6
7
8
9
10
4-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.22.04
USING THE TRACTOR

4.2 - STARTING - STOPPING THE ENGINE
4.2.1 - Starting the engine:
Sit in the drivers seat, only in this condition is it possible to start up the engine.
Switch off all the electrical equipment powered by the battery (lights, direction indicators, fan, wipers, heating and air conditioning).
Move the gear lever and range lever to their neutral positions.
Move the shuttle control lever into neutral to obtain the signal for starting.
Move the controls of the rear PTO and front PTO (if present) to the disengaged positions. The PTO clutch control is also
equipped with a safety device to prevent starting the engine with the PTO engaged.
Check the position of the control levers (lift completely lowered) to avoid accidental movements of the lift arms during the startup procedure caused by inadvertent operation of the levers when the engine was off.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
1.
2.
Before turning the ignition key you must:
Starting aid fluids are highly flammable. When using them, keep them away from any possible source of sparks (batteries, connections, etc.). These fluids must be stored in a cool place.
The following abbreviations indicate the position of the ignition key.
STOP: Switching off the engine.
ON: Preheating stage.
START: Starting the engine:
Procedure for starting the engine

Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON symbol. All the warning lights on the instrument panel will illuminate briefly
for a lamp test (this test is signalled by a buzzer).
In this position, the red warning lights indicating battery charging, low engine oil pressure and low transmission oil pressure and the
yellow warning light for the preheating system and the orange four-wheel drive warning light will all remain illuminated.
These tractors are equipped with electronic devices to make starting the engine and parking the tractor safe operations.
1.
A brief flash, indicating that the engine may be started (if the coolant temperature is greater than 5C) without activating the
preheating system.
Continuous flashing, indicating the preheating system has been switched on electronically (if the coolant temperature is less
than 5C).
2.
The yellow warning light for the electronic preheating system may illuminate in two different ways:
l
l
l
Press the clutch pedal and move the gear lever and shuttle lever to neutral.
Start the engine by turning the key to the START position and accelerate as appropriate.
Once the engine has started, release the key, which will automatically return to the ON position.
10
Starting without preheating
4-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.22.04
USING THE TRACTOR

Starting with preheating
l
l
Press the clutch pedal and move the gear lever and shuttle lever to neutral.
The yellow indicator light will illuminate steadily to indicate that the preheating system has been switched on electronically.
When the indicator light goes out, start the engine by turning the key to START and accelerating as appropriate.
Once the engine has started, release the key, which will automatically return to the ON position.
Starting the engine when cold
WARNING
After starting the engine in low temperature conditions, do not rev the engine above 1800 rpm until it reaches its optimum working temperature.
Diesel engines are to be refuelled exclusively with diesel fuel of the type normally commercially available and which conforms to the
requirements of the applicable standards.
In winter, when the temperature falls below 0 C, it is essential to use winter diesel fuel, which allows the engine to run correctly at
temperatures down to 20C.
If summer diesel fuel is used at low temperatures, the molecules of paraffin contained in the fuel will be deposited on the filters which
will therefore become clogged and prevent the fuel from arriving at the injection pump.
Some markets offer winter diesel with the addition of special additives that make it suited to temperatures even below 20 C.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use ether based products to help start the engine when cold.
If winter diesel fuel is not available (or if it is used but the temperature is below
20C) kerosene (paraffin oil) may be added in the percentages indicated in the
diagram.
1 = summer diesel fuel
2 = winter diesel fuel
X = % of kerosene to be added
Y = ambient temperature in C
l
l
l
l
Fig. 179
Pour first the kerosene and then the diesel into the fuel and mix the two substances in the tank only.
For further information, contact an authorised workshop, your dealer or fuel supplier.
Emergency engine starting using a second battery

DANGER
Make sure you connect the battery terminals correctly. Danger of short-circuit!
DANGER
Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.
IMPORTANT
You can use the battery in another tractor for this purpose; only connect batteries of the same nominal voltage having
the same number of cells.
10
Before connecting up the cables, observe the following safety instructions:

l
l
Make sure that the two vehicles are not touching each other.
Switch off any unnecessary electrical equipment.
4-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.22.05
l
l
Set the gear lever to neutral.

Make sure the battery requiring assistance is properly connected to the vehicle chassis, that the caps are securely fitted, and
that the electrolyte level is correct.
USING THE TRACTOR
l
l
Connect the terminals of a specific cable to the positive terminal of flat battery (1) and then to the positive terminal of auxiliary
battery (2).
Connect the terminals of a second cable to the negative terminal of auxiliary battery (3) and then to the metal terminal of the
ground cable of the tractor with flat battery (4).
If the auxiliary battery is on another tractor, first start its engine and take it up to a speed corresponding to 1/4 of the maximum
engine speed.
Start the tractor with the discharged battery following the normal procedure.
Once the engine has started up, disconnect the terminals of the cables, following the reverse order to connection, first terminal
(4), then (3), (2) and lastly (1).
If the engine fails to start, wait 15-20 seconds for the starter motor to stop, then repeat the procedure a maximum of 3 or 4 times. If
the tractor still fails to start, check for problems with the engine or electrical system (starter motor, etc.).
To connect the two batteries, proceed as follows:
Diagram showing connection of batteries using jump leads

1.
2.
3.
4.
Positive terminal of the battery requiring assistance

Positive terminal of the auxiliary battery
Negative terminal of the auxiliary battery
Starter cable terminal connected to earth on the tractor with the battery
requiring assistance
Fig. 180
4.2.2 - Switching off the engine
Before stopping the engine, proceed as follows:

If the engine is very hot (especially if the engine is turbocharged), leave it
idle for a few minutes before stopping it.
Put the gear lever into neutral and operate the parking brake lever.
Turn the ignition key (1) onto STOP.
Fig. 181
4.2.3 - Turbocharging using the turbocharger
The function of the turbocharger is to deliver a greater amount of air to the cylinders; this also makes it possible to increase the fuel
flow rate in a proportional manner in order to increase engine power.
The turbine is driven by the engine exhaust gas (this recovering part of the kinetic energy of the gas which would otherwise
be dispersed) and it drives the compressor, which serves to compress the intake air drawn into the cylinder intake manifold through the
air cleaner.
The turbocharger unit, which features simple and rational design, consists of a turbine and a compressor.
Never accelerate to max revs with a cold engine. Run the engine at idle speed for 1-2 minutes to allow the oil to heat up gradually to ensure perfect lubrication of the turbine (the turbocharger is lubricated with engine oil).
Before stopping the engine after several hours of heavy harvesting work, allow it to idle for approximately 2 minutes; this is to
prevent the turbo from coasting at high speed without adequate lubrication.
10
The following operating instructions must be observed in order to avoid damaging the engine, and particularly the turbo
charger:
4-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.22.05
USING THE TRACTOR

4.3 - TRANSMISSION
4.3.1 - Transmission
DANGER
When driving downhill never exceed the speed limit for the road and your vehicle and do not allow the engine speed
to exceed the maximum permissible rpm.
The meanings of the abbreviations and indicator lights associated with range and shuttle control are as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
Snail = SLOW speed ranges

Tortoise = MEDIUM speed ranges
Hare = FAST speed ranges
S Snail = CREEPER speed ranges
A = FORWARD direction engaged
RM = REVERSE direction engaged
Hi-Lo: SNAIL
4
Hi-Lo: HARE
5
l
l
l
a 5-speed gearbox;
a three-speed reduction unit (Snail - Tortoise - Hare) providing the various speed ranges;
a creeper unit with Creep speed ranges in addition to the ranges above;
a mechanical shuttle for selection of forward and reverse travel or, alternatively, a hydraulic shuttle with a control mounted on
the steering column for selection of forward and reverse travel;
an electrohydraulic Hi-Lo gearbox with two speeds (snail, hare) that doubles the number of both forward and reverse gears.
Gearbox configuration for tractors with mechanical shuttle

The possible transmission configurations are listed here:
15 forward gears + 15 reverse gears

l
l
l
5 speeds
3 ranges
Mechanical shuttle
8
9
Fig. 182
10
4-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.22.05
USING THE TRACTOR

l
5 speeds
3 ranges + Creeper
Mechanical shuttle
Fig. 183
l
l
l
5 speeds
3 ranges
Mechanical shuttle
Hi-Lo
Fig. 184
l
l
l
5 speeds
3 ranges + Creeper
Mechanical shuttle
Hi-Lo
Fig. 185
Gearbox configuration for tractors with hydraulic shuttle
The possible transmission configurations are listed here:

l
5 speeds
3 ranges + Creeper
Hydraulic shuttle
10
Fig. 186
4-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.22.06
USING THE TRACTOR

l
l
l
l
5 speeds
3 ranges + Creeper
Hydraulic shuttle
Hi-Lo
2
Fig. 187
Main gear lever

Use the main gear lever to change the gearbox ratio when the tractor is in motion.
The tractor is equipped with a 5-speed gearbox (1).
4
5
Fig. 188
Range/Creeper unit lever

Use the range lever to select the appropriate speed range for the work in hand.
WARNING
Only operate the creeper lever when the tractor is stationary and the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
The tractor is equipped with a 3-speed range gear lever (1) as well as a creeper
gear.
7
8
Fig. 189
9
10
4-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.22.08
USING THE TRACTOR

Hi-Lo control buttons
l
Press button (1) to increase the speed ratio (Snail Hare).

Press button (2) to decrease the speed ratio (Hare Snail).
The Hi-Lo controls consist of two pushbuttons
Fig. 190
Fig. 191
The selected ratio is displayed by the illumination of the corresponding indicator

light on the instrument panel.
Example of use of the transmission with Hi-Lo

The actual tractor speeds will differ those in the table, which are to be interpreted as examples only.
Tab. 5
0.376
0.557
0.740
0.977
1.057
1.296
1.565
2.082
2.747
3.646
3.365
4.985
6.633
8.749
11.613
10.188
15.093
20.081
26.489
35.159
0.322
0.477
0.635
0.837
0.906
1.111
1.342
1.785
2.355
3.125
2.884
4.985
5.685
7.499
9.954
8.732
12.936
17.212
22.704
30.135
1 RED
2 RED
3 RED
4 RED
5 RED
Harvesting - Yard work
1 SLW
2 SLW
3 SLW
4 SLW
5 SLW
Primary and secondary tillage - 1 MED
2 MED
Haymaking
3 MED
4 MED
5 MED
Fast secondary tillage and 1 FAST
harvesting work Transport and 2 FAST
3 FAST
transfers between fields
4 FAST
5 FAST
PTO applications.
FORWARD SPEED IN KM/H AT 2300 RPM, ENGINE WITH REAR TYRES 420/70-30 - VERSION 40KM/H
MAIN TYPES OF WORK
40 FWD + 40 REV TRANSMISFORWARD SPEED
LO (TORTOISE)
HI (HARE)
SION
10
When working using the gearbox with the Hi-Lo control, power can flow from the engine to the gearbox without interruption, making
for a considerable increase in daily production and significant savings in time and fuel.
4-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.22.08
USING THE TRACTOR

Automatic clutch button on gear lever
1
2
The system allows the driver to change gear without depressing the clutch pedal
by using instead the button (1) on the gear lever .
In this case the driver presses the button and moves the lever, selecting the required speed, keeping the button pressed, and then, when in position, releases
the button.
The clutch disengages immediately the button is pressed. When you release the
button, pressure is modulated to suit the gear engaged at the time.
Fig. 192
Travel speed selection

l
l
l
l
Start the engine.

Select the range from those available using the range lever and select the required speed.
The selection of tractor travel speed depends on the type of terrain, the implement used, the type of work to be performed, etc.
Do not use excessively high gears as this would overload the engine.
As a simple check of whether or not the engine is overloaded, move the throttle to 1/4 of its maximum travel, then quickly accelerate
to maximum speed.
If the engine speed tends to decrease instead of increase, it can be assumed that the engine is overloaded. In this case, engage a
lower gear.
For the correct choice of gear, consult the speed tables given in the technical data chapter.
To shift from one gear to another within the same range, use only the main gear lever after disengaging the clutch.
To select the desired range gear, with the tractor stationary, disengage the clutch and operate the range gear lever.
Overspeed transmission
IMPORTANT
Some of the gearboxes mounted on this range of tractors are equipped with Overspeed.
IMPORTANT
The speed is set electronically at 40 km/h. Remember to modify the wheel constant on the instrument panel when
mounting tyres of a different size to those previously mounted.
This transmission configuration guarantees reaching 40 km/h in 5th gear, and with the fast speed range selected, an economy engine
speed (less than maximum).
The engines electronic control unit receives information on the tractor travel speed from sensors located in the gearbox and
manages the number of engine revolutions to guarantee the maximum speed (40 km/h) at a speed below maximum and with reduced fuel
consumption.
A tractor equipped with H-M-L and OVERSPEED transmission travelling in 5th

gear with the high range (HIGH) at 40 km/h, when negotiating a hill climb does not
oblige the operator to scale down from HIGH to MEDIUM, as the OVERSPEED
system enables the engine to maintain a speed of 40km/h, increasing the engine
revs, thus obtaining more power to satisfy the higher torque demand.
10
Fig. 193
Allowing the engine to run a lower speed than the max power rpm and nearer to that of maximum torque rpm makes it possible to
4-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.22.08
achieve lower fuel consumption and greater comfort for the operator because of a reduction in the engine noise, transmission vibration and resonance typically associated with transport work.
4.3.2 - Mechanical shuttle
USING THE TRACTOR
The shuttle is governed by a lever on the floor to the left of the driver that engages
a pair of gears for driving forwards or a pair of gears with a shuttle gear for reversing.
Fig. 194
4.3.3 - Hydraulic shuttle
The hydraulic shuttle consists of an oil-immersed dual clutch that allows engagement of forward and reverse gears without using the
clutch pedal.
With the hydraulic shuttle, the forward speeds are the same as the reverse speeds.
The shuttle lever is located on the left below the steering wheel.
To move forward, move the lever forward.
To reverse, move the lever back.
The HYDRAULIC SHUTTLE control lever has three positions and to be operated
it must be pushed axially towards the steering wheel.
Position 0: Gearbox in NEUTRAL
Position 1: FORWARD direction engaged
Position 2: REVERSE direction engaged
The HYDRAULIC SHUTTLE lever can therefore be used to change from forward to reverse and vice versa when the tractor is in
motion without using the clutch pedal. For safety reasons, the forward and reverse gears can only be engaged at speeds of less than
10 km/h. If the HYDRAULIC SHUTTLE lever is moved inadvertently at speeds greater than 10 km/h, the travel direction is only changed when the speed falls below 10 km/h, and in the meantime the error is shown on the display and indicated by means of a buzzer.
Fig. 195
When using the hydraulic shuttle, there is no connection between the wheel and the engine, and therefore on uneven
terrain the tractor must always be blocked with the handbrake, and possibly with a chock placed beneath the wheels.
IMPORTANT:
The system preventing the tractor from unintentionally getting started is managed electronically by two sensors connected to the
parking brake and to the driving seat.
Protection and safety devices on the tractor
If the parking brake is not engaged and the operator is not seated in the drivers position, if the shuttle lever is activated, the electronic control unit refuses the command and activates a buzzer for 10 seconds while the tractor remains
in neutral.
10
IMPORTANT:
4-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.22.09
USING THE TRACTOR

IMPORTANT:
If the shuttle lever is activated inadvertently when the operator is not seated in the drivers position, the electronic
control unit refuses the command and activates a buzzer for 10 seconds while the tractor remains in neutral.
If the user engages the direction unintentionally, without the necessary safety conditions (for example without pressing the clutch pedal and gear not engaged), the
instrument panel will signal these conditions with a buzzer and making --N-- (1)
blink alternately and the direction indicators engaged (2) and the letter N (3).
3
Fig. 196
Control for adjustment of the forward/reverse shuttle engagement rate
On the shuttle lever there is a control (1) that allows the operator to adjust the rate
of engagement of the shuttle (faster - HARD or slower - SOFT).
The control has three positions and affords 5 levels of adjustment.
5
Fig. 197
The 5 adjustment levels are as follows:

l
l
l
l
l
HARD +2
HARD +1
MEDIUM
SOFT -1
SOFT -2
Starting with the shuttle engagement rate set to Medium, the operator can either
increase the rate by rotating the control forward or reduce it by rotating the control
backwards.
8
9
Fig. 198
IMPORTANT:
Each time the tractor is switched on, the system will automatically restore the last level to be selected.
10
To change the engagement rate, proceed as follows:

l
move the control towards either Hard or Soft to activate a display showing the level currently selected;
4-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.22.10
when the display is activated, move the control once towards Hard or Soft to select the desired engagement rate; each operation of the control increases or decreases the engagement rate one step at a time;
release the control, which will return to its initial position.
USING THE TRACTOR
If no commands are given within 4 seconds, the display will return to its original state.
The level set is shown on the right-hand side display for 4 seconds.
l
l
l
l
HARD +2 (H +2)
HARD +1 (H +1)
MEDIUM (M 0)
SOFT -1 (S -1)
SOFT -2 (S -2)
The display indications are as follows:
10
Fig. 199
4-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.22.11
USING THE TRACTOR

4.4 - FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
4.4.1 - Engaging front-wheel drive
Engaging front-wheel drive in addition to the permanent rear-wheel drive, increases performance for transport on steep roads, rough
terrain and when increased traction is required.
IMPORTANT
We recommend that front-wheel drive be used during road transport only if increased traction is required. This is to
prevent unnecessary tyre wear.
IMPORTANT
Engaging and disengaging front-wheel drive is possible only when the tractor is at a complete standstill.
3
The tractor can be fitted with one of the following types of front-wheel drive engagement:
l
l
Mechanical engagement
Electrohydraulic engagement
Mechanical engagement of front-wheel drive

IMPORTANT
Always engage front-wheel drive when you apply the parking brake.
To engage front-wheel drive, pull control lever (1) located to the left of the operator;
the lever will remain locked in position.
To disengage front-wheel drive, press lever (1), which will return to the rest position.
6
Fig. 200
On top of the lever there is a plate illustrating how to use the control.
8
Fig. 201
A warning light on the instrument panel signals engagement of front wheel drive.
10
4-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.22.11
USING THE TRACTOR

Electrohydraulic engagement of the front-wheel drive
IMPORTANT
Front-wheel drive is automatically engaged whenever you apply the parking brake.
For tractors with platform and safety roll bar
To engage front-wheel drive, press the electrohydraulic control pushbutton (1) on

the instrument panel; the pushbutton will remain in the pressed position and the
integral green indicator light will illuminate.
To disengage front-wheel drive, press pushbutton (1) again, which goes back into
the rest position and the indicator light goes out.
Fig. 202
For tractors equipped with cab and mechanical lift

the instrument panel; the pushbutton will remain in the pressed position.
To disengage front-wheel drive, press again pushbutton (1), which will return to
the rest position.
Fig. 203
10
4-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.22.12
USING THE TRACTOR

For tractors equipped with cab and electronic lift

the instrument panel; the pushbutton will remain in the pressed position.
To disengage front-wheel drive, press again pushbutton (1), which will return to
the rest position.
2
Fig. 204
4.4.2 - Front and rear differential locks

CAUTION
Do not engage the differential lock in the following circumstances. speed greater than 15 km/h when driving round
bends with a single brake pedal depressed.
IMPORTANT
Never engage the differential locks while a wheel is slipping excessively; in this situation, always depress the clutch
pedal before engaging the differential locks.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT travel on roads or at high speed when the differential lock is engaged. This could make steering difficult and
thus cause accidents, injury and damage.
The tractor is always equipped with a rear differential lock; the front differential lock is optional.
The differential locks are only to be engaged when travelling in a straight line and before the wheels start to slip excessively.
Differentials lock switch for tractors equipped with platform and safety roll bar
The control is electro-hydraulic. To lock the differentials, press the pushbutton (1),
which will remain in the pressed position, and the integral indicator light will illuminate.
To disengage front-wheel drive, press pushbutton (1) again, which will return to the
rest position, and the indicator light will go out.
9
Fig. 205
Engagement of the differential locks is signalled by the illumination of the corresponding indicator light on
the instrument panel.
10
4-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.22.13
USING THE TRACTOR

Differentials lock switch for cabbed tractors
Differentials lock switch for tractors equipped with mechanical lift
Fig. 206
The control is electro-hydraulic. To lock the differentials, press the pushbutton (1),
which will remain in the pressed position, and the integral indicator light will illuminate.
To disengage front-wheel drive, press pushbutton (1) again, which will return to the
rest position, and the indicator light will go out.
Differentials lock switch for tractors equipped with hydraulic lift
The differential locks are operated electrohydraulically; to lock the differentials,

press the pushbutton (1), which will remain in the pressed position.
To disengage front-wheel drive, press pushbutton (1) again, which will return to
the rest position.
10
Fig. 207
4-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.22.14
USING THE TRACTOR

4.5 - BRAKING
4.5.1 - Brakes, SEPARATE BRAKES Valve

CAUTION
During road transport, the two brake pedals must be always latched together. This is to ensure even braking on both
sides of the tractor and maximum braking efficiency. Tight bends must be taken at low speed.
This device enables braking on the rear wheels only, when the brake pedals are operated separately. This prevents skidding of the
front wheel during separate braking and thus helps avoid damage to crops since the front wheel is not braked.
Different types of braking can be accomplished thanks to this valve.
All-wheel braking
When both brake pedals are operated simultaneously (pedals linked together).
This is strongly recommended for transport, transfers between fields and when
working on slopes.
4
Fig. 208
Braking on the two inner wheels only

For minimum turning radius in restricted spaces and to reduce time spent in headland manoeuvres.
6
7
Fig. 209
Braking on rear inner wheel only

For minimum turning radius on worked ground.
8
9
Fig. 210
10
4-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.22.15
USING THE TRACTOR
l
l
l
l
l
l
A - Valve position
B - Brake pedal
b1 - Left
b2 - Right
b3 - Linked
ON - Braking on one wheel
OFF- Lateral braking
The above-described braking actions are selected according to the position of the valve, as shown in the following diagram.
Fig. 211
Brake valve (on right-hand side under cab)

Control cock.
1.
2.
Separate brakes valve
Fig. 212
4.5.2 - Hydraulic trailer braking

CAUTION
The tractor must be equipped with a trailer braking system, which must be properly connected to the trailer.
The tractor may be equipped with an optional hydraulic trailer braking system.
The oil utilised is taken from the main hydraulic circuit of the tractor by means of a specific directional control valve.
This directional control valve is operated by a valve that is connected hydraulically to the tractor brakes hydrostatic control.
With the key in the ignition switch, when the control is in the OFF position, a warning light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The
same light also illuminates to indicate insufficient pressure to operate the trailer brake. The control valve is also connected to the
handbrake, so that the trailer brake is applied when the handbrake is operated.
For trailers with a safety brake, the system is equipped with a specific directional control valve. This control valve has an ON-OFF
control that allows the valve to be connected hydraulically (ON position); or excluded (OFF position).
IMPORTANT
For adjustment of the braking system, contact your authorised Same service centre.
Hydraulic directional control valve for trailer braking system

Hydraulic directional control valve for trailer
Manual control of the directional control valve
10
1.
2.
Fig. 213
4-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.22.17
USING THE TRACTOR

4.5.3 - Mixed-automatic air braking system
CAUTION
The tractor must be equipped with a trailer braking system, which must be properly connected to the trailer.
IMPORTANT
This device provides the possibility to keep the trailer braked when the the tractor parking brake is activated with the
tractor stationary.
An engine driven compressor delivers compressed air to the trailer air brakes (see the drawing in the figure).
For any maintenance or adjustment operations that require specially trained personnel, contact the system manufacturer directly.
3
4
5
6
Fig. 214
Diagram of the mixed-automatic air braking system
7
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Compressor
Pressure regulator unit with safety valve
Air reservoir
Directional control valve
Couplers
Pressure gauge
Solenoid valve (Germany version only)
Drain valve for draining water from the air reservoir
RED coupler
YELLOW coupler
BLACK coupler (Germany version only) for trailers with brakes that are mechanically applied and pneumatically released.
When towing trailers, always fully comply with the highway code, even on private agricultural land.
After connecting the male coupler on the trailer hose to the female coupler on the back of the tractor, check that there is no air leakage
from the connection by depressing the brake pedal a few times with the engine switched off.
IMPORTANT
The trailer air reservoir will not receive air if the couplers are not connected correctly.
10
4-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.22.20
USING THE TRACTOR
After connecting the air couplers, make the electrical connection and check that
the lights work; check also that pressure gauge (1) is functioning correctly and
showing a pressure reading of 8 bar (do not drive the tractor until the pressure in
the reservoir has reached 8 bar).
In the event of pressure loss in the control valve, it will still be possible to operate the emergency braking system by way of the control
on the tractor.
Fig. 215
This control is normally used for trailer parking.

The trailer brakes must always be applied slightly in advance of the tractor brakes.
Adjustment is by way of the directional control valve; this operation is restricted to specially trained personnel.
IMPORTANT
Never unhitch the trailer without first making sure that it is unloaded.
l
l
l
l
the condition of the hoses;

the operation of the pressure gauge;
the tension of the compressor drive belt;
for oil leaks from the compressor;
that the couplers are always perfectly clean and that the valves inside the couplers function correctly (by checking that the air
arrives at the air reservoir on the trailer).
10
Every 30 operating hours, drain the water from the reservoir by operating the drain valve located at the bottom of the reservoir.
Check periodically:
4-21
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 21
21/05/2012 13.22.21
USING THE TRACTOR

4.6 - REAR PTO
4.6.1 - Power take-off
This tractor can be fitted with the following types of PTO:

l
l
l
l
Rear PTO (540/1000 rpm)

ECONOMY MODE PTO
Groundspeed PTO (Syncro)
Front PTO (1000 rpm)
CAUTION
Do not operate the PTO at engine speeds above rated speed. An excessively high speed could damage the implement and cause injury.
WARNING
With certain PTO driven implements, such a rotary mowers, hay balers, etc. the implement must be connected through
an over-running clutch, otherwise the PTO brake could be damaged.
WARNING
Before dismounting from the tractor, always disengage the PTO, lower implements to the ground, put the gearbox controls in neutral, apply the parking brake, shut off the engine, engage first gear (on tractors with mechanical gearboxes)
and remove the key from the starter switch. For further information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter
Working with stationary implements in the safety section of this manual.
DANGER
Before disengaging the PTO, wait until the attached implement is almost stationary, otherwise the inertia of the implement could cause damage to the PTO. Only when the PTO has been disengaged and the engine has been switched
off is it possible to approach and carry out maintenance.
DANGER
For safety seasons, the PTO shaft shield must never be removed. The safety cap over the PTO shaft must only be
removed in order to couple the PTO shaft to the implement drive shaft when the engine is stopped. We recommended
that this cap is always replaced with the engine is shut off when the PTO shaft is not is to be used.
DANGER
When connecting or disconnecting the PTO drive shaft, shut off the engine and apply the parking brake. For further
information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter Working with stationary implements in the safety section of this manual.
DANGER
After disconnecting the drive shaft from the PTO output shaft, always screw the cap back on to the output shaft.
DANGER
Only change the PTO output shaft when the tractor engine is shut off and the key is removed from the starter switch.
CAUTION
If the tractor is equipped with a PTO clutch control of the lever type, always make sure that the lever is in NEUTRAL
before turning the key to start the engine. The engine will not start otherwise.
DANGER
During PTO work, no one must be in the vicinity of the power take-off or the drive shaft.
10
4-22
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 22
21/05/2012 13.22.21
USING THE TRACTOR

When using the tractor with stationary implements driven from the PTO (for example, irrigation pump), before leaving the tractor make sure that all gear levers are in neutral, that the handbrake is fully engaged and that the tractors
wheels are chocked. For further information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter Working with stationary
implements in the safety section of this manual.
WARNING
4.6.2 - Rear PTO (540-1000 rpm)
The tractor is equipped with a rear PTO with 2 speeds: 540 rpm and 1000 rpm.
Procedure for engaging the PTO:
l
l
l
release the PTO (this operation must be performed whenever the tractor is started);
select the required rotation speed (540-1000 rpm);
engage the PTO.
l
l
l
l
Procedure for disengaging the PTO:

throttle the engine back to idle speed;
wait until the implement is almost stationary;
disengage the PTO;
put the PTO speed selector in neutral.
Unlocking the PTO

On starting the engine, the PTO is locked and must be unlocked before it can be used.
To unlock the PTO, hold down pushbutton (1) for at least 2 seconds.
Position of PTO unlock pushbutton for platform tractors with safety roll bar.
Fig. 216
Position of PTO unlock pushbutton for cabbed tractors with mechanical lift.
10
Fig. 217
4-23
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 23
21/05/2012 13.22.22
USING THE TRACTOR

Position of PTO unlock pushbutton for cabbed tractors with electronic lift.
1
2
Fig. 218
When you press the unlock button:
l
l
the PTO warning light on the dashboard illuminates steadily;

the PTO unlock warning light on the dashboard starts flashing.
After 2 seconds:
l
l
the PTO warning light on the dashboard turns off;

the PTO unlock warning light on the dashboard illuminates steadily;
The PTO will remain unlocked until the tractor engine is next switched off.
IMPORTANT:
Once unlocked, the PTO cannot be locked again while the engine is running.
PTO unlocked indicator light on the dashboard.
6
Rear PTO speed selector
WARNING
At the end of each operation, put the PTO clutch control into neutral and return the PTO speed selector to neutral.
7
IMPORTANT:
Use the rear PTO selectors only when the engine is switched off.
To select the speed (540/1000 rpm), use the selector lever (1) located on the left of the tractor behind the operators seat, following
the indications on the control sector plate.
Selection of the 540 or 1000 rpm PTO is signalled by illumination of the corresponding indicator light on the instrument panel.
9
10
4-24
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 24
21/05/2012 13.22.23
USING THE TRACTOR

85-100-110 hp models - 540/1000 two-speed PTO
110 hp models - 540/1000 four-speed PTO
Fig. 219
85-100 hp models - 540/1000 four-speed PTO
Fig. 220
Rear PTO clutch engage/disengage control

The control is equipped with an control unit that manages activation and deactivation of the PTO control.
To engage the rear PTO, use the control lever on the instrument panel.
l
press the pushbutton once and the indicator light on the instrument panel will flash;
press the pushbutton a second time and hold for at least 2 seconds and the light on the instrument panel will illuminate steadily.
To deactivate the PTO, press the pushbutton again.

After finishing the work in hand, before disengaging the PTO clutch, throttle the engine back to idling speed, wait for
the implement revolutions to drop, then press the switch to disengage the PTO clutch. This will prevent the PTO brake
from overheating dangerously when drive is transmitted back to the shaft from the implement through inertia.
Self diagnosis - platform tractors only
IMPORTANT:
The indicator light in the control switch also has the function of flashing diagnostic codes to identify problems detected in the PTO
control system.
On starting the tractor engine, the indicator light will blink to show that the control system has been activated.
DESCRIPTION
2
Solenoid valve disconnected
3
Control switch continuously activated
4*
Speed sensor fault
5
Solenoid control output signal short circuiting to earth or in overcurrent
6*
Speed excessive
7
Internal ECU fault in power stage
8
Sensor presence detected in configuration where not required
*: Alarms present in U.S.A. configuration only.
P/N
Tab. 6
If a fault occurs with the control, the electronic control system will deactivate the PTO.
10
This system also disengages the PTO whenever the engine is switched off.
Ground-operated PTO controls
4-25
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 25
21/05/2012 13.22.23
USING THE TRACTOR

To release the PTO, proceed as described above.
The status of the PTO is indicated by a LED integrated in the control switch:
l
l
LED on: PTO locked

LED off: PTO unlocked and ready for use.
To engage the rear PTO using the ground-operated controls (1) located on
the fenders, proceed as follows:
l
l
press the pushbutton once and the integral indicator light will flash;
press the pushbutton a second time and hold for more than 5 seconds to
activate the PTO; the integral indicator light will be extinguished.
3
Fig. 221
4.6.3 - ECONOMY MODE power take-off
In addition to the 540-1000 rpm P.T.O., the tractor can be equipped with the 540 ECO and 1000 ECO rpm P.T.O..
When the ground conditions are relatively easy, it is often the case that the power required from the tractor engine is significantly
lower than the maximum power output.
In these cases with the P.T.O. in ECONOMY MODE the engine can run at a much lower speed without affecting the implement
rotation speed and working capacity.
Working in this mode gives major advantages in terms of less specific consumption and less stress on the engine.
The selection between the NORMAL and ECONOMY version is made with the
lever (1).
6
7
Fig. 222
Operation in ECONOMY mode is signalled by the associated light on the instrument panel coming on.
8
9
Fig. 223
10
4-26
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 26
21/05/2012 13.22.23
USING THE TRACTOR

4.6.4 - Ground speed power take-off
WARNING
The tractors can be equipped with an additional output shaft of 1 3/8 with 6 grooves for the PTO that is synchronized with the rear
wheels.
When using the groundspeed PTO, remember that when you drive the tractor in reverse gear, the direction of rotation
of the PTO shaft will also be reversed. Therefore, with certain implements it is advisable to disengage the PTO before
engaging reverse gear in order to avoid damaging the implement.
Fig. 224
To engage, pull upwards on the lever located to the left of the driver.
A warning light on the instrument panel signals engagement of the synchronized
P.T.O..
Fig. 225
Rear P.T.O. shafts
540/1000 rpm output shaft

Synchro P.T.O. shaft
1.
2.
Fig. 226
10
The automatic PTO system makes it possible to stop rotation of the rear PTO shaft whenever the lower links are raised above a
certain height.
4.6.5 - Automatic power take-off
4-27
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 27
21/05/2012 13.22.24
USING THE TRACTOR
It is activated by pressing button (1) located on the multifunction armrest.

A warning light on the instrument panel signals engagement of the automatic PTO.
2
Fig. 227
When the device is activated, the indicator light on the instrument panel will flash and the rear PTO operation will be deactivated
automatically as soon as the lower links are raised above a certain height.
To subsequently restart the rear PTO you must press the activation button again.
The automatic PTO system will remain active as long as the integral indicator light stays on and will intervene every time the lower
links are raised above the preset height.
When the implement is lowered below the preset maximum lifting height and the tractor speed is less than 2 km/h the PTO is
automatically disengaged. To subsequently restart it, you must press the on button again.
IMPORTANT
When the automatic PTO control is deactivated also the rear PTO control is deactivated.
5
6
7
8
9
10
4-28
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 28
21/05/2012 13.22.24
USING THE TRACTOR

4.7 - FRONT PTO
4.7.1 - Front power take-off (1000 rpm)
Fig. 228
On request, the tractor can be equipped with a front PTO (1) driven directly from
the engine crankshaft via a gearbox and a clutch capable of transmitting full engine power.
The front PTO operates completely independently of the rear PTO.
Unlocking the PTO

To unlock the PTO, hold down pushbutton (1) for at least 2 seconds.
IMPORTANT:
The PTO is unlocked by pressing the rear PTO pushbutton.
Position of PTO unlock pushbutton for platform tractors with safety roll bar.
Fig. 228
Position of PTO unlock pushbutton for cabbed tractors with mechanical lift.
10
Fig. 228
4-29
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 29
21/05/2012 13.22.28
USING THE TRACTOR

Position of PTO unlock pushbutton for cabbed tractors with electronic lift.
1
2
Fig. 228
When you press the unlock button:
l
l
the PTO warning light on the dashboard illuminates steadily;

the PTO unlock warning light on the dashboard starts flashing.
After 2 seconds:
l
l
the PTO warning light on the dashboard turns off;

the PTO unlock warning light on the dashboard illuminates steadily;
The PTO will remain unlocked until the tractor engine is next switched off.
IMPORTANT:
Once unlocked, the PTO cannot be locked again while the engine is running.
PTO unlocked indicator light on the dashboard.
6
Front PTO engagement control
The control is equipped with an control unit that manages activation and deactivation of the PTO control.
To engage the front PTO, proceed as follows:
l
press the pushbutton once and the indicator light on the instrument panel will flash;
press the pushbutton a second time and hold for at least 2 seconds and the light on the instrument panel will illuminate steadily.

Position of the front PTO control pushbutton on tractors with platform and safety
roll bar.
8
9
Fig. 229
10
4-30
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 30
21/05/2012 13.22.29
USING THE TRACTOR
Position of the front PTO control pushbutton on tractors with cab and mechanical
lift.
Fig. 230
Position of the front PTO control pushbutton on tractors with cab and electronic lift.
FL
OAT
PTO
AUTO
10
Fig. 231
4-31
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 31
21/05/2012 13.22.30
USING THE TRACTOR

4.8 - HYDRAULIC REAR LIFT
4.8.1 - Hydraulic lift

CAUTION
Make sure no-one is in the vicinity of the implement before using the hydraulic lift.
CAUTION
Always lower the implement to the ground when the tractor is not in operation or when carrying out maintenance,
repairs or adjustments.
CAUTION
Never use the lift links for towing implements. Only tow implements using the homologated towbars or towing hitches.
Towing or hitching using other points of the tractor can cause the machine to overturn.
CAUTION
Do not stand or allow anyone else to stand between the tractor and the implement, unless the engine is shut off and
the key removed from the starter switch, the parking brake applied, a gear engaged and all attachments or implements
lowered to the ground.
CAUTION
If the tractor is equipped with rear mechanical lift, before starting the engine check the position of the control levers
(lift fully lowered), to avoid accidental movements of the lift arms during the start-up procedure caused by inadvertent
repositioning of the levers when the engine was off.
The tractor may be fitted with the following lift types:
l
l
l
hydraulic rear lift with load-sensing mechanical control;

electrohydraulically controlled rear lift;
hydraulic front lift connected to a hydraulic control valve outlet.
4.8.2 - Mechanically controlled rear load sensing lift

Lift diagram
The rear lift unit for the control of mounted implements, semi-mounted implements, and trailed implements is composed
of:
l
a hydraulic unit positioned above the PTO casing;

a three-point linkage to which the implements to be lifted are attached.
The mechanically controlled hydraulic lift unit has the following functions:
l
l
l
l
l
l
automatic implement position control;

automatic draft control;
mixed draft/position control;
automatic control of implement drop rate with Valvematic system;
rapid implement entry;
hydraulic control of external implements.
Lift components diagram (3-point linkage)
9
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Lift cover
Top link
Lift rod
Lower links
Lift arms
Levelling box
Sensing device
When the top link is attached at hole 8, the lift capacity is increased
When the top link is attached at hole 9, the lifting height is increased
Category II - 510 mm
Fig. 232
4-32
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 32
21/05/2012 13.22.30
USING THE TRACTOR

DANGER
On tractors with mechanically controlled lifts, if the controls are operated while the engine is shut off, the lift will move
the arms the moment the engine is started.
Lift controls
The lift controls are composed of:

l
lift control lever, on the instrument panel to the operators right;

depth control lever, on the instrument panel to the operators right;
Lift control lever (Lever 1)

This lever controls rotation of the lift arms and thus the height of the lower links.
Mechanical lift controls for platform tractors with safety roll bar.
Fig. 233
Mechanical lift controls for cabbed tractors.
Fig. 234
l
l
The control lever quadrant is divided into coloured sectors with different functions:
yellow sector - used to raise and lower the implement;
yellow/green sector - used to set the required working position for the implement in position control and mixed draft-position
control applications;
blue sector - float position, in which the implement can follow the ground contours.
The control lever quadrant is equipped with a stop screw that makes it easy to return the lever to the same position repeatedly.
Depth control lever (Lever 2)
This lever causes the top link to extend, making it possible to control the required working depth automatically according to
the resistance that the implement encounters in the soil.
10
The control lever quadrant is equipped with a stop screw that makes it easy to return the lever to the same position repeatedly.
The range of action of this lever is indicated by the green sector and the numbers 0 to 12 on the graduated scale.
4-33
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 33
21/05/2012 13.22.31
USING THE TRACTOR

Mechanical lift controls for platform tractors with safety roll bar.
1
2
Fig. 235
Mechanical lift controls for cabbed tractors.
4
Fig. 236
Positions of the lift levers in different working conditions
6
7
8
Fig. 237 - Control lever sectors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Maximum draft control

Control - green sector
Minimum draft control
Lowering
FLOAT - blue sector
Mixed control
Position - yellow sector
Raising
Implement raising/lowering
l
10
l
l
To raise the implement, pull lever 1 back into the yellow sector until the lift reaches the desired height.
To lower the implement, push lever 1 forwards, to the limit of the yellow sector.
Lever 2 should be set to No. 12 of its quadrant.
Transfer with implement raised

4-34
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 34
21/05/2012 13.22.31
USING THE TRACTOR
Lever 1 must be pulled back to its limit.

Position control operations (rotary harrows, cultivators, fertilizer spreaders, etc.)

l
l

Move lever 1 along the yellow sector to the desired working position, and position the stop screw so as to be able to return to
the same position on subsequent passes.
Draft control operations (ploughs, rigid tine cultivators, ditch diggers, etc.)
l
l
l
l
Move lever 2 to position No. 4 or 5 of its sector.

Push lever 1 into the blue FLOAT sector in order to engage the implement rapidly with the soil.
Pull lever 1 back into the green sector near the edge of the blue sector.
Push lever 2 forwards to the desired working depth, and position the stop screw so as to be able to return to the same position
on subsequent passes.
At the end of the furrow, simply pull lever 1 back to its limit to raise the implement out of the soil. At the start of the next furrow,
push lever 1 into the blue FLOAT sector, leave it there until the implement has reached the desired working depth, then immediately move it back into the green sector.
When working on terrain of variable consistency, to prevent the implement from sinking to below the required depth in lighter
soils, set the lift control levers to obtain mixed draft and position control.
To obtain mixed control, start working and position the levers as described above for draft control operations, then move lever
1 back along the yellow/green sector until the implement starts to lift. Now move the lever forwards slightly (1 - 2 mm) in order
to stop the implement in its current position.
Operations with implements that work in or on the surface of the soil with mixed draft/position control
Float control operations (e.g. seed drill)

l
l
To allow the implement to follow the contours of the ground, push lever 1 into the blue FLOAT sector.
Lever 2 may be in any position between no. 6 and no. 12 of its sector.
At the end and start of each pass, use only lever 1 to raise and lower the implement.
External control for hitching implements

This control must only be used when you have to connect an implement.
To use this control, grip knob (1), extract the telescopic shaft, folding it downwards
to insert it into notch (2).
Turn the control to the right or left to raise or lower the lift arms by about 8-10 cm
to gradually align with implements for hitching.
Fig. 238
4.8.3 - Electrohydraulically controlled rear lift

Lift diagram
The rear lift unit for the control of mounted implements, semi-mounted implements, and trailed implements is composed
of:
l
a hydraulic unit positioned above the PTO casing;

a three-point linkage to which the implements to be lifted are attached.
The electrohydraulically controlled lift hydraulic unit has the following functions:
l
l
l
working depth adjustment;

maximum lift height limiting;
rate of drop;
selecting the control type.
10
4-35
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 35
21/05/2012 13.22.31
USING THE TRACTOR

Lift components diagram (3-point linkage)
1
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Lift cover
Top link
Lift rod
Lower links
Lift arms
Levelling box for transverse position adjustment of the implement
Sensing device
When the top link is attached at hole 8, the lift capacity is increased
When the top link is attached at hole 9, the lifting height is increased
Category II - 510 mm
Fig. 239
Lift controls
The lift controls are composed of:
l
l
lift control panel, located on the console to the right of the operator;
emergency manual controls.
IMPORTANT
The lift is always locked when the engine is started.
Lift controls located on the console to the right of the operator

Control console
5
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Working depth and FLOAT control;

Maximum lifting height limit control;
Rate of drop control;
Control type setting knob.
Raising and lowering indicator LEDs;
Lift status indicator LED
Lift unlock/lock control
Up/Down control
Fig. 240
Working depth control

The working depth control knob is composed of:
1.
2.
3.
control knob;
adjuster ring;
graduated scale.
8
9
Fig. 241
The knob has a scale (3) graduated from 1 to 8 to allow more precise adjustment of working depth.
Turning the knob to the left lowers the lift while turning it to the right raises it.
10
This control serves to obtain the maximum sensitivity in control of pitching movements when set to position 8 on the scale, or to
deactivate pitch control when set to the FLOAT position.
Adjuster ring (2), that can be set to the required working depth, is located under the knob. The locating stop allows the operator to
immediately return the control knob to the set working depth. This ring is particularly useful in those jobs which require repeated
operation of the position control knob (e.g. ploughing).
4-36
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 36
21/05/2012 13.22.32
USING THE TRACTOR

When the knob is turned fully left, the lift is set to FLOAT position.
In this position all control functions are disengaged, allowing the implement to move freely to follow the contours of the terrain.
Maximum lifting height control
This control serves to set the maximum height to which the lift arms can be raised.
This setting applies in control mode and when the implement lift is raised.
Turn the knob fully to the left to obtain the lowest possible maximum height setting;
when the knob is turned fully to the right, the arms may be raised to the maximum
height permitted by the mechanical system.
Fig. 242
Rate of drop control
This control serves to set the speed at which the lift arms are lowered.
Turn the knob to the left (tortoise symbol) to inhibit lift lowering.
Turn the knob to the right (hare symbol) to obtain maximum rate of drop.
The rate of drop is continuously adjustable between these two positions.
If the knob is turned to the tortoise symbol and arms lowering is requested, the
lifting and lowering LEDs will flash simultaneously (to indicate that lowering is inhibited).
Fig. 243
Selecting the control type

This control serves to select the type of lift control:
3.
2.
Position control, in this position the working height of mounted implements

is controlled and maintained using the working depth control knob.
Draft control: in this position the implement is raised when soil resistance
increases and lowered when soil resistance decreases.
Mixed control: this position allows constant adjustment on the basis of the
position or tractive force, which depends on the type of soil. The further
the knob is turned towards position 1, the greater the percentage of work
performed in position control with respect to the percentage in draft control.
Fig. 244
1.
IMPORTANT
10
When coupling and uncoupling implements, turn the control type selector knob fully to the right (position control).
4-37
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 37
21/05/2012 13.22.33
USING THE TRACTOR

Raising and lowering indicator LEDs
These LEDs illuminate when the corresponding raise and lower control solenoid
valves are energised and they indicate raising or lowering of the implement.
The LED colours are:
1.
2.
green - raising
red - lowering
2
Fig. 245
Lift status indicator LED

The red LED shows the lift status:
l
l
l
LED on continuously, lift locked;

fast flashing LED: lift locked or unlocked;
slow flashing LED: lift ready for operation;
LED off: lift in controlled operation and free to move.
Fig. 246
Raise/Lower control
This rocker switch serves to raise and lower the lift.
6
7
Fig. 247
Raise control
If the top part of the rocker switch if pressed for at least 0.2 seconds. the lift will be raised to its maximum height or limited
height setting.
Lowering
l
l
If the bottom part of the rocker switch is pressed for less than 0.2 seconds, Control mode will be activated.
If the bottom part of the rocker switch is pressed twice consecutively, Float mode will be activated. In this case the implement
with be lowered at maximum speed,
The moment the switch is released, the system will quit Float mode and automatically enter Control mode.
10
4-38
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 38
21/05/2012 13.22.33
USING THE TRACTOR

Lift lock and release control
This pushbutton serves to enable or disables the lift control panel.
Fig. 248
When the tractor is started, the lift is always locked and the lock indicator light is illuminated.
To unlock the lift hold pressed the pushbutton for 2 seconds; the indicator light will start flashing rapidly. When the lift is unlocked, the
light will flash more slowly.
If the lock is activated, the lift will be locked in its current position. From this point on, any alteration in the position of the setting control
knobs (including the maximum height knob) will have no effect on the position of the lift.
To lock the lift hold pressed the pushbutton for 2 seconds; the indicator light will start flashing rapidly. When the lift is locked the light
will remain steadily lit.
External control for hitching implements

This control must only be used when you have to connect an implement.
Raising
Lowering control
1.
2.
The controls are comprised of the following pushbuttons:
The lift is always locked when the engine is started. Press both pushbuttons (1 and 2) simultaneously for approximately 2 seconds to
unlock the lift. If the lift has already been unlocked by means of the controls in the cab, it will already be operable using the external
controls.
Fig. 249
The use of the ground-operated controls interrupts control of the rear lift, which must be subsequently reactivated.
Emergency manual controls
WARNING
The controls of the hydraulic control valve solenoid valves are located in front of the lift cover. In the event of a fault in the electronic
system, it will still be possible to control the lift by means of these pushbuttons.
IMPORTANT
This operation should only be carried out in cases of extreme necessity and with the engine running at low speed.
10
Release the pushbutton before the lift arms reach the maximum height position, as the automatic position sensor and
the safety limit switch are disabled during this operation.
4-39
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 39
21/05/2012 13.22.34
USING THE TRACTOR
The controls are comprised of the following pushbuttons: one raise and one
lower pushbutton.
2
Fig. 250
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4-40
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 40
21/05/2012 13.22.34
USING THE TRACTOR

4.9 - HYDRAULIC FRONT LIFT
l
4.9.1 - Front lift
Optional, and only with 6-way spool valves
The tractor may be equipped with an optional front lift. The lift is operated by two
double-acting hydraulic cylinders that are controlled by way of the auxiliary service
valve control lever located to the right of the driver.
The lifting cylinders are double acting. Implements can therefore work both in float
mode, meaning that they are left free to follow the profile of the ground, and be
kept in the position set in the work phase.
Fig. 251
Valves (1) for opening and closing the hydraulic flow are on the right-hand side of
the tractor.
Fig. 252
Valve open
Valve closed
1.
2.
With the valves open, moving the spool valve control lever (lever 3) backwards into the lifting position (RED) causes the oil flow to
be directed also to the front lift.
Fig. 253
Moving the spool valve control lever forwards into the oil dump position (YELLOW) causes lowering.
To utilize the rear pressure ports from which the front lift is supplied with oil, close the valves (1).
10
When using the hydraulic front lift, you must not connect any implements to the rear hydraulic couplers n. 3. Otherwise, each time you operated the front lift you would also operate the rear implement. If you have to use the rear
hydraulic lines no. 3, shut off the valves.
IMPORTANT:
4-41
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 41
21/05/2012 13.22.35
USING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 254 - Operating diagram for the front hydraulic couplers and front lift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6-way spool valve

Accumulators
Lift cylinders
Antishock valve
Pressure control valve
Valve
Quick coupling
WARNING
On all tractors equipped with front lift and PTO and fitted with non-reinforced front tyres, for reasons of safety, we
strongly recommend that you do not exceed 25 km/h when carrying heavy loads on the front lift.
Lift arms
The lift arms can be connected to the front lift in 3 different ways:
l
l
l
l
Fixed arm position - insert the lock pins in holes 1 and 2.

Floating arm position - insert the lock pins in holes 1 and 3.
Retracted position - insert the lock pins in holes 1 and 4.
In this case, to position the arms easily, you are advised first to take the lift
into the fully raised position, then remove the pin from hole 2 or 3 and insert
it into hole 4.
9
Fig. 255
10
4-42
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 42
21/05/2012 13.22.36
USING THE TRACTOR

4.10 - 3-POINT LINKAGE
4.10.1 - 3-point linkage
The three-point linkage serves attach implements to the tractors hydraulic lift.
CAUTION
Hitching to the rear axle or any other point above the swinging drawbar or the centre of rear wheels can cause the
tractor to tip over backwards.
WARNING
Note:
When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3-point linkage, take care that it does not come apart and ensure that a
sufficient length of the threaded end of the turnbuckle is screwed into the turnbuckle housing to withstand the tractive
force applied when working.
Always check that the weight of the implement is compatible with the maximum permissible load on the tractor axles.
The lower lift arms and top link are fitted with quick-attach ends for quick and easy implement attachment.
This tractor, when appropriately adjusted, can be used with category I and II implements.
The lengths of the top link and the lifting rods can be adjusted by way of turnbuckles with handles.
The three-point linkage has several adjustments:
l
l
l
l
Manual lift rod adjustment

Hydraulic adjustment of the RH lifting rod
Manual adjustment of the top link
Hydraulic adjustment of the top link
Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers
3
4
Fig. 256 - 3-point linkage

Top link
Upper lift arm
Lift rod
Stabiliser
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
4-43
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 43
21/05/2012 13.22.37
USING THE TRACTOR

1
1
2
2
3
4
5
4
4
5
Fig. 256 - 3-point linkage
5.
Lift link
Manual lift rod adjustment

The transverse angle of the implement can be altered by adjusting the length of the lift rods.
CAUTION
When working with the 3-point linkage, keep well clear of the operating radius of the lift arms and any attached implement. This is to avoid the risk of injury in the case of incorrect manoeuvres.
The lift rods are adjusted as follows:
l
l
release handle (1) from catch (2);

turn handle (1) clockwise to lengthen the rod or anticlockwise to shorten it.
The lift rods can be anchored to the lower arms by means of a fixed pivot (3) or
by means of a slot (4). Using the slot (4) makes implement attachment easier
and also allows wider implements to follow the ground contours freely in certain
specific operations.
Fig. 257
Hydraulic adjustment of the RH lifting rod
The RH lifting rod may be fitted with an optional double-acting hydraulic cylinder.
The length of the lifting rod and thus the position of the implement relative to the horizontal may be altered by way of the specific
control of the remote spool valves.
This adjustment is particularly important when working on slopes.
You can make the adjustment also with the tractor travelling.
10
4-44
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 44
21/05/2012 13.22.37
USING THE TRACTOR

This adjustment serves to position the implement at the correct angle to the ground. Shortening the top link increases the angle;
lengthening the top link reduces the angle.
Manual adjustment of the top link
The top link is adjusted as follows:

l
l
l
release the top link (2) from the bracket (1);

turn lock knob (3) anticlockwise to release the top link;
turn the top link to obtain the desired length;
turn lock knob (3) clockwise to lock the top link;
attach the top link to the bracket (1).
Normally when the lower links are horizontal, the rear end of the top link should
be angled upwards.
The distance between the lower lifting arms and the top link must never be less
than 540 mm for category II implements and 460 mm for category I implements.
Fig. 258
460 I cat.
540 II cat.
Fig. 259
Hydraulic adjustment of the top link

In this case, the length of the top link and thus the angle of the implement to the ground can be adjusted by way of the specific control
of the control valves assembly.
The top link may be fitted with an optional double-acting hydraulic cylinder.
You can make the adjustment also with the tractor travelling.
CAUTION
Never enter the area between the tractor and the implement when the tractor is in motion. Always lower the implement
before stopping the tractor.
Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers
The telescopic stabilisers serve to reduce or prevent sideways movement of the implement.
l
l
to restrict all movement, insert the lock pin in hole 1;

to allow a little movement , insert the lock pin in hole 2;
the middle hole in the sleeve (3) is used to turn the sleeve, by inserting a
rod.
The amount of sideways movement depends on the position in which the

lock pin is inserted:
The stabilisers must be locked (lock pin in hole 1) during implement transport and when working with a levelling blade, dozer blade,
roller, mower, seed drill, auger and similar implements.
10
Fig. 260
The stabilizers must allow some movement (lock pin in hole 2) when working with ploughs, harrows, ditchers, cultivators and similar
4-45
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 45
21/05/2012 13.22.38
USING THE TRACTOR

implements, or when working with draft control.
To adjust the length of the stabilisers, remove the lock pin and turn the threaded sleeve.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4-46
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 46
21/05/2012 13.22.38
USING THE TRACTOR

4.11 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
4.11.1 - Hydraulic system

Note:
All the hydraulic devices on the tractor (with the exception of the clutch and brakes, which have their own hydrostatic system) share
a common hydraulic system.
If the pump becomes noisy when the hydraulic system is hot, the hydraulic oil filter may be dirty. In this case, replace
the oil filter immediately.
The higher capacity pump (22.5 cc) supplies oil under pressure to the trailer brake valve, the remote control valves and the
front and hydraulic rear lifts.
Oil drawn from gearbox is filtered through:
m Two 44 micron filters on tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle
m One 90 micron wire mesh filter on tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle
The lower capacity pump (14 cc) supplies oil under pressure to the hydrostatic steering control valve, the electro-hydraulic
PTO controls, the front and rear differential locks and the front-wheel drive engagement control.
Oil drawn from gearbox is filtered through:
m A 44 micron filter on tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle
m A filter for tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle
Pressurised oil is supplied by two hydraulic pumps, which are constantly engaged to the drive from the engine. The pumps
are located on the left-hand side of the gearbox.
Oil returning from the hydrostatic steering is cooled by passing through a cooler positioned at the front of the tractor, before supplying
the electrohydraulic systems control unit.
4.11.2 - Remote valve
The auxiliary hydraulic control valve is a device equipped with a control lever which sends oil from a pressure circuit to an escape port,
enabling the control of external implements with hydraulic rams and motors, meeting the operating requirements for all applications.
Basically, only 1 type of remote valve is used:
DOUBLE-ACTING
CAUTION
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing
serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure fluid leaks
may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking
for leaks. NEVER use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect
your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel with experience of this particular
problem.
Fig. 261
CAUTION
10
Do not stand or pass underneath hydraulically supported loads.
4-47
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 47
21/05/2012 13.22.38
USING THE TRACTOR

Double-acting remote control valve
When the control lever is moved in one direction, the control valve spool shifts to
allow pressurised oil to flow out through one port and return through a second port.
When the control lever is moved in the opposite direction, the direction of flow is
reversed.
The control lever has 3 positions:
l
l
l
1 - outlet
0 - neutral
2 - outlet
Fig. 262
Double-acting control valve with a FLOAT position

This is a double-acting control valve with an additional position which enables both
ports of the control valve to be simultaneously connected to the return line. This
enables the attached implement to freely follow the contours of the land.

l
l
l
l
1 - outlet
0 - neutral
2 - return
FLOAT
5
Fig. 263
DETENT device
This is a mechanical detent that engages the control valve spool (which keeps the
lever in position) when the spool is moved to the end of its stroke. The device can
only be released manually by operating the control lever.
If the spool is not equipped with a DETENT, the control lever will always return to
the NEUTRAL position when released by the operator.
l
l
l
l
1 - outlet
0 - neutral
2 - return
DETENT
Fig. 264
KICK-OUT device
This is a mechanical detent that engages the control valve spool (which keeps
the lever in position) when the spool is moved to the end of its stroke. The device
releases automatically when the pressure reaches the spring calibration value and
the control lever returns automatically to the neutral position.

l
l
l
l
1 - outlet
0 - neutral
2 - return
KICK-OUT
10
Fig. 265
4-48
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 48
21/05/2012 13.22.38
USING THE TRACTOR

Non-return valve (check valve)
Mechanically operated check valve that prevents leakage past the control valve
spool and thus undesired movements of the hydraulic cylinders.
Fig. 266
FLOW DIVIDER
Allows the oil flow rate to be set, independently of the pressure, in a certain port of
the double-acting control valve.
Fig. 267
4.11.3 - Types of remote control valve
The tractor may be equipped with different types of remote control valve (4 or 6-way).
Double-acting control valve equipped with detent
Double-acting control valve with return spring
Pressure relief valve
Oil inlet
Drain
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4-way remote control valve
Fig. 268
4-way control valve (North America version)
Double-acting control valve equipped with kick-out and float position

Oil inlet
Drain
Fig. 269
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4-49
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 49
21/05/2012 13.22.39
USING THE TRACTOR

6-way control valve with lock valve
1
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Double-acting control valve with return spring

Oil inlet
Drain
Hydraulic coupler with lock valve RSM3
Fig. 270
6-way control valve with flow divider
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Double-acting control valve with KICK-OUT

Oil inlet
Drain
Flow divider valve
Fig. 271
6-way control valve (North America version)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Oil inlet
Drain
Fig. 272
6-way control valve (Germany version)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Oil inlet
Drain
Fig. 273
10
4-50
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 50
21/05/2012 13.22.41
USING THE TRACTOR

2-way control valve with electronic control
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Oil pressure line

Oil return line
Oil inlet
Drain
Fig. 274
4.11.4 - Spool valve controls

CAUTION
The hydraulic control valve levers must be returned to their neutral positions as soon as the external rams reach their
stroke limit, in order to avoid maintaining maximum pressure in the hydraulic circuit for longer than necessary, as this
could dangerously overload the system.
Remote valve controls for platform tractors with safety roll bar.
The manual controls of the remote control valve consist of:
1.
2.
3.
Control for hydraulic lines coloured YELLOW

Control for hydraulic lines coloured RED
Control for hydraulic lines coloured GREEN
The number of control levers varies according to the type of remote valve
installed:
l
Tractors with a 4-way remote valve are equipped with two levers.
Fig. 275
NEUTRAL
Move the lever into the MIDDLE POSITION of its quadrant stop both the oil supply to the lift cylinder and the return flow from
the lift cylinder.
HYDRAULIC LIFT
Move the lever BACKWARDS to extend the cylinder and lift the implement.
ABBASSAMENTO
Move the lever FORWARDS to retract the cylinder and lower the implement. In the case of a double-acting control valve, the
implement lowering action is controlled hydraulically, while in the case of a single-acting valve the lowering action is determined by the weight of the implement that causes the oil to discharge from the cylinder.
2.
3.
The control lever will only stay in position when released if the control valve is equipped with the detent device. The other levers are
returned by a spring to the NEUTRAL position.
1.
These control levers are located to the right of the driver and have three positions:
Only in the case of double-acting control valves with a FLOAT position, the
lever has four positions:
FLOAT: move the lever forwards beyond the lowering position to allow the
cylinder to move freely and enable the implement to follow the profile of the
ground freely.
10
Fig. 276
4-51
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 51
21/05/2012 13.22.42
USING THE TRACTOR

Remote valve controls for cabbed tractors.
The manual controls of the remote control valve consist of:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Control for hydraulic lines coloured YELLOW

Control for hydraulic lines coloured RED
Control for hydraulic lines coloured GREEN
Control for hydraulic lines coloured BLUE
The number of control levers varies according to the type of remote valve
installed:
l
l
l
Tractors with an 8-way remote valve are equipped with two levers and an
electrical control.
Fig. 277
These control levers are located to the right of the driver and have either three or four positions:
1.
NEUTRAL
Move the lever into the MIDDLE POSITION of its quadrant stop both the oil supply to the lift cylinder and the return flow from
the lift cylinder.
HYDRAULIC LIFT
Move the lever BACKWARDS to extend the cylinder and lift the implement.
ABBASSAMENTO
Move the lever FORWARDS to retract the cylinder and lower the implement. In the case of a double-acting control valve, the
implement lowering action is controlled hydraulically, while in the case of a single-acting valve the lowering action is determined by the weight of the implement that causes the oil to discharge from the cylinder.
FLOAT
Move the lever forwards beyond the lowering point to allow the cylinder to move freely and enable the implement to follow the
profile of the ground freely.
2.
3.
4.
The control lever will only stay in position when released if the control valve is equipped with the detent device. The other levers are
returned by a spring to the NEUTRAL position.
WARNING
All control valve levers are fitted with a locking device that must
be activated when the valves are not used, to avoid inadvertent
activation.
To engage the locking device, proceed as described below:
l
l
Move valve lever (1) to the neutral position;

Tilt up locking device (2).
Fig. 278
Flow divider
The 6-way remote valve has a FLOW DIVIDER control knob, which allows adjustment of the oil flow rate to the 2 ways of the remote
valve equipped with KICKOUT device.
This adjustment determines the speed of a cylinder operated by the control valve.
The control is marked with a graphic symbol showing the direction of rotation to increase or decrease the oil flow rate.
9
10
4-52
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 52
21/05/2012 13.22.42
USING THE TRACTOR
Control knob (1) is located on the directional control valve.
4.11.5 - Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic service couplers
Fig. 279
Fig. 280 - Correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic service couplers
Control lever for YELLOW hydraulic couplers.
Control lever for RED hydraulic couplers.
Control lever for GREEN hydraulic couplers.
Control lever for BLUE hydraulic couplers.
Remote control valve
Rear hydraulic services
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.11.6 - Behaviour of the oil flow in the hydraulic circuit connecting the couplers and the
actuator cylinders on the implement
The correspondence between control levers and hydraulic service couplers is indicated by the numbers alongside the control levers
and the hydraulic couplers.
Moving the control lever back (control lever number on + symbol) directs oil pressure to the service coupler with the same number
(also on + symbol). Oil returning from the cylinder connected to the implement may drain to tank through the service coupler with the
same number (- symbol).
10
Conversely, if the control lever is pushed forward to the - symbol, oil is sent under pressure to the service coupler identified with
the same number as the lever and the - symbol. Oil returning from the implement cylinder can drain to tank through the service
coupler identified with the same number as the lever and the + symbol.
Double-acting control valve
4-53
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 53
21/05/2012 13.22.44
USING THE TRACTOR

Oil pressure to cylinder
l
l
A - Pressurised oil delivery to cylinder - LIFTING

B - Pressurised oil delivery to cylinder - LOWERING
Fig. 281
CAUTION
Take maximum care when attaching and detaching implements.
Use sufficiently strong stands; avoid using cement blocks or bricks.
Do not allow anyone to come near the tractor.
4
Fig. 282
Example connection and operation of a double-acting cylinder

Overturning of a reversible plough
6
7
Fig. 283
Direction of oil flow with control lever in lifting position, + mark
8
9
Fig. 284
10
4-54
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 54
21/05/2012 13.22.45
USING THE TRACTOR
In the case of diggers, shovels and loaders, moving the control lever to the float
position will allow the cylinder to move freely and thus the bucket to follow the
contours of the terrain.
Fig. 285
Connection of an implement to the hydraulic service couplers

IMPORTANT:
Fig. 286
The hydraulic couplers have female fittings that allow connection under pressure of the male fitting on the implement hose. The
couplers are also designed to disconnect automatically if accidentally pulled.
IMPORTANT:
Fig. 287
Check that connection hoses are of sufficient length to allow unimpeded manoeuvring of the tractor and implement. To disconnect
the hose, return the distributors controls to the neutral position to
release any residual pressure from the system, then detach the fittings and pull the hose off.
When connecting the hydraulic fittings of the implements to the tractors hydraulic couplers, carefully follow the instructions on the plates on the tractor or keep to the instructions given in this manual. Incorrect connections can invert the
implement lift and lowering directions, with serious risk of injury.
DANGER
DANGER
10
DO NOT attempt to uncouple hydraulic connections or adjust implements with the engine running and the PTO rotating. To do so could result in very serious injury or death.
4-55
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 55
21/05/2012 13.22.46
USING THE TRACTOR

Protection of the hydraulic service couplers

On completion of the work, carefully clean the fittings and close the protective covers on the service couplers.
l
2
Fig. 288
Only for tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle

On completion of the work, carefully clean the fittings and fit the rubber protective
covers on the service couplers.
l
4
5
Fig. 289
Note:
The hydraulic couplers must be kept clean and their protective caps must be fitted.
Note:
Take care not to mix different types of oil. Ensure the utmost cleanliness when making the hydraulic coupling between
the implement and tractor. Cover any couplers not in use with their protective caps.
IMPORTANT:
Before connecting implement hoses to the service couplers, stop the engine and check that the connection fittings
are clean. After having connected the hoses and started the engine, check that the hydraulic system is functioning
correctly. Then, after having operated the cylinders a few times to equalise the pressure (moving the control lever to
the lowering position, then to the raising position and then back to neutral), check the transmission oil level with the
cylinders both extended (raising) and retracted (lowering). The transmission oil should never be allowed to fall below
the minimum level (with cylinders extended) and should not ever greatly exceed the maximum level, as the same oil
supplies both the external hydraulic services and the transmission.
9
10
4-56
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 56
21/05/2012 13.22.46
USING THE TRACTOR

Free oil return
Oil returning from the external implements such as hydraulic motors passes
through free return line (1) and returns to the gearbox.
Fig. 290
Oil drip collectors for rear hydraulic service couplers

When attaching and detaching the service couplers (1) for external use, a small
amount of oil may spill out from the hoses.
To prevent oil spilling onto the ground under the service couplers, a tube (2) has
been inserted to drain the oil into a drip collector (3).
This oil can be recovered by removing the collector (3) from its housing.
Check
periodically
that
cap
(4)
is
properly
closed.
1
4
IMPORTANT:
2
Before the oil is re-used it must be filtered.

3
Fig. 291
Operation of hydraulic devices that require a constant flow of oil
One example is use in combination with hydraulic motors
These devices must be operated using a double-acting control valve controlled by the no. 3 lever equipped with a KICK-OUT device
(or DETENT).
Fig. 292
The connection to the control valve must be made by connecting the pressure line (1) to the corresponding service coupler with the
- sign, while the return line (2) must be connected to the service coupler with the + sign.
To stop the oil flow, first move the control lever to the FLOAT position, until the motor has slowed down and come to a complete stop.
FLOAT and DETENT are only provided together on the 6-way control valve)
The motor is operated by pushing the control lever forward (lowering position = - sign).
Then move the control lever to the neutral position.

Do not move the control lever immediately to the neutral position, as the back pressure which would be generated
could damage the hoses if the motor is not equipped with safety valves.
10
IMPORTANT
4-57
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 57
21/05/2012 13.22.47
USING THE TRACTOR

Fit an oil temperature sensor and, if necessary, an oil cooler.
The maximum permissible temperature is 110 C (230 F).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4-58
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 58
21/05/2012 13.22.47
USING THE TRACTOR

4.12 - TOWING DEVICES

WARNING
All the implements mounted on the tractor must be secured firmly and in accordance with the manufacturers instructions; see attachment holes diagram. Use permitted devices only.
WARNING
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an authorised service centre.
WARNING
In Italy only Cuna type towing hitches and the drawbar may be used.
CAUTION
WARNING
When towing, always secure the hitch pin with a suitable lock pin with safety clip to prevent the hitch pin coming out
the hitch. The lock pin must always be secured to the hitch.
WARNING
The maximum permissible hitch load (horizontal and vertical), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use and
the maximum trailed load for trailers without brakes, for trailers with mechanical brakes, for trailers with inertia braking
and with hydraulic or air brakes are indicated in the tractor registration document (only issued for the Italian market).
Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct responsibility of the user.
CAUTION
The loads given in the tables below refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - SDFI
Towing hitches with hitch support angle plates
Tab. 7
HITCH SUPPORT ANGLE PLATES
Angle plates for Cat. C hitch
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
4-66
TOW HITCH DESCRIPTION
Cuna C towing hitch (DGM-GA 1163-C)
6000 kg
1500 kg
Tab. 8
4-66
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - ARCHETTI
Tab. 9
DRAWBAR
TD001 St e11
Short position
Middle position
Extended position
HORIZONTAL LOAD
20000 kg* - 25000 kg**
VERTICAL LOAD
750 kg
4-65
10
* - Load referred to 2WD tractor.
REFERENCE
Drawbar
** - Load referred to 4WD tractor.
4-59
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 59
21/05/2012 13.22.47
USING THE TRACTOR

Hitch complete with angle plates
Tab. 10
HITCH COMPLETE WITH ANGLE PLATES
HORIZONTAL LOAD
Hitch complete with angle plates TA33-3 DGM 0298 6000

GA
VERTICAL LOAD
1500 kg
REFERENCE
4-66
Towing hitches with hitch support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
Tab. 11
HITCH SUPPORT FRAME
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
14000 kg
14000 kg
2000 kg
2000 kg
4-67
4-66
20000 kg* - 25000 kg**

20000 kg* - 25000 kg**
2000 kg
2000 kg
4-66
4-67
20000 kg* - 25000 kg**
2000 kg
4-68
Frame complete with PTO guard Cat. D2 (TA33-1 20000 kg* - 25000 kg**
D e3)
2000 kg
4-66

Tab. 12
4
5
Cuna C towing hitch - (GMC10 DGM 0225-GA)

Cuna C towing hitch with Syncro PTO - (GMC10
DGM 0299-GA)
Cuna C towing hitch - (GMD20 DGM 0225-GA)
Cuna C towing hitch with Syncro PTO - (GSD2310
DGM 0300-GA)
EEC manual towing hitch - (MEC1 D e11 3003)
EEC semi-automatic towing hitch - (MEC1 D e11
3003)
DIN automatic towing hitch 38 mm - (AEC1 D e11
3002)
6000 kg
6000 kg
1500 kg
1500 kg
4-67
4-66

Towing hitches with support frame with Piton hitch

Tab. 13
TOWING FRAME WITH
PITON HITCH
TOWING FRAME WITH

PITON HITCH
Frame complete with With Piton Fix

PTO guard (TA33-1 D
e11 3035)
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
20000 kg* - 25000 kg**
2000 kg
4-69
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE

Tab. 14
DRAWBAR
TD001 St e11
Short position
Middle position
Extended position
20000 kg* - 25000 kg**
750 kg
4-65

10
4-60
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 60
21/05/2012 13.22.48
USING THE TRACTOR

The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - CBM
Pick-Up Hitch
Tab. 15
MECHANICAL P.U.H.
AXLA-HITCH 99 030 (D With hook

With drawbar
e11 2166)
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
25000 kg* - 26800 kg**
300 kg
1200 kg
4-69

Tab. 16
With drawbar
e11 2163)
25000 kg* - 26800 kg**
3000 kg
1200 kg
4-71
HYDRAULIC P.U.H. TOWING HITCH

The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices
The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices:
Towing hitch
All the implements mounted on the tractor must be secured firmly and in accordance with the manufacturers instructions; see attachment holes diagram. Use permitted devices only.
WARNING
WARNING
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an authorised service centre.
WARNING
In Italy only Cuna type towing hitches and the drawbar may be used.
CAUTION
When towing, always secure the hitch pin with a suitable lock pin with safety clip to prevent the hitch pin coming out
the hitch. The lock pin must always be secured to the hitch.
WARNING
The maximum permissible hitch load (horizontal and vertical), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use and
the maximum trailed load for trailers without brakes, for trailers with mechanical brakes, for trailers with inertia braking
and with hydraulic or air brakes are indicated in the tractor registration document (only issued for the Italian market).
Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct responsibility of the user.
WARNING
CAUTION
10
The loads given in the tables below refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
4-61
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 61
21/05/2012 13.22.48
USING THE TRACTOR

The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - SDFI
Towing hitches with hitch support angle plates
Tab. 17
HITCH SUPPORT ANGLE PLATES
Angle plates for Cat. C hitch
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
4-66
Tab. 18
Cuna C towing hitch (DGM-GA 1163-C)
6000 kg
1500 kg
4-66
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - ARCHETTI
Drawbar
Tab. 19
DRAWBAR
TD001 St e11
Short position
Middle position
Extended position
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
25000 kg
1500 kg
4-65
Hitch complete with angle plates
Tab. 20
HITCH COMPLETE WITH ANGLE PLATES
Hitch complete with angle plates TA33-3 DGM 0298 6000

GA
1500 kg
4-66
Towing hitches with hitch support frame
Tab. 21
HITCH SUPPORT FRAME
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
14000 kg
14000 kg
2000 kg
2000 kg
4-67
4-66
20000 kg
25000 kg* - 31500 kg**
25000 kg* - 31500 kg**
2500 kg
2000 kg
2000 kg
4-66
4-66
4-67
25000 kg* - 31500 kg**
2000 kg
4-68
Frame complete with PTO guard Cat. D2 (TA33-1 25000 kg* - 31500 kg**
D e3)
2000 kg
4-66

Tab. 22
7
8
Cuna C towing hitch - (GMC10 DGM 0225-GA)

Cuna C towing hitch with Syncro PTO - (GMC10
DGM 0299-GA)
Cuna C towing hitch - (GMD20 DGM 0225-GA)
Cuna C towing hitch with Syncro PTO - (GSD2310
DGM 0300-GA)
Cuna D3 towing hitch - (GMD30 DGM 0264-GA)
EEC manual towing hitch - (MEC1 D e11 3003)
EEC semi-automatic towing hitch - (MEC1 D e11
3003)
DIN automatic towing hitch 38 mm - (AEC1 D e11
3002)
6000 kg
6000 kg
1500 kg
1500 kg
4-67
4-66

Towing hitches with support frame with Piton hitch
10
4-62
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 62
21/05/2012 13.22.48
USING THE TRACTOR

TOWING FRAME WITH
PITON HITCH
TOWING FRAME WITH

PITON HITCH
Frame complete with With Piton Fix

PTO guard (TA33-1 D
e11 3035)
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
25000 kg* - 31500 kg**
2000 kg
4-69
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
Tab. 23
Tab. 24
TD001 St e11
Short position
Middle position
Extended position
25000 kg
1500 kg
4-65
DRAWBAR

The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - CBM
Pick-Up Hitch
Tab. 25
MECHANICAL P.U.H.

With drawbar
e11 2166)
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL LOAD
VERTICAL LOAD
REFERENCE
25000 kg* - 31500 kg**
300 kg
1200 kg
4-69

Tab. 26
With drawbar
e11 2163)
25000 kg* - 31500 kg**
3000 kg
1200 kg
4-71
HYDRAULIC P.U.H. TOWING HITCH

The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices
The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices:
Towing hitch
4.12.3 - Adjusting the height of the towing hitch

The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct responsibility of the user.
IMPORTANT:
CAUTION
Check that the lock pins are fully inserted in the tow hitch support frame.
The height of the towing hitch can be adjusted to facilitate attachment of the towed implement.
The tractor can be fitted with different types of towing hitch versions which can be operated in different ways.
10
This adjustment alters the height of the hitch on the support frame. The hitch can be positioned either above or below the PTO output
shaft.
4-63
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 63
21/05/2012 13.22.48
USING THE TRACTOR

Type 1 towing hitches
For all towing hitches of similar type to those indicated below, the height is adjusted by operating the lock lever in order to engage
the pins from the frame brackets.
After moving the hitch to the desired height, return the lock lever to its initial position.
1.
2.
Lock lever
Pins
2
3
Fig. 293
1.
2.
Lock lever
Pins
5
Fig. 294
1.
2.
Lock lever
Pins
7
Fig. 295
Type 2 towing hitches

For all towing hitches of similar type to those shown, the height is adjusted by
removing the lock pins (1) and removing the pins (2).
Move the hitch to the required height and secure by re-inserting the pins and the
lock pins.
9
10
Fig. 296
4-64
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 64
21/05/2012 13.22.49
USING THE TRACTOR

4.12.4 - Drawbar
CAUTION
Do not allow anyone to ride on the drawbar or on the lower links when the tractor is in motion.
IMPORTANT:
When using the drawbar, observe all the applicable rules in the highway code. Use only hitch pins that comply with
the applicable standards.
IMPORTANT:
The drawbar is positioned in such a way as to increase the load on the rear axle and reduce slightly the load on the front axle.
In addition to having an adjustable swing angle, the drawbar can also be adjusted in length or inverted through 180 to adjust the
height from the ground. Using the different holes to adjust the length of the drawbar alters the distance from the PTO shaft and thus
the permissible load values.
The drawbar is a swinging hitch of the type commonly used for towing agricultural implements and for trailers with more than one axle
and consequently with low vertical load.
The maximum vertical loads and towed loads are indicated in the table.
Implement hitching and unhitching

To hitch an implement to the drawbar, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
l
Remove lock pin (1);

Remove pin (2);
Reverse the tractor slowly up to the implement;
Insert pin (2);
Insert lock pin (1).
Fig. 297
Adjusting the length of the drawbar

The drawbar is fixed to the tractor under the gearbox casing using the fixing holes provided.
To adjust the length of the drawbar, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
Remove lock pins (1);

Remove pin (2);
Adjust the length of the drawbar (3);
Insert pin (2);
Insert lock pins (1);
10
Fig. 298
4-65
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 65
21/05/2012 13.22.50
USING THE TRACTOR

4.12.5 - Angle brackets for towing hitches
IMPORTANT:
The angle brackets are comprised of two parts (1) which are fixed to the transmission casing by screws (2).
Various types of towing hitch may be installed on these angle brackets.
The height of the towing can also be adjusted by way of pin (3).
3
Fig. 299
4.12.6 - Towing hitch with lock pin

IMPORTANT:
The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.
IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.
Trailer hitching and unhitching

Hitching
l
l
l
l
l
Remove lock pin (1).

Remove pin (2) using handle (3).
Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters fully
into the hitch;
Insert pin (2);
Replace the lock pin (1), making sure it is properly closed.
IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure
in reverse order.
Fig. 300
4.12.7 - Standard long hitch support frame

IMPORTANT:
10
4-66
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 66
21/05/2012 13.22.50
USING THE TRACTOR
The towing hitch support frame enables a number of different types of towing hitch
to be mounted on the tractor and also gives the possibility to adjust the height of
the hitch.
Fig. 301
IMPORTANT:
4.12.8 - Towing hitch with safety lock
IMPORTANT:

Hitching
l
l
l
l
Turn safety lock (1) upwards;

Remove pin (2) using handle (3).
into the hitch;
Insert pin (2);
Turn safety lock (1) downwards, ensuring that it is securely closed.
IMPORTANT:
in reverse order.
Fig. 302
4.12.9 - Semi-automatic towing hitch

IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
10
4-67
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 67
21/05/2012 13.22.51
USING THE TRACTOR

Hitching
l
l
l
Turn lever (1) downwards in order to release the safety lock (2);
Withdraw the lever with the attached pin (3);
into the hitch;
Insert the lever with the attached pin (3);
Turn the lever upwards to fasten the safety lock (2).
IMPORTANT:
in reverse order.
Fig. 303
4.12.10 - Automatic towing hitch

IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
5
Hitching
l
Raise lever (1), pushing upwards until it locks into place.

Coupling pin (2) is raised and snap lever (3) is visible on the bottom of the
automatic towing hitch.
7
Fig. 304
Move the tractor slowly backwards; the eyebolt of the drawbar must engage
fully in the automatic hitch, engaging the catch lever (3); the impact of this
action causes the immediate descent of the coupling pin (2) and automatic
return of the safety pin (4).
IMPORTANT:
Check that the trailer has been hitched correctly; make sure that
the release lever is in its lowered position and that the safety pin
has retracted completely.
IMPORTANT:
10
If the hitch is not perfectly closed, try moving the tractor or trailer
forwards and backwards to move the towing eye to the correct position so that the hitch closes properly.
Fig. 305
4-68
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 68
21/05/2012 13.22.53
USING THE TRACTOR

Unhitching
IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure in reverse order.
4.12.11 - Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame
IMPORTANT:
Fig. 306
IMPORTANT:
The support frame with Piton Fix or ball towing hitch is provided with a hitch (Piton
Fix or ball) fixed to the frame, and also allows the installation of other types of
adjustable height towing hitches.

Hitching
l
l
l
l
l
l
Remove lock pin (1).

Withdraw pin (2);
Turn safety lock (3) upwards;
Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer engages Piton Fix or
the ball (4);
Turn the safety lock downwards;
Insert pin (2);
Replace the lock pin (1), making sure it is properly closed.
in reverse order.
Fig. 307
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
10
4.12.12 - Mechanical Pick-up Hitch
4-69
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 69
21/05/2012 13.22.54
USING THE TRACTOR

IMPORTANT:
The Pick-up Hitch is comprised of the following elements:

Towing hitch
2
3
Fig. 308
Control lever in cab
5
Fig. 309

Hitching
l
l
l
l
l
Raise the lift to maximum height;

Disengage the hooks (1) using the lever in the cab;
Lower the lift;
Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar engages the
bar/hook (2);
Return the lift to the maximum lifting height to lock the swinging frame;
Operate the lever in the cab to lock the frame with the hooks.
8
Fig. 310
The slide is locked by means of 2 safety devices: two hooks and a lock pin in the slide to prevent its accidental extension.
Unhitching
IMPORTANT:
10
4-70
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 70
21/05/2012 13.22.55
USING THE TRACTOR

Changing the hitch for a drawbar
If required, the towing hitch can be replaced with a drawbar. This operation does not require the use of any tools.
To replace the hitch, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
Disengage the hooks using the lever in the cab;

Withdraw the lock pins (2);
Remove towing hitch (3);
Insert drawbar (4);
Replace the lock pins.
Fig. 311
4.12.13 - Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch

IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
The Pick-up Hitch is comprised of the following elements:
Towing hitch
Fig. 312
Fig. 313
10
Control lever in cab
4-71
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 71
21/05/2012 13.22.57
USING THE TRACTOR

Hitching
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Raise the linkage to maximum height;

Disengage the hooks (1) using the lever in the cab;
Lower the linkage;
Extend slide (2) by operating the hydraulic cylinder;
Attach the bar/hook to the trailer drawbar eye;
Fully retract the slide;
Return the linkage to the maximum lifting height to lock the swinging frame;
Operate the lever in the cab to lock the frame with the hooks.
Fig. 314
Conditions for correct attachment

The Pick-up Hitch is attached correctly when:
l
The two hooks (1) must be correctly attached to the pins of the swinging
frame (4);
Lock pin (2) must protrude fully and seat against plate (3) during work.
CAUTION
If these conditions are not adhered to, the Pick-up Hitch is NOT
attached correctly.
5
Fig. 315
Checking correct attachment

The slide is locked by means of 2 safety devices: two hooks and a lock pin in the slide to prevent its accidental extension.
To check that the trailer is hitched correctly, proceed as follows:

l
Lower the linkage and check that the hooks (1) are effectively attached to
the frame (2);
Try to extend the slide; if the lock pin is correctly positioned this will not be
possible.
CAUTION
If the above conditions are not satisfied, repeat the hitching operation.
Fig. 316
Unhitching
IMPORTANT:
9
Changing the hitch for a drawbar
If required, the towing hitch can be replaced with a drawbar. This operation does not require the use of any tools.
10
4-72
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 72
21/05/2012 13.22.59
USING THE TRACTOR

To replace the hitch, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
Extend slide (1) by operating the hydraulic cylinder;

Withdraw the lock pin (2);
Remove towing hitch (3);
Insert drawbar (4);
Replace the lock pin and retract the slide.
10
Fig. 317
4-73
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 73
21/05/2012 13.23.00
USING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4-74
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 74
21/05/2012 13.23.00
1
2
3
4
5
10
5 - STORING THE TRACTOR
5-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.23.01
STORING THE TRACTOR

5.1 - OPERATIONS PRIOR TO LONG TERM GARAGING
For example: at the start of winter
If the tractor is not to be used for a long period, we recommend that you carry out the following operations to prevent certain essential components from deteriorating during storage.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Run the engine until warm, then stop and drain all the oil from the engine and change the filters. Fill with new oil of the specified type.
Top up the cooling system radiator with the prescribed coolant with anti-freeze and anti-corrosion properties.
Fill the fuel tank completely to prevent condensation forming inside the tank.
Switch on the engine and check that the fuel and injection systems are functioning correctly.
Check that the diesel fuel filters are clean.
Loosen the fuel cap and radiator cap slightly so that the relative seals are not compressed.
Clean the air cleaner filter element. Lubricate the combine harvester as specified in the maintenance schedule.
Remove the battery from the combine and clean the two terminals (positive/negative).
The battery should be charged and then stored in a cool, dry place.
Cover the exhaust pipe with a plastic bag secured with adhesive tape. The combine harvester must be perfectly clean; Touch
up any chipped paintwork to prevent rust.
Coat bare metal surfaces with grease to prevent rust from forming.
IMPORTANT:
The tractor must be stored in a suitable garage and should not be exposed to excessive dust. If the tractor has to be
stored outdoors, cover it with a sheet.
5
6
7
8
9
10
5-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.23.01
l
l
l
l
l
l
10
Remove the tractor from the wheel stands (if used).

Remove the cover sheet (if any).
Remove the cover from the exhaust.
Charge and refit the battery (follow the safety instructions given in this manual).
Start the engine and allow it run at low rpm for a few minutes.
Do not accelerate until you are sure the engine is running smoothly.
Carry out all the operations prescribed in this manual for the start of the working season; the tractor will then be ready to be
put back into service.
5.2 - PREPARING THE TRACTOR FOR USE AFTER A LONG PERIOD OF INACTIVITY
STORING THE TRACTOR
5-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.23.01
STORING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.23.01
1
2
3
4
5
10
6 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.23.01
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.1 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
This section of the manual deals with the lubrication and general maintenance of the tractor. If you have any doubts
concerning lubrication and maintenance, consult your dealer. Details on the frequency of maintenance operations, the quality and volume of fluids
and lubricants can be found in the Fluids/Lubricants and fill volumes table.
Before carrying out maintenance work of any type, observe the following safety instructions:
l
l
Remove the key from the starter switch;

Hang a DO NOT START ENGINE warning sign from the steering wheel;
If necessary, place warning signs also around the tractor.
CAUTION
For all maintenance operations to be carried out at a height greater than 1500 mm use a suitable platform so that the
work can be performed in safety.
CAUTION
Some of the illustrations in this manual show the tractor with panels or guards and panels removed for the sake of clarity. Do not use the tractor unless these guards and panels are fitted correctly. If it is essential to remove these guards
or panels in order to repair the tractor, they MUST be refitted before starting the tractor.
DANGER
WARNING
Always wear proper work clothes; wear earplugs and eye protection whenever necessary.
CAUTION
Read the safety instructions provided at the start of this manual to ensure the safety of the user.
6
CAUTION
In certain climatic conditions and in areas with tree cover, grass or agricultural planting, operation of an internal combustion engine can constitute a fire hazard. Note that this tractor is not fitted with anti-spark devices on its exhaust
pipe.
WARNING
Maintenance operations must be carried out at the prescribed intervals in order to maintain the tractor in good working
condition. Lack of routine servicing can lead to unnecessary breakdowns and can reduce the vehicles service life.
DANGER
Start the engine with the key only when seated in the drivers position. Do not attempt to start the engine by shorting
across the starter motor terminals. The tractor may start moving if the gear lever or clutch safety circuits are bypassed.
This could cause serious injury or death of persons in the vicinity of the tractor. Make sure that the cover is always
fitted over the starter motor solenoid.
WARNING
Before starting the tractor ensure that it is able to operate safely also on public highways.
DANGER
10
To avoid damage to your sight, do not expose your eyes in the radar emission area when the radar is in operation.
Carry out maintenance of the radar sensor only when the radar is switched off.
6-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.23.02
Before starting the engine, make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated. DO NOT run the engine in an enclosed area.
Exhaust gases can cause asphyxia.
CAUTION
6.1.1 - Maintenance intervals
If the tractor is subjected to extremely heavy-duty work or used in dusty environments, the frequency of scheduled maintenance
should be increased.
The recommended maintenance intervals apply to normal operating conditions.
Thoroughly observe the recommended maintenance intervals and use exclusively recommended lubricants and fluids.
6.1.2 - Washing the tractor/attached implements

CAUTION
Wait for all parts to cool down before cleaning the tractor.
Do not direct the water jet from a pressure washer towards the radiator/coolers, bearings or electronic/electrical components.
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
For general cleaning of the tractor, pressure washers may be used providing the following instructions are observed:
l
l
l
hold the lance so the nozzle is at least 80 cm away from the tractor ;
use a jet angle between 45 and 90;
maximum pressure 30 bar;
maximum temperature 50 C.
10
Follow all the instructions in the manual for the attached implements before starting cleaning.
6-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.23.02
6.2 - FLUIDS / LUBRICANTS AND FILL VOLUMES
WARNING
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
DANGER
Risks connected with handling fluids are minimised if the operation is carried out in compliance with the instructions
given in the manufacturers safety datasheets available from your Same Deutz-Fahr dealer.
Using any lubricants other those recommended can result in serious damage to the tractor.
Failure to have the tractor serviced at the recommended maintenance intervals and to use the prescribed lubricants will invalidate
the manufacturers warranty.
Warnings:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Ensure that any containers used to store lubricants are perfectly clean. Funnels and measuring cups must be covered to
prevent dust settling on them.
Clean the areas next to the parts to be lubricated.
Grease parts when warm so that the grease flows more easily.
Clean all plugs and caps before refitting them.
Carry out all operations in accordance with the instructions given and the applicable safety regulations.
Carry out maintenance only with the engine switched off, the starter key removed and the parking brake applied.
Only work with the engine running when this is specifically indicated in the instructions.
For fuel tank capacity refer to the Technical Data chapter
The table shows the lubricants and fill volumes (in litres) for tractors in this range.

EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
9*
9*
9*
11
11
11
52
52
52
1,5 x 2
1,5 x 2
1,5 x 2
B0 - ENGINE
6
7
Engine oil: [1] SDF Special 9*

Motor Oil 15W-40 (ACEA
E7; API CJ-4/CI-4+/CI-4/
CH-4/CG-4/CF-4/CF; Deutz
DQC 3-05) [2] SDF Extra
Motor OIL 10W-40 (ACEA
E4; Deutz DQC 4-05)
Antifreeze liquid: SDF
11
COOLANT (Concentrated)
D0 - TRANSMISSION
Gearbox oil: SDF UTTO

(API GL 4, JDM-20C,
M1143, ZF TE-ML03E,
05F)
52
F0 - FRONT AXLE
Front axle oil: SDF UTTO 6

(API GL 4, JDM-20C,
M1143, ZF TE-ML03E,
05F)
Oil for final drive units: SDF 1,5 x 2
UTTO (API GL 4, JDM-20C,
M1143, ZF TE-ML03E,
05F)
10
E0 - REAR AXLE
6-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.23.02
Brake and clutch fluid: SDF MAX
BRAKE OIL (MB 236.6; ZF
TE-ML 03D-04D-09A-11A14A-17C;)
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
MAX
MAX
MAX
Grease: SDF GREASE

EP2
A0 - GREASING POINTS
(*) With filter + 1 litre

[1] - Minimum specifications for engine oil
For dilution percentages, characteristics, specifications and safety warnings regarding use of the antifreeze, see the instructions on
page:
[2] Recommended specifications for engine oil
See para. 10.2.4 - Coolant - Page 10-10

WARNING
10
To avoid this type of problem, do not change from mineral oil [1] to synthetic oil [2].
6-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.23.02
6.3 - SERVICE INTERVALS
The recommended servicing intervals are given below.

IMPORTANT
The service number corresponds to that indicated in the service and warranty booklet.
IMPORTANT
For the operations to be carried out, refer to the Maintenance and Inspection Schedule.
Tab. 28
SERVICE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTERVAL (HOURS)
100
300
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT
Carry out the operations indicated for every 100 hours

Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 and 300 hours
Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300 and 600 hours
Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300, 600 and 1200 hours
Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300 and 600 hours
Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 300, 600 and 1200 hours
5
6
7
8
9
10
6-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.23.02
6.4 - MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE
X
X
X
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-18
REFERENCE
General tractor inspection (Note 1)

Engine oil level
X
Coolant
X
Fuel level
X
Fuel filter
X
Lights
X
every 50
Transmission/rear axle oil level
X
Rear axle (Note 2)
X
2WD front axle (Note 2)
X
4WD front axle (Note 2)
X
Clutch and brake fluid reservoir level
X
(Note 3)
Battery
X
Rear 3-point linkage
X
Wheels and tyres
X
at 100 (1st Braking distance
X
Engine drive belt/s tension
X
service)
Engine oil (Note 2)
Engine oil filter cartridge
Coolers
X
Fuel filter
Parking brake lever - Park Brake conX
trol
Screen wash system
X
Air conditioning system filters
X
Oil lines
X
every 300 First carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours
Braking distance
X
Engine oil (Note 2) (Note 6) (Note 7)
Engine oil filter cartridge (Note 4)
(Note 6) (Note 7)
Coolers
X
Parking brake lever - Park Brake conX
trol
Front axle/final drives oil level
X
Screen wash system
X
Oil lines
X
Front power take-off
X
every 600 First carry out the operations indicated for every 50 hours and every 300 hours
Engine drive belt/s tension
X
Engine valve clearances and fuel inX
jectors
Fuel filter
Transmission oil filter (Note 3)
Differentials lock system
X
Braking system with safety brakes
X
valve
RENEW
CLEAN
6-28
6-28
6-29
X
X
6-21
6-22
6-24
CHECK
6-25
6-27
6-30
6-28
6-29
6-31
6-21
6-32
X
X
DRAIN
WATER
6-26
6-32
6-35
6-35
10
every 10
ACTION
GREASE
FREITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE

QUENCY IN
HOURS
Tab. 29
6-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.23.03
FREITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE

QUENCY IN
HOURS
every 1200
hours or at
least once a
year
ACTION
GREASE
DRAIN
WATER
CHECK
CLEAN
RENEW
2
3
First carry out all the operations indicated for intervals of 50 hours, 300 hours and 600 hours
Injection pump
X
Air filter cartridge (Note 5) or after
X
cleaning 6 times
Starter motor
X
Front and rear hydraulic brakes circuit
X
Front wheel hub bearings (2WD)
X
Air conditioning system filters
X
Cab heating system
X
Cab air conditioning system
X
Hydraulic clutch circuit (Note 2)
X
First carry out all the operations indicated for intervals of 50 hours, 300 hours and 600 hours
Coolant level (Note 2)
X
Transmission oil (Note 2)
X
Front axle oil (2WD) (Note 2)
X
Front axle/final drives oil (Note 2)
X
every 1200
hours or at
least once
every
2
years
General
Clean engine air cleaner (Note 3)
Air filter internal safety cartridge or
mainteafter the main cartridge has been
nance
cleaned 3 times
REFERENCE
6-36
6-36
6-40
6-40
6-41
6-28
6-41
6-42
6-44
6-45
6-46
6-47
6-48
6-36
6-36
NOTE 1 - Check for leaks, flexible hoses in contact with other parts, loose threaded fasteners and build-up of debris.
Before use, rectify leaks, ensure hoses are secured and tighten loose threaded fasteners.
NOTE 2 - For the correct product type, see the table Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes.
NOTE 3 - When the warning light is illuminated.
NOTE 4 - Whenever the oil is changed.
NOTE 6 - Oil change intervals should be halved if the diesel fuel used contains over 0.5% sulphur.
NOTE 7 - Oil change intervals should be halved if BIODIESEL (B100) fuel is used.
IMPORTANT
The fuel filter should be changed 30-50 operating hours after switching from normal diesel to BIODIESEL.
7
8
9
10
6-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.23.03
6.5 - ACCESSING THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.5.1 - Accessing the engine compartment

Raising the hood
DANGER
When opening and closing the hood and when the hood is open, pay attention to moving parts: shear hazard.
DANGER
When the engine hood is open keep well clear of hot parts. Some parts of the engine can reach very high temperatures. Risk of burns!
Press button (1) located under the front grille to release the hood catch.
Raise the hood, which will open to its full extent.
To close the hood, push it down until you feel the catch engage.
Fig. 318
Removing the side panels

To remove the side panels:
Raise the side panel
Pull towards the front of the tractor
1.
2.
Fig. 319
Check that the gasket around the shield separating the front compartment from
the engine is in good condition and correctly fitted. This is important to ensure correct operation of both the engine cooling system and the oil coolers located in the
front compartment. Renew the gasket if necessary.
10
Fig. 320
6-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.23.03
6.6 - DAILY INTERVENTION
6.6.1 - General inspection of the tractor

CAUTION
Wait for the engine to cool down before touching it. During maintenance operations, apply the parking brake and
chock the wheels. On completion of the work, replace the side panels, the hood and any safety guards or covers that
were removed.
Before starting work, inspect the tractor exterior for signs of oil leaks or other faults.
Clean all mud, straw, leaves, etc.. from the tractor.
If necessary, contact your dealer to repair any faults once you have located the source of the problem.
6.6.2 - Checking the engine oil level
CAUTION
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.
CAUTION
DANGER
Risk of burns when the engine is hot; wait for the engine to cool down before carrying out maintenance, inspections
or adjustments.
Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.
Before checking the engine oil level, run the engine for a few minutes, switch off the engine and after approximately a minute check
the oil level.
To check the oil level, pull out the dipstick (1), wipe it with a lint free cloth, re-insert
it and pull it out once more to check the oil level.
If the level lies between the two notches (2) and (3) on the dipstick, it is correct.
7
8
Fig. 321
9
10
6-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.23.04
When necessary, top up to the top notch on the dipstick by pouring oil of the specified type through filler (1).
Fig. 322
6.6.3 - Checking coolant level

WARNING
Open the engine hood.

Check the level of coolant in reservoir (1).
If there is insufficient coolant:
Wait until the engine is cold.

Top up the level with the same type of fluid as that already contained in the
tank by pouring it in through the filler hole after removing cap (2).
Fig. 323
1.
2.
N.B.
The cooling circuit operates under pressure: the pressure is regulated via the radiator cap, which therefore must never
be removed while the engine is still warm. The pressure is discharged by turning the radiator cap to the first position
and then removing it completely.
6.6.4 - Checking the fuel level
Always check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank, which should never be allowed to run dry.
If the recommended sulphur content value is exceeded, the time intervals for changing the oil, indicated in the maintenance tables,
must be halved.
WARNING
Use exclusively diesel fuel of a recognized make with sulphur content of less than 0.5.
DANGER
10
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.
Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.
6-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.23.04
Filling up with fuel at the end of the days work
WARNING
When refuelling, switch off the engine and always clean up any diesel spilled on the tractor.
WARNING
CAUTION
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.
The fuel tank should always be filled at the end of the working day to prevent condensation forming during the night.
4
5
Fig. 324
Drain water from the fuel pre-filter

Proceed as follows:
l
l
l
Place a suitable receptacle under prefilter (1).

Loosen screw (3) and wait until all the water has drained from bowl (2).
Retighten screw (3).
1
2
Fig. 325
Draining water from the fuel filter
N.B.
Always drain the water from the fuel filter before operating the tractor after the winter season.
Drain water from fuel filter by opening screw (1) on the bottom of filter bowl (2)
to allow the fuel mixed with water to flow out; close the valve as soon as the fuel
emerges free of water.
10
Fig. 326
6-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.23.05
CAUTION
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
The lift pump is located on the right-hand side of the engine at the front.
The pump can be operated manually by firmly pressing on the top as shown by
the arrow.
Fuel pump
Fig. 327
6.6.5 - Check the electrical system
10
Check that the headlights, direction indicators, sidelights, etc., all function correctly.
6-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.23.05
6.7 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 50 HOURS
6.7.1 - Checking the transmission oil level

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.
CAUTION
To check the oil level correctly, put the tractor into the following condition:
l
l
l
l
Park the tractor on level ground.

The engine must be switched off at least 5 minutes beforehand and the parking brake must be applied.
The rear lift must be lowered and the arms of the front lift (if present) must be raised;
The remote valve control levers must be in the neutral position.
90 HP tractors
l
The oil level can be easily checked through the round sightglass (1).
5
Fig. 328
105 HP tractors with mechanical shuttle
l
l
The oil level can be easily checked by taking out the dipstick (1).
Clean the dipstick with an unfrayed rag, put it back in and take it out again.
The oil level must be between the two notches.
IMPORTANT
Insert and slowly extract the transmission oil dipstick from its seat.
Fig. 329
105 HP tractors with hydraulic shuttle

l
The oil level can be checked through sight glass (1) located to the left of the
rear PTO output shaft.
The oil level is correct when it lies between the minimum mark (2) and
maximum mark (3).
10
Fig. 330
If it is necessary to top up the oil level, proceed as follows:
6-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.23.06
l
l
If necessary, top up using the oil indicated in the table of Lubricants and reference quantities until the level reaches the top
notch of the dipstick.
Restart the engine and leave it idling for a few minutes, then switch off the engine and check the oil level again.
After replenishing the oil level, close the oil filler hole with the relative plug with dipstick.
90 HP tractors
Transmission oil filler plug
1.
Fig. 331
105 HP tractors
Transmission oil filler plug
1.
Fig. 332
6.7.2 - Grease the rear axle
10
Fig. 333
Grease the halfshaft bearings (one per side, as shown in the figure).
Inject grease through the nipples using a grease pump.
6-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.23.06
Greasing the axle pivot bushings
2
3
Fig. 334
Greasing the steering spindles

4
5
Fig. 335
Greasing the steering cylinders
Inject grease through the grease nipples (2 per cylinder), using a grease pump.
The grease nipples are located on the steering cylinder pivot pins.
7
8
Fig. 336
9
10
6-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.23.07
Greasing the steering joint bearings
Inject grease through the grease nipples (2 per joint), using a grease pump.
Fig. 337
Fig. 338
The grease nipples are located on the wheel hub pivot pins.
Greasing the rear support of the front axle
Inject grease through the grease nipple, using a grease pump.
Fig. 339
Greasing the front support of the front axle
Inject grease through the grease nipple, using a grease pump.
10
Fig. 340
6-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.23.09
6.7.5 - Checking clutch and brake reservoir oil level
Checking clutch reservoir oil level

CAUTION
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. Highpressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
CAUTION
Note:
CAUTION
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufacturers manual.
The hydrostatic clutch control system eliminates all need for clutch pedal adjustment.
To check the level:
l
l
The tractor must be parked on level ground.

Unscrew the plug (1) and check that the oil level reaches the MAX level
notch, otherwise top up with the oil indicated in the Lubricants and reference quantities table.
6
Fig. 341
The level of oil in the tank is checked with a warning light on the instrument panel.
When the warning light comes on, top up by taking off the plug (1), until the MAX level notch is reached.
In case of clutch malfunction, contact a service centre.
Checking brake reservoir oil level

The brake fluid tank is the same one used for the clutch.
Carry out the same procedure described in Ref. Checking clutch reservoir oil level.
6.7.6 - Check the battery

CAUTION
The terminals and some components of the battery contain lead or lead compounds. In some countries the legislation
considers these substances as a cause of cancer, birth defects and damage to the reproductive system. Wash your
hands after handling the battery.
10
6-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.23.09
CAUTION
Wear safety goggles when charging or topping up the battery.

CAUTION
Only use 12 volt chargers to charge the battery.

DANGER
The gases given off by the battery are highly explosive. Never cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery.
Batteries must be stored and charged in a well-ventilated environment. Take care that the acid electrolyte does not
come into contact with your skin or clothes.
WARNING
Always disconnect the battery before carrying out any work on the electrical system. Always disconnect the battery
and all the electronic control units before carrying out any welding on the tractor or any of the equipment connected
to the tractor.
The battery does not require special maintenance.

Check that the battery acid level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
At the start of the winter season, check the battery charge level. Re-charge if
necessary.
Fig. 342
6.7.7 - Greasing the rear 3-point linkage

When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3-point hitch, ensure it does not come apart and that a sufficient length
of the threaded end of the turnbuckle is screwed into the turnbuckle housing to withstand the tractive force applied
when working.
IMPORTANT:
10
Fig. 343
As stated in the maintenance table, it is necessary to grease the two lift unit tie
rods (1), one on either side.
6-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.23.13
As stated in the maintenance table, it is necessary to grease the two tie rods of the
side stabilizers (2), one on either side.
2
Fig. 344
6.7.8 - Checking wheels and tyres

CAUTION
For wheel changing operations and certain maintenance and repair work, the tractor must be raised from the ground
on specific safety stands.
Periodically check the condition of the tyres. Change them if necessary. The tyres should be inflated to the pressure specified by the
manufacturer in accordance with the conditions of use.
When fixing the wheels, observe the recommended tightening torques.
5
6
7
8
9
10
6-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.23.17
6.8 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 100 HOURS (1ST SERVICE)
6.8.1 - Checking the braking distance

WARNING
Periodically the brake fluid level.
The user should operate the brakes to test the braking action.
If the brakes work badly, call a service centre.
6.8.2 - Checking engine drive belt tension

To adjust drive belt tension, proceed as follows:
CAUTION
Before doing any maintenance or repair work, stop the engine and take out the ignition key.
WARNING
Inspect the belts over their entire length. If damaged, they must be renewed immediately.
WARNING
If the fan belt (or belts) is (are) broken, do not start the engine for any reason whatsoever as the engine cooling system
will be disabled.
IMPORTANT:
In order to check the tension, first remove the cover; this operation must be carried out after the engine has been
switched off and allowed to cool down.
Engine belt
Front view of engine
Fan pulley
Alternator pulley
Crankshaft pulley
Locknut
Belt tension adjuster screw
Fig. 345
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To adjust proceed as shown below:

l
l
Loosen the locknut (4);

Turn the adjuster screw (5) to tension the belt as required;
Tighten the locknut (4);
To check for correct belt tensioning, press the belt mid-way with the thumb and ensure that there is a deflection of approx. 15-20 mm.
10
If the deflection is not within the specified range, repeat the adjustment operations until the correct value is obtained.
6-21
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 21
21/05/2012 13.23.19
Air conditioning compressor belt
Front view of engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
Crankshaft pulley
Air conditioning compressor pulley
Locknut
Belt tension adjuster screw
2
Fig. 346
To adjust proceed as shown below:

l
l
l
Loosen the locknut (3);

Turn the adjuster screw (4) to tension the belt as required;
Tighten the locknut (3);
To check for correct belt tensioning, press the belt mid-way with the thumb and ensure that there is a deflection of approx. 15-20 mm.
If the deflection is not within the specified range, repeat the adjustment operations until the correct value is obtained.
6.8.3 - Changing the engine oil

CAUTION
5
CAUTION
Procedure for changing the engine oil

1.
2.
3.
Park the tractor on level ground and wait for the engine to cool down.
Place a suitable container under the drain plug (1) on the right-hand side of the oil sump.
Unscrew
the
drain
plug
(1)
in
the
oil
sump.
DANGER
8
Fig. 347
9
10
6-22
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 22
21/05/2012 13.23.26
When all the oil has drained from the sump, inspect the drain plug seal and,
if necessary, renew it before screwing the drain plug back in.
4.
Fig. 348
Pour oil of the prescribed quality into the sump through the oil filler (1) until
the level is between the notches on the dipstick (2) - (3).
Restart the engine and let it idle for a few minutes, checking the seal of the
drain plug.
5.
Fig. 349
Switch off the engine, wait for it to cool down, check the oil level again and,
if
necessary,
top
up
through
the
filter
(1).
6.
CAUTION
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to

that already present.
10
Fig. 350
6-23
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 23
21/05/2012 13.23.27
6.8.4 - Changing the engine oil filter cartridge
CAUTION
CAUTION
DANGER
3
Procedure for changing the engine oil filter cartridge
1.
2.
3.

Place a suitable receptacle under the filter.
Unscrew
the
filter
cartridge
(1).
WARNING
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any
fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
5
Fig. 351
Apply oil of the same type as that used for the engine to the new filter cartridge seal.
5.
6.
Screw on the new cartridge by hand.

Restart the engine and let it idle for a few minutes, checking the seal of the
gaskets.
Switch off the engine, wait for it to cool down, check the oil level again and
top
up
if
necessary.
4.
Fig. 352
8
9
CAUTION
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to
that already present.
10
Fig. 353
6-24
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 24
21/05/2012 13.23.30
6.8.5 - Checking radiator cleanliness
CAUTION
Radiators located at the front of the tractor
Engine cooling system radiator

Transmission oil cooler
Intercooler
Grille for radiator cleaning
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fig. 354
Engine cooling system radiator

The coolers can be cleaned with a compressed air jet, or, if necessary, a steam jet (max. pressure 6 bar) or a water jet.
If you intend to clean the engine at the same time, protect the air filter, alternator and starter motor. Once all the removed components
have been refitted, run the engine for a few minutes so that it warms up and dries any parts that are still wet.
Cleaning with detergents
When cleaning with detergents, choose commercial products that dissolve oil.
The detergent/water solution can be applied by spray gun or brush.
After applying the solution, wait a few minutes then rinse off with clean water.
This cleaning method is only suitable for removing dust. Always clean the grilles in the engine compartment or protecting the cab
filters by directing the air jet in the opposite direction to the normal air inflow.
Cleaning the transmission oil radiator
Cleaning with compressed air
The transmission oil radiator for the hydraulic services is positioned at the front of the engine coolant radiator.
The coolers can be cleaned with a compressed air jet, or, if necessary, a steam jet (max. pressure 6 bar) or a water jet.
Cleaning the front grille
For the engine cooling system to function correctly, the engine cooling grille in front of the radiator must always be kept clean.
Cleaning is necessary after cleaning the radiators.
To remove grille (1) simply grip it by handle (2) and pull it upwards. Grille (1) must
be cleaned by blowing compressed air and if necessary also with a jet of steam
(no greater than 6 bar) or of water.
10
Fig. 355
6-25
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 25
21/05/2012 13.23.32
6.8.6 - Changing the fuel filter
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.
DANGER
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.
4
WARNING
WARNING
Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.
Changing the fuel prefilter
1.
2.
Locking ring
Pre-filter cartridge
7
2
Fig. 356
Procedure for changing the fuel pre-filter

l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l

Place a recipient under the filter;
Loosen the locking ring by turning it to the left (open padlock symbol) until the filter cartridge can be removed;
Remove the filter cartridge.
Unscrew the bleed screw from the bottom of the old cartridge and screw it into the new filter;
Clean the seal of the new filter and fill it with clean fuel;
Position the new filter and tighten the locking ring by turning it to the right (closed padlock symbol);
If necessary, bleed the air from the filter.
IMPORTANT:
10
Before refitting the fuel filter make sure it is filled with fuel.
6-26
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 26
21/05/2012 13.23.36
Changing the fuel filter
1.
2.
Fuel filter
Retaining screw
Fig. 357
Procedure for changing the fuel filter

l
l
l
l

Undo the screw ( 2) and remove the cartridge (1) from the filter body.
Fit the new filter cartridge.
IMPORTANT:
Before refitting the fuel filter make sure it is filled with fuel.
6.8.7 - Parking brake lever control - Park Brake control

IMPORTANT
If you need to park on a steep gradient - more than 15 (33% gradient) - place chocks under the rear wheels to immobilise the tractor. It is any case recommended not to park the tractor on a steep gradient.
Parking brake lever

WARNING
When applying the parking brake, the lever must always be pulled up all the way
Fig. 358
10
A warning light on the instrument panel illuminates when the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.
The travel of ever (1) must be approximately 150 mm; If not, contact an authorised
service centre to have the tie rod adjusted.
6-27
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 27
21/05/2012 13.23.37
Park Brake control
Have the Park Brake control checked and adjusted by a specialised service centre.
6.8.8 - Checking the window washer system

Check the level of screen wash liquid in the plastic reservoir (1) located on the
rear of the tractor.
2
3
Fig. 359
Clean blocked screen washer jets using a pin. If necessary , adjust the direction of the jets so that the spray hits the screen at the top
of the arc described by the wiper blade.
During winter, it is advisable to add a suitable antifreeze or methyl alcohol to the screenwash fluid.
6.8.9 - Cleaning the cab ventilation system filters

CAUTION
The filter of cab ventilation system must be of the paper type; replace it with the Activated carbon filter only for
pesticide spraying.
DANGER
Change the active carbon filter after 200 hours of use or after 36 months. If the odours of any toxic substances used
become noticeable inside the cab, immediately change the filter and check the seal.
WARNING
Only for tractors equipped with cab with a standard roof
To access the filter, tilt the protective grille (1) located on the outside on the back
of the roof downwards.
Then turn the retaining knobs (2), one on each side, and take out the filter (3).
l
7
8
Fig. 360
9
10
6-28
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 28
21/05/2012 13.23.37
Only for tractors equipped with cab with a high-visibility roof
To access the filter (2), one on either side, it is necessary to remove the protection
(1) by freeing it from its seat by pulling the safety catch (3) in the direction shown
by the arrow and then extract the filter (2).
Fig. 361
l
l
l
l
Blow compressed air (max 6 bar) through the filter in the opposite direction to the normal air flow in order to completely remove
all dust.
Wash with a solution of water and detergent solution at 40C for about 15 minutes.
Rinse with running water.
Leave to dry at ambient temperature.
When refitting the filter, make sure that it reaches up to the top and bottom edges of the filter housing.
IMPORTANT:
Clean the filters as follows:
The filter must be renewed if damaged and, in any case, after 6 washes.
Cleaning the active carbon air filter

The procedures for removal and refitting are the same as for ordinary filters.
Note that these filters can never offer total protection against toxic substances.
After every use, always fit the normal filters back.
Wear protective gloves when changing used filters.
Used filters should be taken to specialised waste disposal centres.

In any case, observe the manufacturers instructions regarding the handling and disposal of used filters.
6.8.10 - Checking the oil pipelines

CAUTION
CAUTION
Inspect the pipes for cracks or breaks and check for leaks from the pipe fittings or from the control valve.
CAUTION
10
When the filter clogged warning light comes on: change the filter following the instructions given in Changing the transmission oil filter.
6-29
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 29
21/05/2012 13.23.38
6.9.1 - Check front PTO oil level (4WD)

Check differential oil level (4WD)
CAUTION
2
CAUTION
CAUTION
Note:
Remove the oil filler/level plug to check the oil level.
5
6
Fig. 362
Check oil level of side final drives and planetary reduction unit (4WD)
Rotate the hub so that filler/level plug is aligned horizontally with the centre of the
hub.
The oil level should be up to the lower edge of the hole.
8
9
Fig. 363
10
6-30
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 30
21/05/2012 13.23.38
6.9.2 - Checking the front PTO
CAUTION
CAUTION
The front PTO does not require any maintenance as it is lubricated by oil from the transmission.
10
Check for oil leaks.
6-31
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 31
21/05/2012 13.23.39
6.10.1 - Set engine valves clearance and fuel injectors

Adjusting the valve clearances
DANGER
Risk of burns when the engine is hot; wait for the engine to cool down before carrying out maintenance, inspections
or adjustments.
This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.
Fuel injectors
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity when refuelling or servicing the fuel injection system.
6.10.2 - Changing the transmission oil filters

DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
IMPORTANT:
If the warning light stays on when the oil is hot and the engine is running at normal operating
speed, this means that the transmission oil filters are clogged. It is, however, quite normal
for the warning light to stay illuminated for a few minutes after starting the engine.
10
6-32
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 32
21/05/2012 13.23.39
Changing the transmission oil filters on tractors equipped with mechanical shuttle
1.
2.
3.
The tractor is equipped with three 44 micron cartridge-type filters located on the left-hand side of the tractor.

Place a suitable receptacle under the filters.
Unscrew the cartridges.
Fig. 364
4.
Oil the gaskets of the cartridges of the new filters using the same oil as that
used in the transmission as indicated in the figure.
Fig. 365
5.
Screw on the new cartridges, tightening fully by hand.
Fig. 366
6.
7.
On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seal.
Check the transmission oil level.
Changing the transmission oil filters on tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle
l
l
A cartridge type filter is located on the right-hand side of the tractor.

A 90 micron wire gauze filter is located in the gearbox on the intake pipe (this filter must be renewed each time the transmission oil is changed).
Changing the main filter

10
1.
2.
The tractor is equipped with two filters:
6-33
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 33
21/05/2012 13.23.39
3.
Unscrew the cartridge.
1
2
Fig. 367
4.
Apply oil of the same type as that used for the gearbox to the new filter
cartridge gasket as shown in figure.
4
Fig. 368
5.
Screw the new cartridge on by hand.
6
Fig. 369
6.
7.
On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seal.
Check the transmission oil level.
8
9
10
6-34
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 34
21/05/2012 13.23.39
Changing the gearbox oil filter
WARNING
Renew this filter every time you change the gearbox oil.
WARNING
Before removing the old filter, drain the oil from the gearbox.
1.
2.
Filter retaining cover

Cover retaining screws
The tractor is equipped with a 90 micron filter located on the right-hand side of the
tractor in the gearbox and connected to the oil pick-up pipe.
3
Position a suitable container under the filter to collect any oil remaining in the
gearbox.
Remove the screw (2) securing the filter cover (1) and then remove the filter (3).
Fig. 370
6.10.3 - Checking the differential lock system
The operator performs this check. Test the controls and check that the differential lock is engaged and disengaged correctly.
6.10.4 - Checking the braking system with safety brakes valve

CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
10
6-35
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 35
21/05/2012 13.23.40
6.11 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 1200 HOURS OR AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR
6.11.1 - Fuel injection pump maintenance

CAUTION
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity when refuelling or servicing the fuel injection system.
CAUTION
6.11.2 - Cleaning engine air filter - Changing air filter cartridge and internal safety cartridge
The air is filtered by two filters of pleated paper protected by a case and contained in a plastic cylinder in front of the radiators.
WARNING
IMPORTANT:
The inner element is designed to prevent solid particles from entering the inlet manifold and must never be cleaned.
It must, however, be renewed after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.
IMPORTANT:
Periodically check the efficiency of the air filter dust ejector valve.
6
IMPORTANT:
Check regularly that the engine air cleaner housing and element are not damaged. Do not wash or brush the element.
IMPORTANT:
Periodically inspect the condition of the air cleaner casing and filter element.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use the tractor without the main air cleaner element fitted.
IMPORTANT:
Never use petrol, oil, kerosene or solvents to clean the element. Never attempt to blow the element clean using exhaust gas. Never add oil to the dry filter. Never use an element that shows signs of damage.
10
6-36
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 36
21/05/2012 13.23.40
Procedure for disassembling the air filter
Pull the filter cover release slider (1) outwards
1.
Only for tractors equipped with dust exhauster

Disconnect the manifold of the dust exhauster (2) by pulling it downwards
m
Fig. 372
Turn the filter cover (3) anticlockwise to be able to remove it
Fig. 373
Remove the cover (4) of the filter
10
Fig. 374
4.
3.
2.
Fig. 371
6-37
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 37
21/05/2012 13.23.41
5.
Extract the main element (5) of the filter
1
2
Fig. 375
If necessary (after cleaning the main filter 3 times) remove the safety element (6) and renew it
This element must never be cleaned, but only renewed
7.
Refit the elements in the container by carrying out the above operations in reverse order
Fit the filter cover back on and lock it
6.
4
Fig. 376
Cleaning the dry air filter

When the clogged air filter warning light comes on, clean the filtering element to prevent the engine losing power or, worse, the engine
getting damaged.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the warning light is always working correctly. To check its operation, start the engine and temporarily
obstruct the air filter intake tube (do not use your hands). The filter element must always be in perfect working order;
if it is not, clean or wash it.
Cleaning the engine air filter using compressed air
Use this cleaning method when the filter is clogged with dust. Direct a jet of compressed air (max. pressure 6.8 bar) from the inside
to the outside of the element, moving the jet along the pleats in the paper until all the dust is removed.
Washing the engine air filter in water
This cleaning method is particularly recommended when the filter element is clogged with oily substances. It consists of washing the
element with clean water. Wash the element using a jet of clean water (max. pressure 2.9 bar) directed from the inside to the outside
of the element. Leave the element to dry in a dust free environment for 24 hours.
Procedure for washing the filter

1.
Washing the filter element
9
10
Fig. 377
6-38
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 38
21/05/2012 13.23.41
Cleaning the filter element using compressed air
2.
Fig. 378
Eliminating residues remaining on the filter element by means of a water jet
3.
Fig. 379
Inspecting the paper element for holes or tears using a light.
4.
10
Fig. 380
6-39
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 39
21/05/2012 13.23.42
Refitting the element
Wipe the air filter casing with a dry rag, and check that the element is not deformed. Hold a light inside the paper element to check
for tears or holes in the paper fabric. If no suitable light source is available simply check the filter element by observing the outer
surface of the pleated paper.
The filter element must be replaced after being cleaned 6 times, unless any small holes or tears are detected sooner, in which case
it must be renewed immediately.
The inner safety element must never be cleaned. It must, however, be replaced after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.
6.11.3 - Starter motor maintenance

DANGER
6.11.4 - Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear brakes
WARNING
CAUTION
Note:
In the case of poor braking action, either contact an authorised service centre or check for air in the hydraulic circuit as follows:
separate the two brake pedals by detaching the connecting bolt.
7
8
Fig. 381
set the SEPARATE BRAKES valve control (1) to OFF position.
9
10
Fig. 382
operate the right-hand brake pedal several times in quick succession;

6-40
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 40
21/05/2012 13.23.42
then, keeping the pedal fully depressed, slightly unscrew and immediately re-close
the air bleed screw for the rear right-hand brake. Repeat this operation as many
times as necessary until clean hydraulic fluid, free of any air bubbles, can be seen
flowing
out
of
the
bleed
screw.
CAUTION
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing
serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure fluid leaks
may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking
for leaks. NEVER use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect
your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel with experience of this particular
problem.
Fig. 383
Fig. 384
Repeat this procedure on the bleed screw for the front right-hand brake.
Proceed likewise for the front left-hand brake and rear left-hand brake, loosening the relative bleed screws.
6.11.5 - Front wheel hub bearings (2WD)

WARNING
Remove the bearings, wash them in diesel fuel, and then refit, packing the hub
half full of grease.
10
Fig. 385
6-41
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 41
21/05/2012 13.23.43
6.11.6 - Cab heating system maintenance
To access the heating unit, remove the mask (1) after (only for tractors
equipped with cab with a standard roof) taking off:
l
l
the sun blind (2)

the controls (3) for ventilation, heating and, if fitted, air conditioning
Then take out the screws (4), screws (5) located behind the sun blind and screws
(6)
Then move the front mask (1) downwards, taking care over the electrical connections.
Fig. 386
To access the heating unit, remove the mask (1) after (only for tractors
equipped with cab with a high-visibility roof) taking off:
l
4
l
the bracket (2) taking out the screws (3), repeat the operation on the other
side of the roof too.
the bracket (4) taking out the screw (5), repeat the operation on the other
the bracket (6) taking out the screws (7), repeat the operation on the other
IMPORTANT:
Take great care not to damage the cab roof compartment by bending it too far.
Fig. 387
When switching on the system, always make sure that the intake ducts and air vents are not obstructed.
IMPORTANT:
Do not carry out any work on the system when the engine is running.
The system utilises heat from the engine coolant to produce warm air.
The heating system must be flushed out along with the engine cooling system whenever the coolant is changed.
Periodically check the heater supply and return lines for leaks.
6.11.7 - Cab air conditioning system maintenance

CAUTION
The refrigerant in the air conditioning system can cause severe lesions.
DANGER
Should the air-conditioning system piping develop a visible leak, do not approach with a naked flame, refrigerant gas
is inflammable and on combustion produces highly toxic substances.
WARNING
All repairs to the air conditioning system must be referred to an authorised service centre.
The system is composed of:
l
10
An evaporator, a condenser unit equipped with an electric fan situated on top of the roof (in the middle) and a compressor
driven by the engine on the right-hand side of the engine.
6-42
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 42
21/05/2012 13.23.43
1
Fixing knobs
Shield
1.
2.
To access the condenser unit, release knobs (1) and remove guard (2) (only for
tractors
equipped
with
cab
with
a
standard
roof)
Fig. 388
To access the condenser unit, release knobs (1) and remove guard (2) (only for
tractors
equipped
with
cab
with
a
high
visibility
roof)
1.
2.
1
1
Fixing knobs
Shield
Fig. 389
Air conditioning system check

to be done at the start of each working year by a specialized workshop
Any air and water in the refrigerant circuit will impair the efficiency of the system:
l
the air is compressed unnecessarily and does not produce any refrigeration effect.
moisture in the circuit tends to freeze in the cold sections of the circuit, creating obstructions that impair cooling efficiency.
Fig. 390
Should it be necessary to remove the filter-dryer or the air conditioning unit, immediately plug the ends of the inlet and
outlet pipes to prevent the ingress of dust or moisture.
The system efficiency is checked by inspecting the conditions of the refrigerant

through the sight glass on top of the filter drier (1).
The refrigerant, as seen through the inspection window, should be clear and free
of bubbles.
Check the drive belt tension.

Check that the compressor is firmly secured to the tractor and that the pulleys are perfectly aligned.
10
IMPORTANT:
6-43
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 43
21/05/2012 13.23.44
Air conditioning compressor
The compressor must be securely fixed to the tractor.

The refrigerant circuit is pressurised and therefore must never be opened
The ecological refrigerant R 134a is non-toxic and odourless, and is not inflammable.
However, there are certain essential safety precautions when handling refrigerant:
l
l
l
Avoid direct contact with skin, as this can cause lesions similar to chilblains.
Avoid contact with eyes; should the refrigerant enter your eyes, seek medical assistance immediately.
Any welding either directly on the refrigerant circuit or in the immediate vicinity is strictly prohibited. The refrigerant must not
be exposed to temperatures in excess of 80C.
Valve for charging and maintenance of the A/C circuit
All servicing or charging of the air conditioning system is to be performed at a

specialised
service
centre.
1.
System charging valves

1
4
Fig. 391
6.11.8 - Bleeding the hydraulic clutch circuit

WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Note:
8
In case of clutch malfunction, either contact your authorised service centre, or check for air in the hydraulic circuit as follows:
after removing the dust cap, slightly unscrew and immediately re-close the air
bleed screw (1)
while keeping the clutch pedal fully depressed.
Repeat this operation as many times as necessary until clean hydraulic fluid, free
of any air bubbles, can be seen flowing out of the bleed screw.
10
Fig. 392
6-44
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 44
21/05/2012 13.23.45
6.12 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 1200 HOURS OR AT LEAST EVERY TWO YEARS
6.12.1 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit

Flush the cooling circuit using a specific detergent.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is still hot. The radiator is under pressure when hot, and if opened,
boiling liquid and steam can escape and cause serious injury to yourself and anyone else in the vicinity. Before removing the radiator cap, stop the engine and wait for the circuit to cool down.
CAUTION
Procedure for changing the coolant and flushing the circuit

1.
2.

The engine must be switched off and the coolant cold.
Open the cap (2) of the expansion chamber (1).
Fig. 393
Place a suitable receptacle under the coolant radiator.

Drain the radiator by removing the plug at the bottom right-hand side.
3.
WARNING
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any

fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
Refit the drain plug and fill the circuit with detergent mixture via filler neck
(2) located on expansion tank (1).
5.
Turn on the engine and let it run on idle for around one and a half hours; if the tractor is equipped with a cab heating system,
this must be set to maximum to ensure that the detergent mix also circulates in this circuit.
IMPORTANT:
When the engine is running, check that the detergent mixture does not drop under the minimum level in the
reservoir.
6.
Switch off the engine, drain the system and then fill it with water; then start the engine again bring it up to a speed of approx.
1000 rpm. and leave it running for 5 minutes;
10
Fig. 394
4.
Fig. 394
6-45
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 45
21/05/2012 13.23.46
7.
8.
Drain the system once again;

Refill the circuit with coolant, run the engine for a few minutes and then top up the system if necessary.
6.12.2 - Changing the transmission oil

CAUTION
CAUTION
IMPORTANT:
Dispose of used oil and filters in compliance with applicable regulations. DO NOT dump oil on the ground, in sewers
or containers that are not sealed. Respect the environment.
IMPORTANT:
Change the filters at the same time as the oil.
Procedure for changing the transmission oil
1.
2.

Open the plug on top of the lift casing (see Checking the transmission oil level).
CAUTION
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death.
High-pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER
use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate
attention from medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
3.
Remove the drain plug (1) located under the gearbox, placing a suitable
receptacle
under
the
hole.
DANGER
Fig. 395
4.

Remove drain plug (2) located under the front end of the gearbox after placing
a
suitable
receptacle
under
the
hole.
m
DANGER
10
Fig. 396
5.
Renew all the oil filters.

6-46
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 46
21/05/2012 13.23.47
6.
7.
8.
Refit and tighten drain plugs (1) and (2) and pour oil into the gearbox through filler hole located above the on top of the lift
cover up to the correct level.
After filling, screw in the oil filler plug and run the engine for a few minutes.
Re-check the oil level and top up if necessary.
The tractor is equipped with a gearbox oil cooler, for cleaning it see Cleaning engine front compartment gearbox oil cooler.
6.12.3 - Changing the front wheel hub oil (2WD)
Changing the oil
WARNING
DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Fig. 397
Drain the oil from drain hole located at the bottom of the hub.
Pour in oil through the hole, as shown in the figure, until the level is up to the lower
rim
of
the
hole.
CAUTION
Fig. 398
10
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that

already present.
6-47
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 47
21/05/2012 13.23.48
Cleaning the breather
Clean the breather valve when changing the oil.
2
Fig. 399
6.12.4 - Changing the differential oil, planetary reduction unit oil and side final drives oil
(4WD)
Changing the differential oil and planetary reduction unit oil (4WD)
WARNING
DANGER
5
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Drain the oil from drain hole located under the centre of the front axle.
8
9
Fig. 400
10
6-48
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 48
21/05/2012 13.23.50
Fill oil through the hole on the right-hand side, as shown in the figure, until the oil
level
is
up
to
the
lower
edge
of
the
hole.
CAUTION

already present.
Fig. 400
Changing the oil of the side final drives (4WD)
Fig. 401
Drain the used oil from the drain hole located at the bottom of the hub.
Fill oil through the hole, as shown in the figure, until the oil level is up to the lower
edge.
CAUTION
10
Fig. 401

already present.
6-49
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 49
21/05/2012 13.23.51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6-50
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 50
21/05/2012 13.23.51
1
2
3
4
10
7 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.23.52
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.1 - TOWING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
Fig. 402
The tractor can be towed only for short distances, such as, for example, from inside to outside a building.
A broken down tractor should be towed for the minimum indispensable distance to remove it from potentially dangerous conditions.
Observe all legal provisions as envisaged in the highway code relative to national legislation regarding towing manoeuvres.
CAUTION
We recommend transporting the tractor on a low loader in the case of longer transport distances. Comply with the
maximum width and height regulations for road transport. Check that the loader is suitable for the weight of the tractor
to be transported.
CAUTION
An operator must always be at the tractors controls when the tractor is being towed.
DANGER
NEVER permit other persons to access the tractor operator position during towing.
7.1.1 - Towing with the engine running
Towing with the engine running can be performed if forced gearbox lubrication is ensured:
l
l
l
Engine speed between 1200 - 1300 rpm.

Maximum towing speed 8 km/h
Maximum towing distance 1 km
For towing the tractor use only a standard bar applied to the front towing hitch approved by the manufacturer.
Make sure to use the correct pin for the towing hitch and that it is secured with its locking pin.
Clean all lights required for road use, front and rear, and make sure they are in working order.
Before starting towing check the following conditions:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Unhitch any implement from the tractor;

Lock the two brake pedals together with the connecting latch;
Disengage the power take-off and differential locks;
Set the shuttle control lever and gear lever to neutral;
Move the range lever to the fast position;
Move the creeper lever to neutral;
Display the SMV (Slow Moving Vehicle) sign and turn on the rotating beacon and hazard lights
10
7-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.23.52
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
Switch on the hazard warning lights and revolving warning lights. Affix suitable notices indicating that the tractor is
being towed. Observe and follow the relevant national regulations. Observe local safety regulations.
WARNING
l
l
Wait until traffic thins before joining the road. Exert caution in the proximity of unregulated intersections. Slow down until you
have a clear view in both directions.
Keep in your lane and drive as close as possible to the kerb. If a tailback builds up behind you pull into a lay-by as soon as
possible to allow the traffic to pass
When stopping the tractor (in any circumstances) apply the parking brake.
Travel speed must ALWAYS be such as to allow complete control and stability of the tractor in all conditions.
During road transfers observe the following instructions:
Never attempt to tow the tractor with ropes (including steel ropes) because rope breakage can cause serious injury.
DANGER
7.1.2 - Towing with the engine off

With engine stopped and with forced gearbox lubrication system inoperative the tractor can be transferred to a service
centre only when loaded onto a transporter.
IMPORTANT
10
With engine stopped and with forced gearbox lubrication system inoperative the tractor should not be towed except when safety is
at risk.
7-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.23.52
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.2 - SAFE TRANSPORT OF THE TRACTOR
DANGER
Do not enter the loading area when the tractor is being loaded onto a transporter.
Load and unload the tractor on level solid ground that provides a sound support for the wheels. Use suitably robust ramps set at an
appropriate angle and height. The loader bed must be kept clean and free of clay, oil or other slippery material.
Before loading or unloading the tractor, make sure that the transporter parking brake is applied and the wheels are chocked. Use an
assistant signalman in a safe position to keep an eye on the ramps, the load bed, the tractor, and the operator.
Ideally the tractor should be loaded on and unloaded from the transporter by a specialist operator. The tractor operator may
be insufficiently experienced.
Load the tractor complete with the four tyres on the truck bed or trailer.
Once the tractor has been loaded proceed as follows:
l
l
Make sure the engine hood, doors, front and rear hatch and cab roof hatch (if present) are secured.
Lock the tractor by engaging the parking brake and other devices such as PARK LOCK, PARK BRAKES, if available. If the
tractor is equipped with a mechanical gearbox select first gear. Place chocks under the four wheels.
Secure the tractor with chains or straps.
Do not attach straps or chains to the steering hydraulic cylinders or front drive shaft or other tractor components that can be
damaged.
On models equipped with a turbocharger, cover the exhaust pipe terminal to prevent the rotor from being caused to rotate by
wind action, resulting in damage to bearings which, in this condition, are not lubricated.
5
6
7
8
9
10
7-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.23.52
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
Use a lifting device of adequate capacity for the weight of the tractor (including the weight of all installed accessories).
Before lifting the tractor, make sure the doors, cab, hatches and other mobile parts are firmly secured.
7.3 - LIFTING THE TRACTOR
10
Keep a safe distance from the tractor during lifting operations.
7-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.23.52
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.4 - ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
Tab. 30
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
2
3
The engine fails to start or starts with dif- Incorrect start-up procedure.
Low level or lack of fuel.
ficulty
Air in the fuel pipes.
Low ambient temperature.
Fuel system contaminated.
Wrong engine oil viscosity.
Fuel filter(s) obstructed.
Injector operating trouble.
Inefficient fuel pump.
Fuel unsuited to the working temperature.
The engine turns irregularly and/or stalls
The engine pings
The engine lacks power
6
7
Engine overheating
8
9
Low engine operating temperature
Low engine oil pressure
CORRECTIVE ACTION
10
Review the start-up procedure.

Check the fuel level.
Bleed the fuel system.
Use the cold start device.
Clean and bleed the fuel system.
Use oil of the right viscosity.
Renew the filter.
Contact an authorised dealer.
Check the pump works properly.
Use fuel of the right type for the temperature conditions.
Battery cut-off device turned on.
Turn off the device.
Low starter motor speed.
Check the starter motor and the battery.
Wrong type of fuel.
Drain the tank and the system completely.
Contact your fuel supplier.
Renew the filter.
Fuel system contaminated.
Clean and bleed the fuel system.
Fuel cap breather obstructed.
Wash the cap in clean diesel and check the
breather is clear.
Incorrect injection pump timing and syn- Contact an authorised dealer.
chronization.
Low engine oil level.
Top up with oil as needed.
Engine overload.
Shift down gear, reduce the tow load.
Air filter clogged.
Service the air filter.
Renew the filter.
Inadequate fuel.
Use the right type of fuel.
Wrong engine valve clearance.
Injection pump operating trouble.
Fast idle speed set too low.
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Check and adjust or contact an authorized
fold.
dealer.
Turbocharger operating trouble.
Incorrect implement adjustment.
Refer to the implement operators manual.
Feed pipe obstructed.
Air in the fuel system.
Bleed the fuel system.
Low level of refrigerant.
Check whether there are any leaks in the
cooling system.
Faulty thermostat(s).
Radiators dirty or obstructed.
Clean.
Engine overload.
Faulty pressurized plug on the radiator.
Renew the plug.
Cooling system obstructed.
Fan belt slack or worn.
Check the tension of the belt and renew it
if worn out.
Temperature transmitter or indicator oper- Contact an authorised dealer.
ating trouble.
Grilles on the casing obstructed.
Clean.
Thermostat operating trouble.
Renew the thermostat(s).
Temperature sensor or indicator faulty.
Low oil level.
Wrong oil grade or viscosity.
Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Oil pump broken.
Oil pressure sensor broken.
7-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
Engine emits white smoke

Reduce the oil level as needed.
Check the air intake system, filter and manifolds.
Engine overload.
Air filter clogged.
Service the air filter.
Inadequate fuel.
Wrong engine valve clearance.
Incorrect implement adjustment.
Injection pump operating trouble.
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Check and adjust or contact an authorized
fold.
dealer.
Engine timing off.
Inadequate fuel.
Preheating system trouble.
Check the preheating system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
10
Engine emits black smoke
Wrong oil grade or viscosity.

Oil seepage outside.
Engine oil level too high.
Valve guides or seals worn.
Dust intake.
Fuel consumption too high
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Engine oil consumption too high
PROBLEM
7-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.5 - GEARBOX TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to solve problems associated with the tractor gearbox.
Tab. 31
TROUBLE
Gearbox working temperature too high
POSSIBLE CAUSE
2
3
4
5
6
7
High oil level.

Gearbox oil cooler obstructed or dirty
(where applicable).
Incorrect oil grade or viscosity.
Noisy gearbox
Low oil level.
Bearings worn or parts damaged.
Difficulty in engaging gears
The clutch fails to disengage completely.
External control coupling incorrectly adjusted or worn.
Gear engagement forks or synchronizers
worn.
Air in the clutch control system.
Tractor does not move
Check that all controls have been activated
correctly.
The error code will indicate the origin of
the fault (for versions with an electronically
controlled gearbox).
Little control when using the clutch pedal The time for filling the gearbox clutches
is set wrongly (for versions with hydraulic
shuttle).
Control mechanism malfunctioning.
Gear kicks out spontaneously or cannot be Worn synchronizers/couplings. Gear endisengaged
gagement coupling incorrect adjustment.
External control coupling incorrectly adjusted or worn.
Gear engagement forks or synchronizers
worn.
Bearings worn.
Services or gearbox lubrication oil low Gearbox oil filter clogged.
pressure
Oil pump inefficient/broken.
Shuttle direction clutch engagement is The clutch engagement must be calibrated.
abrupt or excessively modulated
Clutch screeches during modulation
Limited screeching is to be considered normal with a cerametallic clutch plate.
High and sudden screeching.
The Powershift gearbox is sharp, jerks or The Powershift gearbox must be adjusted.
the tractor stops
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check the oil level.

Clean.

Check the oil level and top up if necessary.
Consult an authorized dealer.
Adjust the coupling, renew the worn parts,
or consult an authorized dealer.
Adjust the coupling, renew the worn parts,
or consult an authorized dealer.
Change the filter.
8
9
10
7-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to solve problems associated with the tractor front and rear
PTOs.
7.6 - FRONT AND REAR POWER TAKE-OFF TROUBLESHOOTING

Tab. 32
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check the clutch unit engagement device. Overhaul the engagement device. Consult
an authorized dealer.
Possible wear of clutch plates.
Overhaul the clutch assembly.
PTO fails to stop when disengaged.
Overhaul the engagement device. Consult
Overhaul the PTO braking device. Consult
Check the clutch unit engagement device. Overhaul the engagement device. Consult
Piston seized or piston completes a full Overhaul the clutch assembly.
stroke.
10
The clutch fails to disengage
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The clutch slips
TROUBLE
7-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.7 - FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE TROUBLESHOOTING
Tab. 33
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Excessive wear of universal joint cross Oil leaks.

journals
Early tyre wear
Wrong tyre pressure.
Wheel toe-in.
Rolling or mechanical ratio.
Wheel oscillation.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Renew the faulty seals.
Check the pressure of the tyres.

Check steering knuckles for wear and renew them if necessary. Contact an authorised dealer.
Continued use of the front-wheel drive dur- Avoid using the front-wheel drive when
ing transport by road.
possible.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
Tab. 34
Leakage from the brake bleed valve.
Oil leakage from the pipes.
Brake discs worn.
Air in the system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION

Bleed the system. Contact an authorised
dealer.
Brake piston gaskets defective.
Transmission breather device obstructed. Clean/renew the breather. Contact an authorised dealer.
Leakage in the control system.
Leakage in the pump control system.
10
The brake pedal moves down
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Brake pedal travel too great
PROBLEM
7.8 - BRAKES TROUBLESHOOTING
7-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.9 - LIFT TROUBLESHOOTING
Tab. 35
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
2
3
4
5
The lift does not move when the control le- No oil flow/pressure in the hydraulic circuit.
Incorrect use of the control.
ver is operated
The error code will indicate the origin of the
fault (for versions with an electronic lift).
Lifting height limit control positioned incorrectly.
Fault in the lift position sensor circuit.
The external control of the lift does not External control switch(es) broken (for verwork
sions with an electronic lift).
Control linkage badly adjusted or broken.
The lift fails to rise completely or rises Lifting height limit control positioned incorslowly
rectly.
Excessive load on attachment.
The lift lowers slowly
Down speed control positioned incorrectly.
The lift responds slowly to changes in load Position/draft control set incorrectly.
Lowering speed too slow.
in draft control mode
Implement not adjusted correctly.
The lift response is too sensitive in draft Position/draft control set incorrectly.
control mode
The implement fails to reach the required Lift rods too short.
No implement soil penetration.
working depth
After parking the tractor and stopping the Internal leakage in the circuit.
engine, the lift lowers too quickly
CORRECTIVE ACTION

Review the procedure for using the lift.
Adjust the lifting height limit control.
Adjust the lifting height limit control.
Reduce the load.
Adjust the lowering speed control.
Adjust the position/draft control.
Adjust the lowering speed control.
Adjust the position/draft control.
Adjust the lift rods.
6
7
8
9
10
7-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
Tab. 36
CORRECTIVE ACTION
The error code will indicate the origin of the Contact an authorised dealer.
fault.
Oil level low.
Hydraulic filter clogged.
Clean and if necessary renew the oil
filter(s).
Internal seepage.
Incorrect hydraulic oil level.
Check and adjust the oil level as required.
Hydraulic oil cooler obstructed.
Clean.
Remote control valve activated, not in neu- Check the position of the control levers.
tral position.
Hydraulic load not suited to the tractor.
High-pressure internal blow-by.
10
The hydraulic oil overheats
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The hydraulic system does not work
PROBLEM
7.10 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
7-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.11 - HYDRAULIC REMOTE VALVES TROUBLESHOOTING
Tab. 37
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
2
3
4
The kick out of the remote valve disengag- Pressure of oil delivered to the connected
es too soon
equipment too high.
Block time set wrongly.
Mechanical fault with the remote valve.
The cylinder of the remote controlled im- Incorrect setting of the flow regulator
plement works too slowly
(where applicable).
Hoses connected incorrectly.
The load is greater than the capacity of the
system.
Limited movement of the remote valves
control lever.
Travel of the remote controlled cylinder too Incorrect flow rate.
fast or too slow
Direction of travel of the remote controlled Incorrect hose fittings.
cylinder reversed
The hoses do not match
Incorrect hose male fittings.
The remote valve control lever fails to re- Lever mechanism broken.
lease
CORRECTIVE ACTION

Set the time correctly.
Set the flow regulator.
Connect the hoses correctly.
Reduce the load or use a cylinder of an
adequate size (ask an authorized dealer).
Adjust the tie rods or ask an authorized
dealer.
Adjust the flow rate (if possible).
Reverse the hose fittings.
Renew them with fittings to ISO standards.
5
6
7
8
9
10
7-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.12 - CAB TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to solve problems associated with the tractor cab.
Tab. 38
Low pressure stream

Air conditioner fails to produce cold air
Insufficient refrigerant level.

Condenser obstructed.
Compressor jammed.
Faulty control.
Blown fuse.
Blown fuse.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check the state of the seal.

Change the filter.
Clean or change the filters.
Renew the seal(s).
Inefficient seal around the filter cartridge

(or cartridges).
Filter defective or missing.
Filter(s) clogged.
Seals damaged on the perimeter of the
doors, windows or openable roof.
Excessive air loss.
Fan air stream too weak.
Filter(s) clogged.
Evaporator or heater pack obstructed.
Heating on.
Drive belt slips or is worn or damaged.
Eliminate air leaks.

Clean or change the filters.
Check the heating controls.
Check the state of the belt. Consult an authorized dealer.
Clean the condenser.
Renew the fuse.
Renew the fuse.
10
The heater does not work

Seat suspension does not work
The radio does not work
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Dust gets into the cab
TROUBLE
7-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.23.53
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.13 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
Tab. 39
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
2
3
4
5
6
7
Low start-up speed - the engine is turned Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean and tighten the connections.
over too slowly
loose.
Low battery output.
Wrong engine oil viscosity.
Use oil of the right viscosity for the ambient
temperature.
The starter motor does not work
Battery or starter motor connections cor- Clean and tighten the connections.
roded or loose.
Battery completely flat.
Charge or renew the battery.
Start-up signal switch (or switches) tripped. Run the start-up procedure again. Contact
an authorised dealer.
Blown fuse.
Change the fuse.
Control levers in wrong position
Run the start-up procedure again. Contact
an authorised dealer.
The alternator warning light stays on when Low engine idling speed.
Increase the engine idling speed.
Drive belt broken or slack.
Check/renew the belt.
the engine is running
Alternator operating trouble.
Have the alternator checked by an authorised dealer.
The battery fails to charge
Alternator operating trouble.
Have the alternator checked by an authorised dealer.
Terminals loose or corroded.
Clean and tighten the connections.
Drive belt slack or worn.
Check the belt. Renew the belt if necessary.
Battery operating trouble.
The lighting system does not work, where- Blown fuse.
Change the fuse.
as the rest of the electrical system does
work
The entire electrical system does not work Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean and tighten the connections.
loose.
Battery cut-off switch disconnected.
Reactivate the switch.
Battery sulphated or worn.
Check the level and density of the electrolyte.
Blown fuse.
Change the fuse.
Faulty fan
The fan does not work.
Check all the fan fuses. Contact an authorised dealer.
8
9
10
7-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.23.54
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
Tab. 40
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Wrong quantity of water in the tyres (if Check the level. Contact an authorised
added).
dealer.
Possible tyre ovality
Check the tyre centring. Contact an authorised dealer.
Incorrect weight distribution on the tractor. Check the weight distribution. Contact an
authorised dealer.
10
The tractor swings or jerks
PROBLEM
7.14 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.23.54
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.15 - TRANSMISSION AND HYDRAULIC SHUTTLE ALARMS
WARNING
If an alarm message displays, stop the tractor and contact your dealer or the nearest authorised workshop.
IMPORTANT:
Some of the alarms listed below may not display inasmuch as they are not enabled for your tractors equipment.
The tractor alarms are displayed with:
l
l
l
a letter and a number signalled on the display to the right of the instrument panel
a buzzer
The signalled letter gives an indication of which electronic unit the alarm occurred
in:
Letter indicated on the display (1)

Alarm number (2)
5
Fig. 402
The type of warning light illuminated gives an indication of the severity of

the alarm:
l

IMPORTANT:
Low severity alarms (Low) are not signalled by means of the warning light or the buzzer, instead they are signalled by means of the
letter and number shown on the display.
Fig. 402
The following table lists all the possible alarms signalled by the control units and their respective codes.
Tab. 41
ALARM CODE
9
10
T9
T 10
T 12
T 13
T 15
T 16
T 17
T 47
T 48
T 50
T 51
T 64
T 65
FAULT
Commissioning not completed

Clutches not calibrated
Temperature sensor disconnected or short circuit to 12V
Temperature sensor short circuit to GND
Seat sensor disconnected or short circuit to GND
Seat sensor short circuit to 12V
Seat sensor (signal level invalid)
Wheel speed sensor disconnected
Wheel speed sensor short circuit to 12V
Shuttle output speed sensor disconnected
Shuttle output speed sensor short circuit to GND or 12V
Clutch pedal potentiometer fault
Clutch pedal potentiometer disconnected or short circuit to GND
PRIORITY
High
Low
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
High
7-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.23.54
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
High
High
High
Medium
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
Medium
Medium
PRIORITY
Clutch pedal potentiometer short circuit to +12V

5V sensor power fault
Clutch pedal potentiometer incorrect calibration data
Clutch Comfort button fault
Proportional SV disconnected
Proportional SV short circuit to GND
FORWARD drive SV disconnected
FORWARD drive SV short circuit to GND
REVERSE direction SV disconnected
REVERSE direction SV short circuit to GND
Shuttle lever fault
12V power supply fault
Proportional SV short circuit to +12V
FORWARD drive SV short circuit to +12V
REVERSE direction SV short circuit to +12V
EEPROM checksum error
CAN timeout messages sent by the instrument
CAN or TCU network fault
FAULT
10
T 66
T 67
T 70
T 73
T 76
T 77
T 79
T 80
T 82
T 83
T 85
T 93
T 94
T 95
T 96
T 99
T 101
T 102
ALARM CODE
7-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.23.54
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.16 - INSTRUMENT PANEL ALARMS
WARNING
If an alarm message displays, stop the tractor and contact your dealer or the nearest authorised workshop.
IMPORTANT:
Some of the alarms listed below may not display inasmuch as they are not enabled for your tractors equipment.
The tractor alarms are displayed with:
l
l
l
a letter and a number signalled on the display to the right of the instrument panel
a buzzer
The signalled letter gives an indication of which electronic unit the alarm occurred
in:
Letter indicated on the display (1)

Alarm number (2)
5
Fig. 402
The type of warning light illuminated gives an indication of the severity of

the alarm:
l

IMPORTANT:
Low severity alarms (Low) are not signalled by means of the warning light or the buzzer, instead they are signalled by means of the
letter and number shown on the display.
Fig. 402
The following table lists all the possible alarms signalled by the control units and their respective codes.
Tab. 42
ALARM CODE
9
10
I 18
I 19
I 20
I 21
I 22
I 23
I 24
I 25
I 26
I 32
I 33
I 34
I 35
FAULT
Temperature sensor short circuit to earth

Temperature sensor short circuit to battery
Fuel level sensor short circuit to battery
Frequency sensor 1 not connected
Frequency sensor 2 not connected
Power output 0 not connected
Power output 0 short circuit to earth
Power output 0 short circuit to battery
Power output 0 short circuit to battery or open circuit
Power output 1 not connected
Power output 1 short circuit to battery or open circuit
PRIORITY
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
7-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.23.55
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
FAULT
PRIORITY
Relay shorted (preheating function)

Relay fault
Seat sensor cc GND
Seat sensor cc Vcc
Seat sensor out of range
Medium
Low
Medium
Medium
Medium
10
I 36
I 37
I 38
I 39
I 40
ALARM CODE
7-21
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 21
21/05/2012 13.23.55
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.17 - PTO SELFDIAGNOSIS INDICATOR LIGHT
The indicator light in the control (1) also has the function of flashing diagnostic
codes to identify problems detected with the control.
2
Fig. 403
When the tractor engine is started, the indicator light will flash to show that the control system has been activated.
Tab. 43
CODE (NUMBER OF FLASHES)
DESCRIPTION
2
Solenoid valve disconnected
3
Pushbutton control continuously activated
4*
Speed sensor faulty
5
Solenoid control output signal shorted to earth or in overcurrent
6*
Speed excessive
7
Internal ECU fault in power stage
8
Sensor presence detected in configuration where not required
*: Alarms present in U.S.A. configuration only
If a fault occurs with the control, the electronic control system will inhibit PTO operation.
6
7
8
9
10
7-22
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 22
21/05/2012 13.23.55
1
2
3
4
10
8 - WHEELS
8-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.23.56
WHEELS
8.1 - INTRODUCTION
8.1.1 - General information regarding tyres

Alternative tyres
If the tractor is equipped with alternative tyres, observe the permissible load and speed specifications! For information on alternative
tyres and the relative type approval, load capacity, inflation pressure, track width, etc. always ask your nearest dealer for information,
given the very large number of different tyre types!
CAUTION
Tyre changing operations can be dangerous and must be carried out by specialised personnel using specific equipment in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturers of the tyres and wheels. Mismatched tyres
and wheels can cause damage and may cause the tyre to explode with the consequent risk of serious injury or death.
Never fit or use damaged tyres or rims.
Correct procedure for tyre fitting
Tyres must always be oriented in accordance with the tractors direction of forward
travel; you can change the track width in the case of rims welded to the flange by
shifting the wheel from left to right and vice versa, always ensuring that the V
cleats on the tyre tread point in the direction of forward travel, as shown in the
figure.
Fig. 404
CAUTION
Only allow trained personnel to change tyres. Tyre failure is usually the result of incorrect use, incorrect inflation pressure, overloading or speeds in excess of the maximum permitted speed. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer
and check the inflation pressure frequently.
Do not carry out any welding on the rim or flange without first removing the tyre: the heat could cause the tyre to
explode.
Do not use inflammable materials in repair operations.
Do not carry out any inspections of a tyre or hit a tyre without previously deflating it.
CAUTION
Always check that the tyre is seated correctly on both sides. If not, deflate the tyre completely and lubricate the seat
on the rim, then re-inflate the tyre. Do not increase the pressure to help seat the tyre on the rim. Doing so can be
extremely dangerous, and can lead to serious or even fatal injury.
Adjustment of the steering angle
Check the steering angle each time that the front wheels are changed.
Proceed as follows:
l
l
l

Immobilise the tractor using the wheel chock.
Raise the front of the tractor.
Turn the steering wheel full lock to the left and subsequently to the right or
vice versa and pivot the axle to its position of maximum oscillation.
10
Fig. 405
8-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.23.56
When the front axle is in the condition of maximum oscillation and the wheels are turned to the maximum steering angle, there must
be no interference between the fenders and engine hood.
If necessary, adjust the steering angle using adjusting bolts (1).
WHEELS
Inflation pressure
Keep the tyres at the right pressure. Inflation pressure must be calculated and adjusted in relation to the load supported by the tyres and the operating conditions (consult tyre manufacturer load-pressure scales).
DANGER
CAUTION
Never inflate tyres above the pressure of 2.5 bar.

CAUTION
When carrying out any operations on the tyres, always stand clear of the area in which the rim and flange could be propelled in the event of explosion. Always use metal safety cages or tyre retainers on the rims and flange when inflating
tyres; under some circumstances the trajectory of the rim and flange in case of explosion could change unexpectedly,
with SERIOUS DANGER OF INJURY AND DEATH.
Radial tyre inflation pressure
For the tyre bead to seat correctly on the rim, the inflation pressure must never exceed 2 bar (29 psi) If the tyre is not
seated correctly on the rim, deflate it and repeat the operation. Higher inflation pressures may cause the tyre/rim to
explode. We recommend using all the appropriate safety devices when inflating tyres.
CAUTION
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
When working on agricultural land in conditions requiring maximum grip, the rear tyre inflation pressure may be reduced. Check the manufacturers minimum specified pressure before partially deflating the tyres.
A tire inflated to less than 80% of the recommended inflation pressure can be damaged internally during use and
explode on inflation to the optimal pressure WITH DANGER OF SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
Tyres for non-driving front wheels: 2.3 bar;
Tyres for driving front wheels: 1.4 bar;

Rear tyres: 1.6 bar.
Conventional tyre inflation pressure
Tyres for non-driving front wheels: 3.0 bar;
16 to 30 tyres: 2.0 bar;
32 to 48 tyres: 2.2 bar.

IMPORTANT
If the tractor is fitted with this sort of tyres, the pressure must be checked and restored more frequently than indicated
in the service table.
8.1.2 - Punctures
This tractor may be equipped with two different types of tyres:
Radial tyres (identifiable by the letter R in the tyre reference marking). These tyres may be of the tubeless type (marked
Tubeless).
All conventional tyres have an inner tube.
If the tyre has become partially deflated stop the tractor immediately unless you are driving on an urban road, in which case stop at
the earliest opportunity in a lay-by before taking action to repair the tyre.
10
8-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.23.56
WHEELS
DANGER
Do not attempt to continue driving on a fully deflated tyre. This action will damage the tyre irreparably and can result
in loss of control of the tractor.
The final decision of whether a tyre can be repaired or should be changed must be taken by a suitably trained tyre specialist.
IMPORTANT:
All tyre repair operations must be carried out at specialised workshops and by qualified personnel.
Ensure all the necessary tools are available before removing the tractor wheel; follow the instructions below for safe ope
ration:
l
l
l
Park the tractor on stable and level ground in a traffic free area and then chock the wheels and engage the parking brake.
Position a jack under the tractor, inserting a sturdy wooden block between the jack and the ground.
Operate the jack and raise the tractor enough to relieve most of the load from the wheel to be removed, fully unscrew the studs
and remove the wheel.
IMPORTANT:
Never leave the tractor unattended with the wheel removed. Do not allow unauthorised persons to approach the tractor.
8.1.3 - Wheel nut/bolt tightening torques
To safeguard the vehicle, its operator and passenger, as well as other vehicles, it is essential to ensure that the wheel discs are
correctly fixed to the wheel hubs .
IMPORTANT:
After the first 10 operating hours, retighten all the wheel nuts and bolts. Every 50 operating hours all the wheel bolts
and nuts must be tightened again to the specified torque.
After adjusting the track width or changing the wheels, tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified tightening torques.
Tab. 44
DESCRIPTION
Screw M 14x1.5
Screw M 16x1.5
Screw M 16x1.5
Screw M 18x1.5
Screw M 20x1.5
Nut M 14x1.5
Nut M 18x1.5
Nut M 20x1.5
Nut M 22x1.5
CLASS
8.8
8.8
10.9
10.9
10.9
8
10
10
10
TIGHTENING TORQUES
120 Nm (12.2 kgm)

184.5 Nm (18.8 kgm)
271 Nm (27.6 kgm)
395 Nm (40.3 kgm)
550 Nm (56 kgm)
120 Nm (12.2 kgm)
395 Nm (40.3 Kgm)
550 Nm (56 kgm)
745 Nm (76 kgm)
TOLERANCE
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
8
9
10
8-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.23.56
WHEELS
8.2 - TYRE COMBINATIONS
8.2.1 - Permissible tyre combinations
These tractors can be fitted with the following transmission ratios for 4WD:
l
1.3170 for 90 hp 40 km/h tractors

1.3133 for 105 hp 40 km/h tractors
IMPORTANT:
On urban roads, a tractor may not be wider than X + 800 by law. (dimension X defines the separation of the tractors
sidelights).
Use only the permitted tyre combinations compatible with the transmission ratio between front and rear wheels. Use
of unauthorised tyre combinations can lead to rapid tyre wear. Overloads caused by incorrect tyre combinations may
also damage the axles and transmission.
CAUTION
For 4-wheel drive tractors
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1630
1602
1640
1602
1630
1602
1728
1602
1630
1584
1728
1650
1728
1702
1630
1684
1630
1602
1728
1644
1630
1602
1630
1602
1728
1702
1728
1702
1630
1594
1734
1694
1730
1644
1798
1800
1630
1702
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1970
2065
2015
2105
2038
2065
2167
2105
1937
1957
2231
2228
2167
2205
1937
2057
2038
2065
2231
2222
2003
2106
2005
2144
2191
2206
2231
2244
2003
2057
2133
2197
2193
2222
2376
2421
1970
2165
WIDTH (1) MM
320/85R24
420/85R30
360/70R24
480/70R30
380/85R24
420/85R34
420/70R24
480/70R34
280/85R28
340/85R38
480/65R24
540/65R34
420/70R24
480/70R34
280/85R28
340/85R38
380/85R24
420/85R34
480/65R24
540/65R34
340/85R28
460/85R34
360/70R28
520/70R34
420/85R24
460/85R34
480/70R24
520/70R34
340/85R28
420/85R38
380/70R28
480/70R38
440/65R28
540/65R38
540/65R24
600/65R34
320/85R24
420/85R30
STANDARD
TRACK WIDTH
MM
105
90
FRONT
REAR
10
ID
Tab. 45
For each market, only the homologated tyre combinations specific to the region are available.
8-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.23.57
WHEELS
(1) - Width here refers to the value calculated with the standard track width.
The value may vary according to the make of tyre and the inflation pressure.
Id: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.

Tab. 46
FRONT
REAR
90
11.00-16
420/85R34
11.00-16
340/85R38
11.00-16
480/70R34
11.00-16
340/85R38
11.00-16
420/85R34
11.00-16
460/85R34
11.00-16
380/85R38
11.00-16
480/70R34
11.00-16
420/85R38
ID
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
105
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
STANDARD
TRACK WIDTH
MM
1611
1602
1611
1584
1611
1602
1611
1684
1611
1602
1611
1702
1611
1684
1611
1702
1611
1594
WIDTH (1) MM
1954
2065
1954
1957
1954
2105
1954
2057
1954
2065
1954
2206
1954
2092
1954
2205
1954
2057
8.2.2 - Calculation of the mechanical lead
To ensure that the tractor offers the best possible performance, especially in field work, the front wheels perform a small additional
rotation with respect to the rear wheels; this function is defined MECHANICAL LEAD (A) and it is measured as a percentage value
between the speed of the front tyres compared to that of the rear tyres.
For correct measurement of mechanical lead, it is essential to consider:

l
l
the mechanical ratio (RM) of the tractor in question

the rolling circumferences of the front and rear tyres (refer to the tyre manufacturers catalogue)
All combinations of tyres present on SDFG tractors are checked and validated. The recommended mechanical lead value is between
+0.5% and +5.0%.
An incorrect lead value can result in:

l
l
l
l
difficult engagement and disengagement of 4WD

uneven and rapid wear of the front tyres when lead is > 5.0%
uneven and rapid wear of the rear tyres when lead is < 0%
transmission fatigue
Calculation of the mechanical lead

If different tyres are fitted in terms of brand and/or dimensions, the lead value must be checked.
The rolling circumference may be:
l
l
Declared by the manufacturer

Not declared by the manufacturer
9
10
8-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.23.57
WHEELS
Rolling circumference declared by the tyres manufacturer.
For the mechanical lead calculation use the formula shown alongside.
RP = tyres ratio
Rc(ant) = rolling circumference of the tyre on the front axle
Rc(post) = rolling circumference of the tyre on the rear axle
RM=mechanical ratio between front and rear axles
A% = percent lead (calculated)
l
l
l
l
Fig. 406
Rolling circumference not declared by the tyres manufacturer.

IMPORTANT
After calculating the rolling circumference values, use the above formula to calculate the mechanical lead.
The rolling circumference can be measured in the field as follows:

disengage four-wheel drive (independent rotation of front and rear wheels);
mark the side of the tyres in correspondence with the centre of the footprint area;
mark the ground in correspondence with the reference marks made on the tyres;
move the tractor forward for at least 5 revolutions of the front and rear wheels;
now mark the references on the ground at the end of the established number of wheel revolutions;
measure the distance travelled by the front and rear wheels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Calculation of Rc (ant) = distance travelled by front wheels / N of revolutions = a / 5
Calculation of Rc (post) = distance travelled by rear wheels / N of revolutions = a / 5
Fig. 407
Distance a after 5 revolutions of the front wheels

Distance p after 5 revolutions of the rear wheels
Forward travel of at least 5 revolutions
1.
2.
3.
Field measurement of the mechanical ratio

engage four wheel drive
mark the side of the tyres in correspondence with the centre of the footprint area
move the tractor forward for at least 5 revolutions of the rear wheels
calculate the corresponding number of complete revolutions + the fraction of a revolution of the front tyres (count, in the
direction of travel, the number of tread cleats included between the cleat at the centre of the footprint area and the cleat corresponding to the mark made at the start of the measurement, and divide the result by the total number of cleats)
Calculation of RM=(N front wheel revolutions + Fraction of revolution) / N rear wheel revolutions
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
The measurement is performed as indicated below:
8-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.23.57
WHEELS
1
2
Fig. 408
1.
2.
3.
4.
Initial reference to count number of revolutions travelled by rear tyres

Reference for calculation of fraction of revolution
Distance corresponding to 5 revolutions of the rear wheels
Forward travel of at least 5 rear wheel revolutions
WARNING
SDFG always advises users to check the effective rolling circumference of the tyres in the field in order to obtain the
most accurate possible values for use in the calculation.
WARNING
SDFG declines all liability relating to anomalous tyre wear or damage to the transmission caused by the use of tyre
combinations that are not expressly authorised.
8.2.3 - Tyre load capacities
The maximum load capacities for each tyre are indicated in the following table.
Tab. 47
ID
FRONT
REAR
320/85R24
420/85R30
360/70R24
480/70R30
380/85R24
420/85R34
420/70R24
480/70R34
280/85R28
340/85R38
480/65R24
540/65R34
420/70R24
480/70R34
280/85R28
340/85R38
380/85R24
420/85R34
480/65R24
540/65R34
340/85R28
460/85R34
360/70R28
520/70R34
420/85R24
460/85R34
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
10
12
13
MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY KG
3000
5000
3000
5150
3900
3500
3800
5450
2640
4120
3500
5000
3800
5450
2640
4120
3900
5300
3500
5000
3500
6150
3300
6300
4600
6150
8-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.23.57
WHEELS
15
16
17
18
19
4720
6300
3500
5600
3500
5800
3200
5300
4360
5800
3000
5000
Id: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tyre combinations prescribed for these tractors.
480/70R24
520/70R34
340/85R28
420/85R38
380/70R28
480/70R38
440/65R28
540/65R38
540/65R24
600/65R34
320/85R24
420/85R30
14
FRONT
REAR
ID
Tab. 48
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2112
5300
2112
4120
2112
5450
2112
4120
2112
5600
2112
6150
2112
4120
2112
5450
2112
5600
11.00-16
420/85R34
11.00-16
340/85R38
11.00-16
480/70R34
11.00-16
340/85R38
11.00-16
420/85R34
11.00-16
460/85R34
11.00-16
380/85R38
11.00-16
480/70R34
11.00-16
420/85R38
FRONT
REAR
ID
10
Id: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tyre combinations prescribed for these tractors.
8-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.23.57
WHEELS
8.3 - TRACK WIDTH CALCULATION
8.3.1 - Minimum track width

Rear track width
Depending on the width of the tyres, it may not be possible to use all the track width settings listed here as the tyre may foul the
fender. Choose a track width setting that ensures sufficient clearance between the fender and the tyre.
Front track width
When the minimum front track width setting is used and the tractor is fitted with wide tyres, the steering angle will be very limited.
Check that the clearance between the engine hood and the fenders is sufficient. For this purpose, first lift the tractor then raise and
lower the front wheel at full lock using the hub adjustment facility; rock the axle and make sure there is no sign of interference.
Front axle width (without wheels)

l
for 2WD tractors: 1505 mm

for 4WD tractors: 1770 mm
4
Fig. 409
Rear axle width (without wheels)

l
l
The width of the rear axle is 1640 mm (90 hp)

The width of the rear axle is 1740 mm (105 hp)
6
7
Fig. 410
8.3.2 - Track width adjustment

Changing the track width
The track width can be adjusted to adapt the tractor for work in different crop row spacings or with different implements, e.g. plough,
etc.
The tractor is available with either fixed rim wheels or adjustable track wheels. Depending on the type of tyres installed you
can choose from 8 available track width combinations.
The distance from the outer edge of the area illuminated by the direction indicators, outline marker lights, the rear sidelights and
upper reflectors to the outer edge of the tyres must not exceed 400 mm; this regulation is internationally applicable.
The data contained in the vehicle registration document regarding the maximum track widths for use on both urban and rural public
roads must be respected.
WARNING
After adjusting the track width or changing the wheels, tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified tightening torques.
10
Every 50 hours of work all the bolts and nuts fixing the front and rear wheels must be tightened again to the prescribed torque values.
Before changing the wheels, immobilise the tractor so that it cannot move and use suitable supports.
8-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.23.57
When working with compressed air to bed in the tyre on the rim always use an extension line of sufficient length to allow you to remain
at the side of the tyre. This operation should be carried out by specially trained personnel only.
CAUTION
WHEELS
When changing wheels or carrying out maintenance and repair operations, raise and support the tractor using specific
equipment only.
Variable track wheels

This type of adjustment is possible only when fitting wheels whose disc is screwed onto the rim.
Lug
Rim
Lug width
Disc
Fig. 411
1.
2.
3.
4.
During fitting, the lug can be mounted in contact with wheel (4) on either side, thus making it possible to achieve two alternative track
widths.
Two more track widths can be achieved by inverting rim (2) with respect to disc (1).
Support lug (1) on rim (2) is welded in an offset position with respect to the centreline of the drop centre (and hence also with respect
to the tyre).
If you then fit the assembled rim onto the hub (or rear half shaft) with the bell facing inwards or outwards you can achieve 8 different
configurations for the distance between the centreline of the wheel and the contact surface of the rim on the wheel hub or half shaft
flange. There are therefore 8 possible track widths.
Disc-rim assembly diagram for front wheels
This means that there are 4 possible ways in which rim (2) can be assembled on disc (4).
Fig. 412
Disc-rim assembly diagram for rear wheels
The figure shows the 8 different ways of fitting the disc to the rim to obtain 8 different front track widths.
10
The figure shows the 8 different ways of fitting the disc to the rim to obtain 8 different rear track widths.
8-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.23.58
WHEELS
1
2
3
Fig. 413
CAUTION
When it is necessary to extend the track width, avoid overloading the tractor.
Calculation of track widths obtainable with adjustable rims
Tab. 49
COMBINATION 1
TRACK
1
WIDTH
320/85R24 420/85R30 All measurements are given in mm
FRONT 320/85R24
3
4
REAR 420/85R30
6
7
1630
-
1836
1698
1934
1800
2002
FRONT 360/70R24
3
4
REAR 480/70R30
6
7
1640
-
1826
1698
1924
1800
2002
FRONT 380/85R24
3
4
REAR 420/85R34
6
7
1630
-
1836
1702
1934
1802
2002
FRONT 420/70R24
3
4
REAR 480/70R34
6
7
1836
1702
1934
1802
2002
FRONT 280/85R28
3
4
REAR 340/85R38
6
7
1630
-
1828
1718
1932
1816
2000
1728
1602
2030
1900
Tab. 50
COMBINATION 2
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1738
1602
2040
1900
Tab. 51
COMBINATION 3
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1728
1602
2030
1902
Tab. 52
COMBINATION 4
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1728
1602
2030
1902
Tab. 53
COMBINATION 5
TRACK
1
WIDTH
10
1734
1584
2030
1902
8-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.23.58
WHEELS
2
FRONT 480/65R24
3
4
REAR 540/65R34
6
7
1836
1650
1854
2054
FRONT 420/70R24
3
4
REAR 480/70R34
6
7
1836
1802
1934
1902
2128
2102
FRONT 280/85R28
3
4
REAR 340/85R38
6
7
1630
-
1828
1818
1932
1916
2134
2100
FRONT 380/85R24
3
4
REAR 420/85R34
6
7
1630
1602
1836
1802
1934
1902
2128
2102
FRONT 480/65R24
3
4
REAR 540/65R34
6
7
1836
1840
1934
2044
2128
2064
FRONT 340/85R28
3
4
REAR 460/85R34
6
7
1630
1602
1828
1802
1932
1902
2134
2102
FRONT 360/70R28
3
4
REAR 520/70R34
6
7
1630
1602
1828
1802
1932
1902
2134
2102
FRONT 420/85R24
3
4
REAR 460/85R34
6
7
1836
1802
1934
1902
2128
2102
1728
-
2030
1850
1728
1702
2030
2002
COMBINATION 7
TRACK
1
WIDTH
Tab. 55
Tab. 56
COMBINATION 8
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1734
1684
2030
2002
COMBINATION 6
TRACK
1
WIDTH
Tab. 54
COMBINATION 9
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1728
1702
2030
2002
Tab. 57
480/65R24 540/65R34 1644

All measurements are given in mm
1728
1664
2030
1860
COMBINATION 11
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1734
1702
2030
2002
Tab. 59
Tab. 60
COMBINATION 12
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1734
1702
2030
2002
COMBINATION 10
TRACK
1
WIDTH
Tab. 58
COMBINATION 13
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1728
1702
2030
2002
10
Tab. 61
8-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.23.58
WHEELS
Tab. 62
COMBINATION 14
TRACK
1
WIDTH
2
3
REAR 520/70R34
6
7
1836
1802
1934
1902
2128
2102
FRONT 340/85R28
3
4
REAR 420/85R38
6
7
1630
1492
1828
1828
1932
2030
2134
2130
FRONT 380/70R28
3
4
REAR 480/70R38
6
7
1828
1828
1932
2030
2134
2130
FRONT 440/65R28
3
4
REAR 540/65R38
6
7
1832
1878
1930
2080
2130
-
FRONT 540/65R24
3
4
REAR 600/65R34
6
7
1766
1800
1864
2004
2104
FRONT 320/85R24
3
4
REAR 420/85R30
6
7
1630
-
1836
1798
1934
1900
2128
2102
1728
1702
2030
2002
Tab. 63
COMBINATION 15
TRACK
1
WIDTH
340/85R28 420/85R38 1594

All measurements are given in mm
1734
1694
2030
1928
Tab. 64
COMBINATION 16
TRACK
1
WIDTH
FRONT 480/70R24
3
4
1734
1694
2030
1928
Tab. 65
COMBINATION 17
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1730
1644
2032
-
Tab. 66
COMBINATION 18
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1798
-
2100
1900
Tab. 67
COMBINATION 19
TRACK
1
WIDTH
1728
1702
2030
2000
IMPORTANT:
If the tractor is equipped with a hybrid air braking system, the change in track width must be made so that there is a
gap of at least 3 cm on each side between the braking system air tanks and the inside of the wheel rim.
9
10
8-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.23.59
WHEELS
Front track width adjustment for 2-wheel drive tractors
The track width can be changed by moving the wheel hub onwards or outwards.
IMPORTANT:
Both wheels must be adjusted equally to maintain the balance of

the tractor.
To adjust, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
withdraw the retaining pin that secures the hub to the axle;
adjust the track to the desired width;
refit the locking pin.
The figure shows the change in track width for each single hole.
Fig. 414
8.3.3 - Adjustment of the front fenders (2WD)
Adjust the fender on the basis of track width setting, so that the fender is positioned centrally over the tyre.
The front edge of the fender must be vertical over the centre of the tyre.
The fender has the following adjustments:
l
height adjustment;
Fender cover adjustment.
IMPORTANT:
After adjusting the fenders, check that there is no interference between the fenders and the tractor side panels in all
conditions of axle oscillation
Fender height adjustment
Loosen fixing screw (1) to release bracket (2).

Adjust the bracket height.
Retighten the fixing screws.
Fig. 415
Fender cover adjustment
Loosen fixing nut (1) to release the fender cover (2).

Adjust the cover position.
Retighten the fixing nut.
10
Fig. 416
8-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.24.01
WHEELS
8.3.4 - Adjustment of the front fenders
Adjust the fender in accordance with the track width setting, so that the fender is positioned centrally over the tyre.
The distance between fender and tyre must be approximately 60 mm.
The front edge of the fender must be vertical over the centre of the tyre.
This tractor can be equipped with front fenders in the following three sizes:
l
l
l
l
355 mm wide
410 mm wide
470 mm wide
520 mm wide
The fender has the following adjustments:

l
l
height adjustment;
fender cover adjustment.
CAUTION:
After adjusting the fenders, check that there is no interference between the fenders and the tractor side panels in all
conditions of axle oscillation
Fender height adjustment

Loosen fixing screw (1) to release bracket (2).
Adjust the bracket height.
Re-tighten the fixing screw.
5
6
Fig. 417
Fender cover adjustment
Loosen retaining nut (1) to release fender cover (2).

Adjust position of cover.
Re-tighten the retaining nut.
8
Fig. 418
9
10
8-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.24.02
WHEELS
8.4 - BALLASTING
8.4.1 - Handling ballast weights

DANGER
In compliance with the requirements of statutory legislation, the load that can be lifted by a person is 30 kg for men and 20 kg for
women.
We recommend using all the appropriate safety devices when handling the ballast weights.
The tractor can be equipped with different types of ballast:

l
l
l
l
Cast iron suitcase blocks;

Cast iron blocks fixed with screws;
Intermediate plates;
Monolithic blocks;
Metal discs for wheels;
Fitting methods for the various types of ballast weights.
Cast iron suitcase blocks
This type of ballast can be installed by one operator. To install the ballasts, place them on the front support.
DANGER
Cast iron blocks fixed with screws

This type of ballast must be installed by at least two operators, one lifting and keeping the blocks in position, the other fixing the
blocks with the screws.
Check the weight of each block. If the weight exceeds the maximum load to be lifted (30 kg for men and 20 kg for
women) use suitable mechanical lifting devices.
Intermediate plates
DANGER
Intermediate plates must be installed by at least two operators, one lifting and keeping the plate in position, the other fixing the plate
with the screws.
Check the weight of the intermediate plates. If the weight exceeds the maximum load to be lifted (30 kg for men and
20 kg for women) use suitable mechanical lifting devices.
DANGER
Monolithic blocks
The installation of the single block must be carried out by at least two operators, proceeding as shown below:
l
l
l
lower the front lift arms;

drive the tractor slowly forward to the block;
raise the lift arms slowly until the hooks engage the lateral fixing pins;
connect the top link to the monolithic block upper pin.
IMPORTANT:
10
To remove the block, perform the above procedure in reverse order.
8-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.24.03
WHEELS
Metal discs for wheels
Metal discs must be installed by at least two operators, one lifting and keeping the discs in position, the other fixing the discs with
the screws.
DANGER
8.4.2 - Ballast for tractor

Front ballast
CAUTION
An unbalanced tractor can overturn and cause injury and death. Make sure that the front ballast support, the ballast
weights, and the weights and the ballast on the wheels all comply with the specifications o f the manufacturer. DO
NOT add ballast to compensate for an overloaded tractor; reduce the load instead. Always keep all parts of your body
within the confines of the driving position when operating the tractor.
The front ballast can be supplied on request in 2 different versions:
l
ballast support with cast-iron blocks

400 kg single piece ballast block (only for tractors with front lift).
Rear ballast
The rear ballast can be supplied on request:
l
One-piece ballast weight
Ballast for wheels

The ballast for wheels can be of 2 different types:
l
l
metal discs
introduction of water into the tyres
8.4.3 - Front ballast with cast-iron blocks
This type of ballast is composed of a ballast support with the possibility of hooking on cast-iron blocks. The blocks can vary from two
to eight as required.
Each block of cast iron weights 40 kg, so there can be a maximum load of 320 kg.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Front ballast
Ballast support
Ballast pack tie rod
Ballast locking pin
Ballast hooking pin
Support hooking pin
8
Fig. 419
8.4.4 - Front one-piece ballast block
IMPORTANT
During tractor operation, it is recommended that the ballast weight be set at the highest position (hydraulic cylinders
fully retracted) so as to maintain the centre of gravity of the tractor unchanged and ensure optimum grip of the wheels
on the ground.
10
8-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.24.03
WHEELS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
This type of ballast is composed of a 400 kg one-piece block that must be fitted to
the
front
3-point
hitch.
One-piece ballast weight

Hitching point to the 3rd point of the front lift
Safety pin
Hitching point to the arms of the front lift
Emergency tow pin
Fig. 420
8.4.5 - Ballast for wheels with metal discs
This type of ballast is available with two different types of weight:

l
l
40 kg (each) for a total of 80kg

43 kg (each) for a total of 83kg
IMPORTANT:
Always fit ballast of the same weight on the rear wheels.
This ballast comprises metal discs that can be fitted on the rear rims.
l
l
for 30 wheels
for 34 wheels
for 38 wheels
The metal discs are available for the following tyre sizes only:
Fig. 421
8.4.6 - Ballast for wheels with water-filled tyres
This type of ballast consists of introducing water into the tyres.

IMPORTANT
The amount of liquid in the tyre must not exceed 75% of the total tyre volume.
To prevent the water from freezing and damaging the tyres, use additives to obtain a neutralised solution of calcium chloride.
To prepare the solution, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
fill a container with the quantity of water that you wish to introduce into the tyres;
slowly pour in calcium chloride (approx. 30 kg to every 100 litres of water), stirring continuously;
after filling the tyres, wash all the equipment used with plenty of clean water.
IMPORTANT
Do not pour water into concentrated calcium chloride as this may cause a violent chemical reaction.
When ballasting the tractor, load the front axle so as to ensure safe steering (the load on the front axle must not be
less than 20% of the tractor weight)
10
WARNING
8-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.24.03
WHEELS
CAUTION
Remember that steering, braking and performance in general will be greatly influenced by any implements/trailers
attached or ballast applied to the tractor.
IMPORTANT
The antifreeze solution cannot be used at temperatures below -20C.
2
Fill the tyres with the solution by means of the specific adaptor for water injection
and extraction.
3
4
Fig. 422
Filling the tyres with water.

To introduce water into the tyre, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
1.
2.
Raise the tractor from the ground.

Turn the wheel to bring the valve to the highest position.
Unscrew the inner part of the valve.
Fit the special adaptor for adding water ballast to the valve.
Connect the water hose and fill until the water starts to come out of the
breather at the bottom of the valve.
Remove the adapter and screw in the inner part of the valve.
Fill the tyre with air to the specified pressure.
AIR
WATER
Fig. 423
WARNING
While mixing the antifreeze solution and filling the tyres with liquid ballast, it is essential to wear safety goggles and
protective clothing. Pour the calcium chloride into the water and not vice versa.
Draining water from the tyre

To drain water from the tyre, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
1.
2.
Raise the tractor from the ground.

Turn the wheel to bring the valve to the lowest position.
Unscrew the inner part of the valve and allow the water drain out.
Screw the special adaptor into the valve.
Inflate the tyre.
The pressure will force all remaining water out through the breather.
Unscrew the special adapter and screw in the inner part of the valve.
Fill the tyre with air to the specified pressure.
AIR
WATER
Fig. 424
10
8-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.24.04
1
2
3
4
5
10
9-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.24.04
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.1 - BATTERY
9.1.1 - Battery
The battery is of the Low Maintenance type and therefore, under normal conditions of use, the electrolyte does not need topping
up. Periodic checks are anyhow necessary to see that the level of electrolyte is between the MIN and MAX reference marks on the
battery.
At the start of the winter season, check the battery charge level. Re-charge if necessary.
CAUTION
The terminals and some components of the battery contain lead or lead compounds. In some countries the legislation
considers these substances as a cause of cancer, birth defects and damage to the reproductive system. Wash your
hands after handling the battery.
Accessing the battery

Position of the battery on the tractor:
l
l
Under the driving platform for tractors equipped with front lift and front PTO
Front compartment, in front of the cooling radiators for tractors not equipped with front lift and front PTO
To access the battery positioned under the driving platform, proceed as follows:
l
l
remove the knobs (1)

slide off cover (2)
5
Fig. 425
To access the battery positioned in the front engine compartment, proceed

as follows:
l
Open the engine hood by pressing the button (1)
7
Fig. 426
The battery (1) is located in the front engine support.
9
10
Fig. 427
9-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.24.05
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CAUTION
Only use 12 volt chargers to charge the battery.
Removing and refitting the battery

CAUTION
Wear safety goggles when charging or topping up the battery.
Always disconnect the battery before carrying out any work on the electrical system. Always disconnect the battery
and all the electronic control units before carrying out any welding on the tractor or any of the equipment connected
to the tractor.
WARNING
The gases given off by the battery are highly explosive. Never cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery.
Batteries must be stored and charged in a well-ventilated environment. Take care that the acid electrolyte does not
come into contact with your skin or clothes.
To remove the battery, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
first, disconnect the earth lead from the negative terminal;

disconnect the positive lead from the positive terminal;
loosen the 4 screws fixing the 2 brackets securing the battery;
remove the battery from the support.
To refit the battery, proceed as follows:

l
l
l
l
DANGER
secure the battery to the support;

tighten the 4 screws fixing the 2 brackets to secure the battery;
connect the positive lead to the positive terminal;
connect the earth lead to the negative terminal.
Battery disconnect switch

The function of the battery disconnect switch is to disconnect the power supply to the electrical system by interrupting
the connection to the battery, with the following advantages for the safety and operation of the vehicle:
l
l
protects the electrical system against short circuit;

reduces battery self-discharge during extended periods of non-use of the tractor;
enables maintenance and repair work to be carried out in conditions of safety.
Turn the knob to OFF to disconnect the battery and back to ON to resume normal operation.
Battery located under the driving platform.
The battery disconnect knob (1) is located on the bulkhead to the right of
the battery.
10
Fig. 428
9-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.24.05
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery located in front compartment
The battery disconnect knob (1) is located on a bracket to the right of the
battery.
2
Fig. 429
Putting the battery disconnect in safety condition
The battery disconnect knob may be removed for safety purposes in the manner described below.
Removal of the knob
l
l
l
Turn the knob to the OFF position; the knob cannot be removed in this position.
Press the knob in and continue to turn it counter-clockwise as far as it will go.
Remove the knob.
Refitting the knob

l
l
Refit the knob

Press and turn the knob clockwise, positioning it at 45.
5
6
7
8
9
10
9-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.24.06
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.2 - CAB FUSE BOX
9.2.1 - Cab fuse box
Fig. 430
To access the fuse box, remove the cover on the left side of the instrument panel.
Always switch off the power before checking the fuse box or relays. If necessary,
refer to the wiring diagram located on the inside of the fuse box cover.
Before changing a blown fuse:

l
l
switch off the power

eliminate the fault that caused the fuse to blow
replace the blown fuse.
Fuse box diagram

PK2
PK1
START
+15
FAN SPEED
COMPRESSOR
5
MU6
M20
RELAY
7.5A
COMPRESSOR
1
M1
10 A
STOLL
SOCKET
+15
+15
+15
+15
+15
+15
+15
7.5A
7.5 A
10A
3A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
+30
3A
+30
20 A
+30
15 A
+30
USA
15 A
+15
15 A
+30 hlhp
STOP(EU)
Engine
ECU
MK7
M11
MK4
+15
FAN SPEED
FT5.6.7.8
MK6
F11-12-13
+15 ROOF
30A
30A FT 5-6-7-8
+15
HI/LO
F14-15
2
Under engine ECU cover
+15
MK3 MF3
20 A
FAN SPEED
COMPRESSOR
MU4
20 A
POWER
SOCKET +15
(LIFT)
+30
5A
+30
7.5A
15 A
15 A
(plat)
15 A
M10
MK1
30A
30A
MU3
DISTR.7/8
5A (NO LIFT)
RELAY
MK1
+15
STOP 7.5 A
(lift)
RELAY
MK3
MU6
30A
MF1
MU1
MF5
MF4
40A START
40A FT1-2-3
Fig. 431 - Fuse box diagram

1.
2.
Fuses area
Relay area
Cab fuse box

The tractor with cab is also equipped with a fuse box which protects the cab electrical system.
The fuse box is located at the top left-hand side of the cab, near to the work light
controls and front/rear wiper controls.
10
Fig. 432
9-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.24.07
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The fuse box is located at the top right-hand side of the cab, near the ventilation
controls.
l
1
2
Fig. 433
Fuses and relays on the tractor

The tractor is equipped with other fuses located near the battery.
Only for tractors equipped with battery in the front compartment
1.
2.
Fuse
Relay
4
5
Fig. 434
Only for tractors equipped with battery under the operator platform
1.
2.
Fuse
Relay
6
7
Fig. 435
9.2.2 - Key to fuse and relay symbols
Key to main fuse box and fuse symbols
Air conditioning compressor (M1)
Engine control unit (direct) (M2)

Engine
ECU
+30
3A
10
9-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.24.07
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Hazard lights (direct) (M3)
Brake lights (Europe version) - Trailer brake lights (North America version) (direct) (M5)
Instrument panel (direct) (M6)
Seat compressor \ cigar lighter (direct) (M4)
Hydraulic shuttle (direct) (M7)
Low beam headlights (M8)
High beam headlights (M9)
+30 hlhp
HLHP control unit (Lift) \ Flashing beacon for platform tractors (M10)
(LIFT)
(plat)
15 A
10
Indicator lights (key-on) (M11)
9-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.24.08
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Socket (key-on) (M12)
1
Front loader (key-on) (M13)
2
3
Work lights on cab (key on) (B2)
Low worklights (key-on) (M15)
Relay (key-on) (M16)
Instrument panel (key-on) (M17)
7
Engine ECU (key-on) (M18)
8
RH sidelights (M19)
9
LH sidelights (M20)
10
9-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.24.08
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
MK3 relay (MU1)
Spool valves 7/8 (MU2)
Socket (MU3)
Trailer brake lights (Lift) (key-on) (M2)
STOP
(lift)
+15
7.5 A
Steering column switch - lights input (MU5)
Ventilation/Heating (key-on) (MU6)
MK1 relay (MF1)
Protection fuse FT 5-6-7-8 (MF2)
10
Fan/Compressor fuse (MF3)
9-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.24.09
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Starting (MF4)
1
Protection fuse (MF5)
2
3
Key to cab fuse box and fuse symbols

Key: (only for tractors with standard cab roof)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rotating beacon
Radio
Air conditioning system
Ventilation/Heating system
Windscreen wiper
Rear window wiper
Front work lights
Rear work lights
Fig. 436
Key: (only for tractors equipped with high-visibility cab roof)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rotating beacon
Radio
Ventilation/Heating system
Windscreen wiper
Rear window wiper
Front work lights
Rear work lights
Fig. 437
Key to relay symbols

Starting (PK1)
8
Fan/Compressor (key-on) (PK2)
9
10
9-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.24.09
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Control relay for key-on fuses F14-15 (MK1)
Hi-Lo relay (MK2)
Control relay for key-on fuses F11-12-13 (MK3)
Control relay for key-on fuses F5-6-7-8 (MK4)
Relay - Pre-heating (MK5)
Fan relay (MK6)
Trailer relay (under engine control unit cover) (MK7)
Colour of fuse box wires

V - green
S - pink
A - light blue
G - yellow
Z - purple
R - red
B - white
H - grey
10
M - brown
N - black
C - orange
L - blue
Tab. 68
9-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.24.09
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.3 - LIGHTS FOR ROAD USE
9.3.1 - Lights for road use

IMPORTANT:
Clean the exterior of the lights with water or a specific commercial product.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.
The tractor is equipped with the following lights for road use:
l
l
l
l
2 front lights (low beam headlights) on the front grille

2 front lights (high beam headlights) on the front grille
2 light clusters composed of sidelights and direction indicators at the sides
2 light clusters at the rear above the fenders
WARNING
When driving at night on public roads with a front-mounted implement, the headlights will not give sufficient illumination (as they will be partially obscured by the implement) and it is therefore necessary to use the auxiliary driving lights.
Note:
Switch off the front and rear lights before cleaning them.
5
Headlights
The headlights for road use are equipped with bulbs type HB3 12V 60W, to provide
both
width
and
depth
of
field.
1.
2.
Low beam headlights

High beam headlights
7
Fig. 438
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
9
10
9-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.24.10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
open the hood;

unplug the connector;
twist bulbholder (1) anticlockwise to release it from its seat;
fit the new bulb;
fit bulbholder (1) and twist it clockwise to lock;
refit the connector;
close the hood;
Fig. 439
IMPORTANT
Sidelights and side direction indicators
sidelight (1) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-R5W 12V 5W

direction indicator (2) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-P21 12V 21W
The sidelights and direction indicators are comprised of two separate

bulbs housed in a single unit, with one unit located on each side of the
tractor:
Fig. 440
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
l
l
using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) fixing the transparent yellow-white lens (2);
remove the lens carefully without forcing to access the bulbs;
gently push down on the bulb (3) to be changed and rotate it anti-clockwise
to remove it;
carefully push in the new bulb and rotate it clockwise until it locks into place;
refit the lens and secure it with the two screws.
Fig. 441
IMPORTANT
10
9-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.24.11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Rear lights
The rear lights are composed of three separate bulbs enclosed in a single
container on each fender of the tractor:
l
l
sidelight (1) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-R5W 12V 5W

brake light (2) indicating the tractor braking (STOP) equipped with bulb type
DIN 72601-P21 12V 21W
direction indicator (3) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-P21 12V 21W
2
Fig. 442
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:

l
l
l
5
l
l
using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) securing the
transparent yellow-red lens (2);
remove the lens carefully without forcing to access the bulbs;
gently push down on the bulb (3) to be changed and rotate it anti-clockwise
to remove it;
carefully push in the new bulb and rotate it clockwise until it locks into place;
refit the lens and secure it with the two screws.
Fig. 443
9.3.2 - Headlight alignment

WARNING
The figure is applicable to countries in which vehicles circulate on the right of the road, in the case of countries with
left-hand traffic circulation the dark area on the wall must be symmetrical to the situation shown in the figure (i.e. the
points of the dark area entering the light area must always be facing the kerb).
To adjust the headlight aim, the tractor, in normal road transport condition, with the tyres inflated to the recommended pressures and
the front wheels in the straight-ahead position, must be parked on level ground at a distance of 10 m from a vertical wall with the low
beam headlights switched on.
8
9
10
9-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.24.11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Fig. 444 - Diagram showing headlight alignment for driving on public roads
l
l
l
l
1 - points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights

A - distance between headlights
H - height of headlights
h - distance from beam centre with respect to horizontal axis
x - distance from headlights to wall
Turn the adjuster screws indicated by the arrows in the figure to move the beam in a vertical or horizontal direction.
In order to determine the points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights, bring the tractor up to the
wall with the dipped headlights on, mark the centres (1) on the wall and then reverse to a distance of 10 m from the
wall.
WARNING
Headlight horizontal adjustment

With the headlights switched on, the centres of the beams should be apart the distance A indicated in the figure.
Headlight vertical adjustment

With the headlights on, the lines delimiting the light and dark zones on the wall should be 10 cm apart as shown in the figure by (h).
9.3.3 - Road lights - North America version

IMPORTANT:
Clean the exterior of the lights with water or specific commercial products.
IMPORTANT
10
The tractor is equipped with the following lights for road use:
9-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.24.12
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
l
l
l
l
2 front lights (low beam headlights) on the front grille

2 front lights (low beam headlights) on the front grille (these are integrated with the low beam lights on some models);
2 light clusters composed of direction indicators at the sides
2 light clusters at the rear above the fenders
WARNING
When driving at night on public roads with a front-mounted implement, the headlights will not give sufficient illumination (as they will be partially obscured by the implement) and it is therefore necessary to use the auxiliary driving lights.
Note:
IMPORTANT
To change the headlight bulbs refer to the chapter Road lights.
Side direction indicators
The direction indicators are composed of a bulb enclosed in a housing on

each side of the tractor:
l
DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W bulb
5
6
Fig. 445
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
7
l
using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) securing orange lens (2);
gently remove the transparent plate to access the bulbs;
lightly press down on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn
it anti-clockwise as far as it will go;
fit the new bulb by inserting it fully in with light pressure and turning it clockwise until it stops;
fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.
Fig. 446
IMPORTANT
10
9-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.24.12
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Rear lights
braking light (2) indicating tractor braking equipped with bulb type DIN
72601-P25-2 12V 21W
direction indicator (1) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W
reflector
The rear lights are composed of two light clusters located on both fenders
of the tractor:
Fig. 447
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws (1) securing lens (2);
remove the lens carefully, without forcing, to access the bulb;
lightly press down on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn
it anti-clockwise as far as it will go;
fit the new bulb by inserting it fully in with light pressure and turning it clockwise until it stops;
fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.
10
Fig. 448
9-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.24.12
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.4 - WORK LIGHTS
9.4.1 - Work lights for tractors with platform

IMPORTANT
The tractor is equipped with the following work lights:

l
l
2 work lights on the roll bar

2 work lights on the front grille (corner light)
WARNING
Always use the appropriate safety lights when travelling on the public highway. Apply reflective tape and reflectors to
the tractor as required.
CAUTION
It is not permitted to use the worklights when driving the tractor on public roads.
Work lights on the roll bar

The work lights on the roll bar are equipped with lamp bulbs type DIN 72601-H3
12V 55W.
5
6
Fig. 449
Note:
7
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
8
9
10
9-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.24.13
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
l
l
l
l
l
carefully clean the outside of the light unit to avoid the risk of dirt getting on
the reflector during bulb replacement;
using a screwdriver, unscrew the two lateral screws (1) of protective cap
(2) to reach the bulb;
withdraw bulb connector (3);
slightly rotate the spring clip (4) that holds the bulb (5) in its seat and detach
it from the reflector; also disconnect the wire connected directly to the bulb;
remove the old the bulb and insert the new one, aligning the locating pins
with the notches in the reflector crown (6); connect the wire to the bulb;
turn spring clip (4) to lock it;
fit connector (3) onto the bulb terminals;
refit the protective cap and secure it with the two screws.
Fig. 450
IMPORTANT
Work lights on the front grille (corner lights)

The work lights on the front panel are equipped with bulbs type ECE 37 HB3 12V
55W.
1.
Fig. 451
Bulb replacement
Work lights
IMPORTANT:
l
l
l
l
l
open the hood;

fit the new bulb;
close the hood.
10
Fig. 451
9-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.24.14
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.4.2 - Work lights for tractors with cab
IMPORTANT
The tractor is equipped with the following work lights:
l
l
l
l
2 front work lights at the sides of the tractor (optional only for cab equipped with high-visibility roof)
2 front work lights at the top of the cab
2 rear work lights at the top of the cab
2 work lights on the front grille (corner lights)
Work lights at the sides of the cab
Optional only for tractors equipped with high-visibility cab roof
The work lights at the sides of the tractor are equipped with lamp bulbs type DIN
72601-H3 12V 55W.
4
5
Fig. 452
Front work lights at the top of the cab

The work lights at the sides of the tractor are equipped with lamp bulbs type DIN 72601-H3 12V 55W.
Only for tractors equipped with standard cab roof
6
7
Fig. 453
Only for tractors equipped with high-visibility cab roof
9
10
Fig. 454
9-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.24.14
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Rear work lights at the top of the cab
The work lights at the sides of the tractor are equipped with lamp bulbs type DIN 72601-H3 12V 55W.
Fig. 455
Only for tractors equipped with standard cab roof
Only for tractors equipped with high-visibility cab roof
Fig. 456
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
This procedure for changing the bulbs applies to the following work lights:
l
l
work lights at the sides of the tractor

front work lights at the top of the cab
rear work lights at the top of the cab
l
l
l
l
l
carefully clean the outside of the light unit to avoid the risk of dirt getting on
the reflector during bulb replacement;
using a screwdriver, unscrew the two lateral screws (1) of protective cap
(2) to reach the bulb;
withdraw bulb connector (3);
slightly rotate the spring clip (4) that holds the bulb (5) in its seat and detach
it from the reflector; also disconnect the wire connected directly to the bulb;
remove the old the bulb and insert the new one, aligning the locating pins
with the notches in the reflector crown (6); connect the wire to the bulb;
turn spring clip (3) to lock it;
fit connector (1) onto the bulb terminals;
refit the protective cap and secure it with the two screws.
Fig. 456
10
IMPORTANT
9-21
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 21
21/05/2012 13.24.15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Work lights on the front grille (corner lights)
The work lights on the front panel are equipped with bulbs type ECE 37 HB3 12V
55W.
1.
Work lights
2
Fig. 456
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:

l
l
l
l
l
l
l
open the hood;

fit the new bulb;
close the hood;
Fig. 456
9.4.3 - Interior courtesy light
The tractor with standard roof is equipped with a cab interior light on the front right of the roof lining.
The tractor with high visibility roof is equipped with cab interior light on the right side of the roof lining; there is also a second light on
the right side for illumination of the controls on the console to the right of the operator.
Interior courtesy light

Interior courtesy light (cab with standard roof)
8
9
Fig. 457
10
9-22
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 22
21/05/2012 13.24.15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Interior courtesy light (cab with high visibility roof)
Fig. 458
1.
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
For tractors equipped with cab with a high-visibility roof, the procedure is the same as the one described for
tractors equipped with cab with a standard roof
Remove the body of light fitting (1) by pulling it outwards.
2.
Fig. 459
Change bulb (2). The courtesy lights are equipped with 12V 5W bulbs
3.
Fig. 460
Reposition the light fitting in its seating.
10
4.
9-23
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 23
21/05/2012 13.24.16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Controls illumination light
Controls illumination light to RH side of operator seat

1.
2.
Illumination light
Control switch
2
Fig. 461
Replacing the controls illumination light on the instrument panel to the right of the operator
IMPORTANT:
The courtesy light is equipped with a bulb type 12V R 10W

l
l
l
Using a screwdriver, prise out the entire interior light assembly from its seat
in the cab roof.
Change the bulb.
Refit the interior light assembly in the cab roof.
Fig. 462
7
8
9
10
9-24
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 24
21/05/2012 13.24.16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.5 - ACCESSORIES
9.5.1 - Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment
In the case of installation of additional electrical or electronic components that are connected to the tractors electrical system, the
user is responsible for checking that the installation does not release emissions which interfere with the operation of the existing
electronic or other components of the tractor.
This is particularly a problem with the following types of equipment:
l
l
Radio
CB radio receiver
Mobile telephone (ETACS, GSM, etc.)
In particular, it is important to check that any supplementary electrical or electronic devices installed comply with the current directives
75/322 MOD 2001/3 and that they bear the CE marking.
The tractor is equipped with electronic parts and components whose functioning may be disturbed by electromagnetic emissions from
other equipment. These emissions may put people in danger if the following safety guidelines are not followed.
l
l
Install only equipment licensed in conformance with the applicable regulations in your country (e.g: the BZT licence in Germany).
Ensure that the device/s are firmly fixed.
The use of portable or mobile equipment inside the vehicle is permitted only if it is connected to an antenna firmly secured to
the outside of the vehicle.
Radio transmission components must be installed separately from the vehicles electronic components.
The antenna must be fitted in a professional manner and there must be a good connection between the antenna and the vehicle
earthing point. The wiring, the installation and the maximum current draw must conform to the applicable requirements.
9.5.2 - Power outlet sockets
As regards the installation of additional mobile telecommunications systems (e.g.: radio, telephone), the following sup
plementary indications must be observed:
Trailer power outlet socket
The trailer power outlet consists of a 7-pin socket located at the rear of the tractor.
LH direction indicator
Not utilised
Earth
RH direction indicator
RH tail light and number plate light
Brake light
LH tail light
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Explanations of each pin are given below:
Fig. 463
Diagnostics socket
Accessed via the cover located under the right-hand side of the instrument panel.
To
open
the
cover
remove
the
retaining
screws.
Diagnostics socket
Fig. 464
10
1.
9-25
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 25
21/05/2012 13.24.17
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
2-pin socket for rotating beacon (version with safety roll bar) and 2-pin current socket
Located
1.
2.
at
the
rear
right-hand
side
of
the
drivers
seat.
3-pin socket - This outlet socket can be used to connect external implements.
2-pin socket - This outlet socket can be used to connect hand-held lamps,
etc..
2
Fig. 465
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
9-26
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 26
21/05/2012 13.24.17
1
2
3
4
10
10 - TECHNICAL DATA
10-1
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.24.17
TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fig. 466
The data given in the declaration of conformity are listed below:
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer
Type of tractor
Tractor model
10-2
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.24.17
TECHNICAL DATA
Fig. 467
Manufacturer
Type of tractor
Tractor model
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
The data given in the declaration of conformity are listed below:
10-3
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.24.17
TECHNICAL DATA
10.2 - TECHNICAL DATA OF THE TRACTOR
10.2.1 - Technical data

X - Standard O - Optional
2
3
4
5
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
1000.4 WTI EC 3A
4/4000
1000.4 WTI EC 3A
4/4000
1000.4 WTI EC 3A
4/4000
1000.4 WTI EC 3A
4/4000
X
65 / 88
X
75 / 102
X
65 / 88
X
75 / 102
345 / 35,19
1600
376 / 38,35
1600
345 / 35,19
1600
376 / 38,35
1600
28
700-750
2300
21
700-750
2300
28
700-750
2300
21
700-750
2300
2410-2430
2410-2430
2410-2430
2410-2430
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
4
X
6
X
01 - ENGINE
Engine model
Cylinders/Cylinder capacity
n/cc
Aspiration Turbo Intercooler
Max. homologated power
kW/hp
Maximum torque Nm/kgm
Maximum torque speed
(rpm)
Torque increase
Minimum speed rpm
Maximum power engine
speed
Maximum speed in rpm
(nominal)
Electronic engine regulator
Liquid cooled
Oil cooler
Fuel radiator
Air cleaner
Air cleaner with dust ejector
Underhood silencer with
vertical exhaust pipe
02 - CLUTCH
6
7
Hydrostatically operated
clutch
Electro-hydraulically controlled clutch
Diameter in inches
No. of plates
Sintered material
8
9
10
12
1
X
13
1
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
124,5
X
1 3/8
6 / 21
2083
124,5
X
1 3/8
6 / 21
2077
124,5
X
1 3/8
6 / 21
2083
124,5
X
1 3/8
6 / 21
2077
03 - TRANSMISSION
5 speed gearbox
3 Ranges
Creeper gears
Synchronized shuttle
Electro-hydraulically controlled shuttle
Forced lubrication
Oil cooler
Electrohydraulic 2 speed
gearbox
04 - REAR PTO
Oil-immersed multi-plate
clutch with electro-hydraulic
control
Disc diameter in mm.
Graphite material
Shaft diameter
PTO shaft splines
PTO 540 Engine rpm:
10-4
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.24.18
TECHNICAL DATA
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
1633
1654
1633
1654
2286
1792
2250
1783
2286
1792
2250
1783
23,7054
31,0259
23,7054
31,0259
3,8571
3,8462
3,8571
3,8462
3,0234
3,0625
3,0234
3,0625
2,2857
2,2500
2,2857
2,2500
1,7917
1,7826
1,7917
1,7826
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
124,5
X
1 3/8
21
2278
2,2778
124,5
X
1 3/8
21
2278
2,2778
124,5
X
1 3/8
21
2278
2,2778
124,5
X
1 3/8
21
2278
2,2778
1,3170
1,3133
1,3170
1,3133
65
65
65
65
50
55
50
55
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
224
282
224
282
224
282
224
282
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
Hydrostatic, with telescopic O

steering column for steering
wheel height adjustment
2
3
540 ECO PTO - Engine

rpm:
1000 PTO Engine rpm:
PTO 1000 ECO Engine
rpm:
Groundspeed PTO revs/
metre travel (tyres)
Engine revs/PTO revs ratio
540
540ECO
Engine revs/1000 PTO revs
ratio
Engine revs/1000 ECO
PTO revs ratio
Control on fender
Front PTO
Oil-immersed multi-plate
clutch with electro-hydraulic
control
Disc diameter in mm.
Graphite material
Shaft diameter
PTO shaft splines
1000 PTO Engine rpm:
1000
05 - FRONT PTO
Electrohydraulically operated front and rear differential lock

Transmission ratio: front
wheel revs. per rear wheel
rev.
Steering angle / 2WD steering radius
Steering angle / 4WD steering radius
Fixed front fenders
Steering front fenders
06 - FRONT AXLE
Integral braking on all four

wheels (4WD)
Oil-immersed disc brakes
front and rear (4WD)
Diameter of front discs mm
Diameter of rear discs in
mm
Parking brake
Hydraulic trailer braking
valve
07 - BRAKES
10
08 - STEERING
09 - REAR HYDRAULIC LIFT
10-5
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.24.18
TECHNICAL DATA
1
2
Mechanically controlled
rear lift
Electrohydraulically controlled rear lift
Right hand lifting rod and
mechanical top link
Hydraulic right-hand lift rod
and top link
Auto hitch link arms
Fender controls
Maximum lifting capacity Kg
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
4200
X
O
X
X
4800
X
X
4200
X
X
4800
1850
X
1850
X
1850
X
56
56
56
4/6/8
4/6
4/6/8
185
185
185
12
12/100/650
12/180/800
12
12/100/650
12/180/800
12
12/100/650
12/180/800
12
12/100/650
12/180/800
14/95
12/3
X
X
14/95
12/3
X
X
14/95
12/3
X
X
14/95
12/3
X
X
150
150
150
150
O
O
X
O
2
O
O
X
O
2
O
O
X
O
2
X
X
O
2
10 - FRONT LIFT
Mechanical front lift with

X
folding link arms
Maximum lifting capacity Kg 1850
Quick couplers
X
11 SPOOL VALVES
Pump output at max. power 56

engine rpm l/min
Auxiliary spool valves - max 4/6
n ports
Operating pressure [Bar]
185
5
6
Voltage [V]
Battery, standard [V/Ah/A]
Battery for cold climates [V/
Ah/A]
Alternator [V/Ah]
Starter motor [V/kW]
Auxiliary power socket
Electrical socket amperage
supp.
13 - FUEL TANK
Tank capacity litres
14 - CAB / ROPS
Platform with ROPS frame

Monocoque cab
Ventilation and heating
Air conditioning
Hazardous substances
protection category CAB
8
9
10
10-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.24.18
TECHNICAL DATA
10.2.2 - Fuel technical characteristics
The engines used in tractors of the SDF Group are designed to run on fuel with a minimum cetane number of 45 .
The engines are approved for use with the following fuels:
l
A - European Diesel Fuel for Vehicles: EN 590 (Ann. 1)

B - U.S. Diesel Fuel for Off-Road Applications: ASTM D 975 Grade No 1-D (Ann. 2).
Using fuels with a cetane number lower than the minimum indicated number may lead to starting difficulties and noticeable emission
of white smoke, especially at low temperatures.
Diesel fuels are approved and can be used according to the following specifications:
Tab. 70
FUELS
EN 590
Annex 1
ASTM Designation: D 975 Grade-No 1-D and Grade Low Sulphur No. 1-D / Annex 2
2-D
Fuels with high sulphur content

If the recommended sulphur content value is exceeded, the time intervals for changing the oil, indicated in the maintenance tables,
must be halved.
Winter operation with diesel fuel
Addition of kerosene to diesel fuel

Special demands are made on the cold behaviour (temperature limit value of the
filterability) of fuels for winter operation. Suitable fuels are available at filling stations during the corresponding seasons. If only summer diesel fuel is available,
kerosene (paraffin oil) may be mixed into the diesel fuel up to 30% as shown in the
diagram, to ensure the flow capability.
Use only commercially available fuel with a sulphur content less than 0.5%.
Fig. 468
For fuel available on the U.S. market in compliance with ASTM D 975 1-D/2-D, kerosene may not be mixed.
Mixing takes place in the fuel tank: first fill with the appropriate amount of paraffin, then add the diesel fuel.
Mixing of normal petrol is not permissible for safety and technical reasons (cavitation on the injection system). Diesel fuels up to -44
C are available for an Arctic climate. It is possible to add flow improvers to the diesel fuel. The choice of a suitable additive and the
necessary dosing and mixing procedure should take place in agreement with the fuel supplier.
A 1-1 Mixing of kerosene with Summer diesel fuel
The use of fuel additives is not permitted. The flow improvers mentioned above are an exception. Use of unsuitable additives will
result in loss of warranty.
Fuel additives
Ann. 1: Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) according to EN 590:2004
Tab. 71
Density at 15 C
kg/m3
Aromatic hydrocarbons
Sulphur content
weight %
mg/kg
Flashpoint
LIMIT VALUES EN
590:2004
AT LEAST 51
AT LEAST 46
820 - 845
TEST METHOD
EN ISO 5165:1998
EN ISO 4264:1996
CETANE NUMBER
CETANE INDEX
UNITS
EN ISO 3675:1998 EN ISO

12185:1996/C1:2001
max. 11
EN 12916:2000
350 (until 31.12.2004) or EN ISO 20846 EN ISO 20847 EN ISO
50.00
20884
EN ISO 20846/EN ISO 20884
at least 55
EN ISO 2719:2002
10
PROPERTIES
10-7
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 7
21/05/2012 13.24.18
TECHNICAL DATA
PROPERTIES
UNITS
CETANE NUMBER
CETANE INDEX
2
3
4
Coke residue (from 10% distillation

residue)
Ash content
Water content
Total residue
Corrosion effect on copper (3 hours at
50 C)
Oxidation stability
Lubricity wear scar diameter (wsd
1.4) at 60 C
Viscosity at 40C
Distillation
compensated at 250 C
compensated at 350 C
95 vol. % compensated by
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester content
(FAME)
Limit of filterability (CFPP) *
15.04. to 30.09.
01.10. up to 15.11.
16.11. to 28.02.
01.03. to 14.04.
LIMIT VALUES EN
590:2004
AT LEAST 51
AT LEAST 46
TEST METHOD
weight %
mg/kg
mg/kg
Degree of corrosion
max. 0.01
max. 200
max. 24
Class 1
EN ISO 6245:2002
EN ISO 12937:2000
EN 12662:1998
EN ISO 2160:1998
g/m3
m
max. 25
max. 460
EN ISO 12205:1996
EN ISO 12156-1:2000
mm2/s
2.00 - 4.50
Volume %
Volume %
% C
Volume %
max. 65
at least 85
360
5
EN ISO 3104:1996
EN ISO 3405:2000
C
C
C
C
max. 0
max. -10
max. -20
max. -10
weight %
max. 0.30
EN ISO 5165:1998
EN ISO 4264:1996
EN ISO 10370:1995
EN 14078:2003
EN 116:1997
* data applies to the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may differ.
** Specifications also applicable to NATO fuel F-54
Ann. 2: Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) according to ASTM D 975

Tab. 72
UNITS.
Density at 15 C
Flashpoint
Water and sediments
Distillation range at 90% volume
kg/m3
C
vol. %
C
C
mm2/s
weight %
PROPERTIES
7
8
Viscosity at 40C
Ash
Sulphur
Grade No. 1/2-D
Low sulphur grade No. 1/2-D
Copper corrosion
Cetane number
Coke residue according to Rams
bottom from 10% distillate residue
Limit of filterability
LIMIT
TEST METHOD
GRADE NO. 1-D LOW GRADE NO. 2-D LOW
SULPHUR GRADE NO. SULPHUR GRADE NO.
1-D
1-D
max. 860*
at least 38
max. 0.05
max. 288
1.3 - 2.4
max. 0.01
max. 860*
at least 52
max. 0.05
at least 282
max. 338
1.9 - 4.1
max. 0.01
weight %
max. 0.50
max. 0.05
No 3
at least 40
0.15
max. 0.50
max. 0.05
No 3
at least 40
0.35
**
weight %
Degree of corrosion
ASTM D 93
ASTM D 2709
ASTM D 86
ASTM D 44
ASTM D 482
ASTM D 129
ASTM D 2622
ASTM D 130
ASTM D 613
ASTM D 524
max. 338
diesel fuel according to ASTM Designation D 975-02
* Minimum SDFG requirement

** Varies according to season and region.
10
10-8
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 8
21/05/2012 13.24.18
TECHNICAL DATA
DEUTZ engines for this series of tractors are designed to use not only EN 590 fossil fuels, but also biodiesel, commercially available
in Europe and compliant with the FAME - EN 14214 standard, up to 100% (denominated B100).
10.2.3 - Biofuels - technical characteristics
They may run on biodiesel fuel in accordance with the specifications listed below.
Only biodiesel fuels according to EN 14214 (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) are permitted.
Tab. 73
TECHNICAL DATA
Biodiesel Fuel according to EN 14214
Annex 3
The use of US biodiesel (ASTM D6751 B100 compliant), which is based on soy oil methylester, is only permissible in EN 590
diesel fuel mixtures with a biodiesel content of a max. 20% of weight.
Biodiesel is subject to contamination and degradation by bacteria, hence it must not be left stagnant in the fuel tank for more
than 4-6 weeks, otherwise the engine should be started and stopped with normal diesel. Do not use biodiesel if the tractor is
to be used only for short periods during the year.
FUEL
1.
Biodiesel, due to its chemical and physical characteristics, has a lower calorific power than normal diesel, and thus results in
lower engine performance; in the case of the B100 mixture this reduction in performance is of the order of 6-8%.
The lubricant to be used is the same as for normal fuel (see specifications in this user and maintenance handbook, at the
start of the maintenance section). The changeover period must be halved, however (250 hours of runtime rather than 500).
The fuel filter should be changed 30-50 operating hours after switching from normal diesel to BIODIESEL.
Pure vegetable oils (e.g. rapeseed oil) which are not transesterified must not be used The use of these oils will invalidate the
warranty.
2.
3.
4.
WARNING
A microbial contamination may occur in supply tanks in the case of contamination of the stored fuel by water. Water contamination is
usually caused by condensation of water in the air.
Biological contamination in the supply tanks
Supply tanks should have water traps so that the penetrated water can easily be removed. In addition, the tanks should be installed
so that not too great temperature differences occur during the day, to minimise condensation processes.
Direct exposure to sunlight should be avoided because too high fuel temperatures favour the growth of microbes. Small supply tanks
with correspondingly low dwell times of the stored fuel are to be preferred to large tanks.
Water is very weakly fuel soluble so that the penetrated water collects at the bottom of the tank. The bacteria and fungi grow in the
watery phase at the phase boundary to the fuel phase from which they draw their nutrition.
Engine fuel filters block relatively quickly when using microbially contaminated fuel; this results in degraded performance.
Ask the fuel supplier to recommend suitable specialist companies. The decision whether to use biocides (such as GrotaMar 71,
Schlke & Mayr GmbH, Norderstedt) after cleaning to kill off the rest of the bacteria should be left up to the specialist company.
When the fuel in the supply tank has become microbially contaminated, the tank must be cleaned by specialist companies.
The engine owner is strongly recommended not to use biocides because of their toxicity. Use of biocides without cleaning the tank is
useless because the bacteria which lead to filter blockage are not removed.
l
Too high a water content leads to corrosion and in connection with corrosion products and sediments to sludge. This leads to
malfunctions in the fuel and injection system.
Water
Sediments / soiling
Solid sediments (dust, rust, scale) cause wear in the injection system and combustion chamber as well as valve leaks.
Cetane number / Cetane index

The cetane number specifies the ignition willingness of the fuel. Too low a cetane number may cause starting difficulties, white
smoke, increase hydrocarbon emission and thermal and mechanical overloading of the engine. The cetane number is determined on a test engine. The cetane index can be used as a substitute calculated value from density and distillation behavior
and correlates well with the cetane number as a rule.
Heating value
l
The lower heating value (Hu) indicates the amount of heat released when burning 1 kg of fuel.
10
10-9
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 9
21/05/2012 13.24.18
TECHNICAL DATA
Ann. 3 : Fuel specification (minimum requirements) Fatty Acid Methyl Ester (FAME) for diesel engines
in accordance with EN 14214
Tab. 74
PROPERTIES
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
LIMIT VALUES EN
14214:2003
Viscosity at 40 C
Flashpoint
Sulphur content
mm2/s
C
mg/kg
3,5 - 5,0
at least 120
max. 10.0
Coke residue (from 10% distillation

residue)
Cetane number
Ash content (sulfate ash)
Water content
Overall soiling
Corrosion effect on copper (3 h at 50
C)
Oxidation stability
Acid number
Iod number
Content of linolenic acid-methylester
Content of fatty acid-methylester with
4 double bonds
Methanol content
Monoglyceride content
Diglyceride content
Triglyceride content
Content of free glycerine
Content of total glycerine
Content of alkaline metals (Na+K)
Content of alkaline earth metals
Phosphor content
Limit of filterability (CFPP) *
15.04. up to 30.09.
weight %
max. 0.30
EN 14103
EN ISO 3675 1998 EN ISO
12185:1996/C1:2001
EN ISO 3104:1998/C2:1999
prEN ISO 3679:2002
prEN ISO 20846:2002 prEN ISO
20884:2002
EN ISO 10370:1995
weight %
mg/kg
mg/kg
Degree of corrosion
at least 51
max. 0.02
max. 500
max. 24
Class 1
EN ISO 51165:1998
ISO 3987:1994
EN ISO 12937:2000
EN ISO 12662:1998
EN ISO 2160:1998
Hours
mg KOH/g
G Iod/100g
weight %
weight %
at least 6
mg/kg. 0.5
max. 120
max. 12.0
max. 1
EN 14112
EN 14104
EN 14111
EN 14103
weight %
weight %
weight %
weight %
weight %
weight %
mg/kg
mg/kg
mg/kg
max. 0.20
max. 0.80
max. 0.20
max. 0.20
max. 0.020
max. 0.25
max. 5.0
max. 5.0
max. 10.0
max. 0
EN 14110
EN 14105
EN 14105
EN 14105
EN 14105 EN 14106
EN 14105
EN 14108 EN 14109
EN 14108:2002
EN 14107
EN 116:1997
Ester content
Density at 15 C
weight %
kg/m3
at least 96.5
860 - 900
TEST METHOD
2
3
4
5
6
* Data applies to the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may differ.
10.2.4 - Coolant
Protective fluid and antifreeze

Use an appropriate type of coolant to avoid damage to the engine.
The antifreeze indicated in the lubricants table is a mono-ethylene glycol based fluid. Aqueous solutions of this fluid act both as an
antifreeze and refrigerant, and also inhibit corrosion of the metal parts of the engine cooling system. The antifreeze fluid does not
contain nitrites, amines or phosphates (NAP free).
The cooling system must be checked periodically.
Characteristics and performance
l
9
l
10
Corrosion protection
m Reduces premature damage and consequent need for replacement of cooling-system components. Maintains the efficiency of the cooling system by guarding against the formation of deposits and encrustation.
Optimises heat transfer
m Reduces the time taken for the engine to warm up thereby improving power and efficiency
Lowers the freezing point
m Prevents expensive repairs caused by the breakage of cooling system parts.
Raises the boiling point
m Reduces the risk of overheating in harsh conditions.
10-10
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 10
21/05/2012 13.24.19
NAP free
m Very low environmental impact. Advanced corrosion inhibitor technology for effective protection of engine components.
Hard water stability
m Maintains optimal characteristics even when diluted with tap water.
Formulated for extended life
m Allows longer intervals between coolant changes
Specifications
TECHNICAL DATA
This liquid coolant meets the most recent international standards:
Tab. 75
BS 6580 (1992)
AFNORNFR 15-601 (1991)
ASTM D 3306
It is approved by or meets the specifications of the major manufacturers:
Tab. 76
meets H-LV 0161 0188BS 6580 (1992)
324 NF
325.0 ; DBL 7700.00
meets TB 1451
meets 1286083
TK-BA2-3-6850-008
KHD
MAN
Mercedes Benz
Scania
Volvo
Deutsche Bundeswehr
Typical chemical and physical characteristics
Tab. 77
CONCENTRATED LIQUID
Appearance
Colour
Density at 20C ASTM D 1122
Kinematic viscosity at 20 C DIN 51 562
Refractive index at 20 C DIN 51 423
Boiling point ASTM D 1120
pH ASTM D 1287
Reserve alkalinity - HCI N/10 ASTM D 1121
Ash content ASTM D 1119
Water content DIN 51 777
Miscibility with water
Miscilibility with hard water
Miscibility with other antifreezes
Freeze point ASTM D 1177
Clear liquid
Blue/green
1.120 - 1.124 g/cm3
24-28 mm2/s
TK-BA2-3-6850-008
>165 C
7.1 - 7.3
13 - 15 ml
max. 1.5%
max. 3.5%
Totally miscible
No precipitation
Miscible with other commercially available products
-40 C (50% in water)
Setting point DIN 51 583
The level of frost protection is obtained by calculating the arithmetic mean between the freezing point and the setting point.
Foaming tendency ASTM D 1881
max 50 ml / 1 - 3 s
Rubber swelling 80 C / 168 h - SBR and EPDM (50% in water) 0 - 3% result similar to that obtained with pure water
Typical chemical and physical characteristics of aqueous mixtures of the liquid coolant
Water characteristics must be as indicated in the following table.
Tab. 78
1
1
2
1
RESULTING DILUTION
FROST PROTECTION VISCOSITY AT 0C

(C)
MM2/S
VISCOSITY AT 80C
MM2/S
33% in water
33% in water
-20.5
-41.5
0.5 - 0.8
0.9 - 1.1
3.0 - 5.0
7.0 - 10.0
10
PARTS CONCENPARTS WATER (BY

TRATED LIQUID (BY VOLUME)
VOLUME)
10-11
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 11
21/05/2012 13.24.19
TECHNICAL DATA
Concentration of liquid antifreeze on handover to the customer
On handover, the tractors cooling system is filled with liquid coolant comprised of 45% antifreeze and 55% water. This concentration
provides protection at temperatures down to - 35 C.
The percentage of antifreeze in the coolant must be as specified for the various temperatures.
IMPORTANT
For temperatures below -35 C please consult an authorised service centre.
2
Safety information
The concentrated fluid contains inhibited mono-ethylene glycol and is classified as harmful if ingested. It is not classified
as inflammable but may burn if ignited. The concentrated antifreeze fluid contains 25 ppm by weight of an agent that confers a bitter taste as
a deterrent against accidental ingestion. This agent is only effective in the concentrated product. In the diluted form it is necessary to
add 25-30 ppm by weight to obtain the same effects.
10.2.5 - Noise levels
The tractor is approved in accordance with the applicable EC Directives.

To avoid increased noise levels proceed as follows:
l
l
l
after maintenance operations or repairs refit all the sound-deadening panels and materials correctly;
do not make changes to the tractor that may lead to an increase in noise emissions;
beware of any anomalous noise or vibration; if you notice anomalous noise or vibration, park the tractor in a safe position and
perform the stopping procedure. Inform maintenance personnel of the situation. Avoid prolonged operation.
Reference standards for the measurement of noise levels:

l
5
l
the maximum operator-perceived noise level, with the engine at normal operating temperature and measured in accordance
with the test method described in the European Directive 2009/76 EC (40 km/h);
the maximum noise level measured with the tractor in motion and the tractor stationary, measured in accordance with the
method described in European Directive 2009/63 EC, Annex VI (40 km/h).
The measured noise levels are given in the following table:

EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
85
85
85
85
85,5
85
85,5
85
78,3
77,8
78,3
77,8
81
81
81
81
81
80
81
80
NOISE LEVELS
7
8
9
Maximum noise level with

ROLL BAR db(A):
Maximum noise level in
CAB with doors open (roof
hatch and front and rears
window open) db(A):
Maximum noise level in
CAB with doors closed
db(A):
Maximum external noise
level with tractor moving,
db(A)
Maximum external noise
level with tractor stationary,
db(A)
The values declared by the manufacturer.

The manufacturer cannot influence noise emissions of the tractor in different working conditions.
CAUTION
10
If the noise level during continuous tractor operation is equal to or greater than limit set by the applicable regulations,
the user must take appropriate precautions (hearing defenders, ear plugs, helmet, etc.).
10-12
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 12
21/05/2012 13.24.19
TECHNICAL DATA
The value is referred to the amount of mechanical vibration transmitted by the tractor to the WHOLE-BODY as defined by UNI ISO
2631-1:2008.
10.2.6 - Vibration referred to the operator position
Said value must be utilised for assessment of the vibration exposure risk, but it cannot cover all the possible conditions of use of the
tractor since it may vary in accordance with parameters that are not always related to the tractor (terrain, implements, etc.). If the risk
assessment cannot be considered to be exhaustive or if the risk may exceed the values defined in 2002/44/EC, the use of a vibration
meter is prescribed.
In order to minimise the vibration transmitted to the whole-body the following best practice rules should be observed:
l
l
l
l
l
use the most suitable implement for the tractor and the task in hand;
adjust the seat to suit your weight and stature;
periodically check the condition of the cab suspensions and renew them if damaged;
check tyre inflation pressure;
use front axle suspensions, if fitted;
during transfers, adjust tractor speed in order to minimise the vibration level.
The seat vibration values, as obtained from the seat approval in compliance with 78/764/EEC (amended by 1999/57/EC) are shown
in the following table.
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
55 (1,13) / 98 (1,00)
55 (1,13) / 98 (1,00)
55 (1,13) / 98 (1,00)
55 (1,21) / 98 (1,05)
55 (1,21) / 98 (1,05)
55 (1,21) / 98 (1,05)
10
Grammer MSG 83/721 seat 55 (1,13) / 98 (1,00)

- Driver weight kg (Vibration
m/s2)
Grammer MSG 93/721 seat 55 (1,21) / 98 (1,05)
- Driver weight kg (Vibration
m/s2)
VIBRATION
10-13
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 13
21/05/2012 13.24.19
TECHNICAL DATA
10.3 - DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
10.3.1 - Tractor dimensions, weights and speeds

DANGER
When installing heavy implements, make sure that 20% of the total weight (tractor + load) is on the unloaded axle. Do
not exceed the permissible maximum axle loads.
Dimensions for cabbed tractors
3
4
5
6
Fig. 469 - Dimensions for cabbed tractors

EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
7.50-18
320/85R24
420/85R30
7.50-18
420/70R24
480/70R34
7.50-18
320/85R24
420/85R30
7.50-18
420/70R24
480/70R34
2350
2370
4060
2740
1950-220
450
2400
2380
4150
2790
2050-2230
500
2350
2370
4080
2740
1950-220
450
2400
2380
4200
2790
2050-2230
500
450
500
450
500
1254-1340
1300-1380
1254-1340
1300-1380
2003-2140
2337-2480
2003-2140
2337-2480
3257-3480
3637-3860
3257-3480
3637-3860
1494-1860
1603-1960
1494-1860
1603-1960
2073-2260
2464-2660
2073-2260
2464-2660
TYRES
With 2WD front tyres

With front tyres
With rear tyres
DIMENSIONS
2WD wheelbase (A) mm

Wheelbase (A) mm
Length (B) mm
Height ( C) mm
Min-max width (D)
2WD Ground clearance
(E) mm
Ground clearance (F) mm
UNLADEN WEIGHT [2]
9
10
2WD - Unladen weight on

front axle kg. Low
rear axle kg Low
2WD - Total unladen weight
kg Low
Unladen weight on front
axle kg.
Unladen weight on rear
axle kg.
10-14
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 14
21/05/2012 13.24.19
TECHNICAL DATA
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
3567-4120
4067-4620
3567-4120
4067-4620
1800
1800
1800
4800
4800
4800
5300
5300
5300
3000
3000
3000
4800
4800
4800
7200
7200
7200
4500
4500
4500
4800
4800
4800
7200
7200
7200
Total unladen weight kg.
2WD - Maximum permis1800

sible weight on front axle kg
sible weight on rear axle kg
sible weight kg
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT
Maximum permissible
3000
weight on front axle kg.
Maximum permissible
4800
weight on rear axle kg.
Total maximum permissible 7200
weight kg.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT AT 40 KM/H [1]
Maximum permissible
4500
Maximum permissible
4800
weight kg.
[1] IMPORTANT
The maximum permissible weights require a track width between 1600 and 1700 mm
The unladen weight of the tractor is an approximate value as it varies according to the equipment level and accessories installed; the exact weight should determined by weighing the tractor.
[2] IMPORTANT
10
Dimensions for platform tractors equipped with safety roll bar
Fig. 470 - Dimensions for platform tractors equipped with safety roll bar
10-15
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 15
21/05/2012 13.24.20
TECHNICAL DATA
7.50-18
320/85R24
420/85R30
7.50-18
420/70R24
480/70R34
7.50-18
320/85R24
420/85R30
2350
2370
4060
2710
1950-220
450
2400
2380
4150
2790
2050-2230
500
2350
2370
4080
2710
1950-220
450
450
500
450
1115-1200
1161-1240
1115-1200
1802-1940
2136-2280
1802-1940
2917-3140
3297-3520
2917-3140
1354-1720
1523-1890
1354-1720
1873-2060
2104-2290
1873-2060
3227-3780
3627-4180
3227-3780
1800
1800
4800
4800
5300
5300
3000
3000
4800
4800
7200
7200
4500
4500
4800
4800
7200
7200
EXPLORER 105 -> 20001
TYRES
With 2WD front tyres
With front tyres
With rear tyres
DIMENSIONS
2WD wheelbase (A) mm

Wheelbase (A) mm
Length (B) mm
Height ( C) mm
Min-max width (D)
2WD Ground clearance
(E) mm
Ground clearance (F) mm
UNLADEN WEIGHT [2]
4
5

front axle kg. Low
rear axle kg Low
2WD - Total unladen weight
kg Low
Unladen weight on front
axle kg.
Unladen weight on rear
axle kg.
Total unladen weight kg.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT

sible weight on front axle kg
sible weight on rear axle kg
sible weight kg
Maximum permissible
3000
Maximum permissible
4800
weight kg.
Maximum permissible
4500
Maximum permissible
4800
weight kg.
[1] IMPORTANT
The maximum permissible weights require a track width between 1600 and 1700 mm
10
10-16
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 16
21/05/2012 13.24.20
TECHNICAL DATA
The unladen weight of the tractor is an approximate value as it varies according to the equipment level and accessories installed; the exact weight should determined by weighing the tractor.
[2] IMPORTANT
Tractor speeds
Speeds for 90 hp tractors without Hi-Lo
5-speed gearbox x 4 ranges + shuttle
Fig. 471
To convert km/h to mph multiply by 0.6214

Speeds for 90 hp tractors with Hi-Lo
5-speed gearbox x 4 ranges + Hi-Lo + shuttle
Fig. 472

Speeds for 105 hp tractors without Hi-Lo
10
5-speed gearbox x 4 ranges + shuttle
10-17
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 17
21/05/2012 13.24.23
TECHNICAL DATA
1
2
3
Fig. 473

Speeds for 105 hp tractors with Hi-Lo
5-speed gearbox x 4 ranges + Hi-Lo + shuttle
5
6
7
Fig. 474

Speed conversion table
Changing the rear tires also changes the corresponding speeds.
To calculate the speeds for different tyres, simply multiply the indicated speed values by the following factors:
Tab. 83
TYRES
REFERENCE TYRES
460/85R34
10
480/70R34
340/85R38 (13.6R38)
460/85R34 (18.4R34)
480/70R38
420/85R38 (16.9R38)
520/70R34
540/65R38
1
1
1
1.06
1.06
1,033
1.06
10-18
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 18
21/05/2012 13.24.34
TECHNICAL DATA
10.4 - IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT DIAGRAMS
10.4.1 - Implement coupling holes diagram

Attachment of implements to the tractor
To satisfy every user requirement, the structural frame of the tractor has been designed to afford a solid, safe mounting for agricultural
and semi-industrial implements; this enables the tractor to be used in a vast range of applications.
In the case of particularly heavy applications, contact your authorized service centre to check suitability.
It may occur that not all the tyres we fit to the tractor are suitable for the application in question.
Before attaching the implement, check that the tyres are capable of supporting the load.
Check the markings on the tyre walls and consult the tyre manufacturers load tables.
Implement coupling holes diagram
==
1481
1401
B0
1100
240
120
17
==
75
120
C0
17
==
360
385
215
4
38
112
38
Asse motore
Engine
A0
I0
1278
2347
85
5
6
480
550
350
==
G0
290
170
D0
G0
550
I0
==
330
==
230
45
560
198
F0
==
==
560
440
146
130
E0
==
H0
45
190
2874.5
228
120
==
F0
65
265
85
2422
2766
100
Fig. 475 - Implement coupling holes diagram for 90 HP tractors

l
Screw sizes
For 90 hp only
Tab. 84
12
2+2
2+2
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
12
4
TYPE
M14x2x26
M18x2.5x30
M18x2.5x25
M12x20
M20x2.5x35
M12x1.75x24
M16x2x32
M16x2x38
M16x2x25
NUMBER
10
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
H0
I0
POSITION
10-19
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 19
21/05/2012 13.24.36
TECHNICAL DATA
==
1509
240
1429
1128
120
17
==
40
120
C0
6
17
B0
360
38
112
385
180
38
Asse motore
Engine
A0
I0
1257
1306
224
198
146
120
45
190
95
H0
95
550
620.5
515.5
585.5
350
G0
420.5
170
D0
45
G0
==
230
==
I0
==
330
560
107.5
==
==
560
228
F0
290
3
440
F0
130
E0
==
==
322
65
2375
2450
2794
2902.5
100
Fig. 476 - Implement coupling holes diagram for 105 HP tractors

Screw sizes
For 105 hp only
Tab. 85
POSITION
6
7
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
H0
I0
NUMBER
12
2+2
2+2
4+4
4+4
4+4
4+4
12
4
TYPE
M14x2x26
M18x2.5x30
M18x2.5x25
M12x20
M20x2.5x35
M12x1.75x24
M16x2x32
M16x2x38
M16x2x25
8
9
10
10-20
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 20
21/05/2012 13.24.36
GENERAL INDEX
ECONOMY MODE power take-off

GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and fabric upholstery
GRAMMER MSG83/721 seat with mechanical suspension and PVC upholstery
4-26
3-9
3-7
3
3-point linkage
4-43, 4-43
A
Accelerator pedal
Access to the driving position
Access to the driving position for tractors with cab
Access to the driving position for tractors with platform and ROPS
Accessing the engine compartment
Accessories
Accident prevention and personal safety
Adhesive safety warning decals
Adjusting the height of the towing hitch
Adjustment of the front fenders
Adjustment of the front fenders (2WD)
Angle brackets for towing hitches
Automatic power take-off
Automatic towing hitch
Auxiliary equipment
3-60
3-5
3-5
3-5
6-9, 6-9
9-25
2-7
2-22
4-63
8-16
8-15
3-45
4-66
4-27
4-68
2-11
B
Ballast for tractor
Ballast for wheels with metal discs
Ballast for wheels with water-filled tyres
Ballasting
Battery
Behaviour of the oil flow in the hydraulic circuit connecting the couplers and the actuator cylinders on the
implement
Biofuels - technical characteristics
Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear brakes
Bleeding the hydraulic clutch circuit
Boarding and alighting from the tractor
Brake pedal
Brakes troubleshooting
Brakes, SEPARATE BRAKES Valve
Braking
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-17
9-2, 9-2
4-53
10-9
6-40
6-44
2-8
3-55
7-11
4-18
4-18
C
Cab
Cab air conditioning system maintenance
Cab air filter
Cab fuse box
Cab heating system maintenance
Cab troubleshooting
Cab/ROPS identification plate
Calculation of the mechanical lead
Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit
Changing the differential oil, planetary reduction unit oil and side final drives oil (4WD)
Changing the engine oil
Changing the engine oil filter cartridge
Changing the front wheel hub oil (2WD)
Changing the fuel filter
Changing the transmission oil
Changing the transmission oil filters
3-47
6-42
3-46
9-5, 9-5
6-41
7-15
1-4
8-6
6-45
6-48
6-22
6-24
6-47
6-26
6-46
6-32
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.24.37
GENERAL INDEX
Check front PTO oil level (4WD)
Check the battery
Check the electrical system
Checking clutch and brake reservoir oil level
Checking coolant level
Checking engine drive belt tension
Checking indicator lights
Checking radiator cleanliness
Checking the braking distance
Checking the braking system with safety brakes valve
Checking the differential lock system
Checking the engine oil level
Checking the front PTO
Checking the fuel level
Checking the oil pipelines
Checking the transmission oil level
Checking the window washer system
Checking wheels and tyres
Cleaning engine air filter - Changing air filter cartridge and internal safety cartridge
Cleaning the cab ventilation system filters
Cleaning the tractor
Clutch pedal
Console switches
Control pedals
Control switches in cab roof lining - left-hand side
Control switches on cab roof lining - right-hand side
Coolant
Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic service couplers
6-30
6-18
6-13
6-18
6-11
6-21
2-11
6-25
6-21
6-35
6-35
6-10
6-31
6-11
6-29
6-14
6-28
6-20
6-36
6-28
2-10
3-55
3-31
3-55
3-38
3-39
10-10
4-53
D
Daily check of the tractor and implements
Daily intervention
Declaration of conformity
Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor
Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor
Decommissioning the tractor
Delivery and installation
Dimensions and weights
Display of alarms
Drawbar
Driving on the road
2-8
6-10
10-2
2-21
2-21
2-21
1-6
10-14
7-18, 7-20
4-65
2-13
E
Electrical system troubleshooting
Electrohydraulically controlled rear lift
Electronic hand throttle
Emergency exits
Engaging front-wheel drive
Engine - first 50 operating hours
Engine identification plate
Engine number
Engine troubleshooting
Exposure to noise
Exterior views of the tractor
Exterior views of tractor with ROPS
Exterior views of tractors with high-visibility cab roof
Exterior views of tractors with standard cab
External rear-view mirrors
7-16
4-35
3-60
2-18
4-14
4-2
1-4
1-3
7-6
2-7
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-18
F
Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS)
Fault diagnosis
Fire extinguisher
Fluids / lubricants and fill volumes
Four-wheel drive - Differential lock
Front and rear differential locks
Front and rear power take-off troubleshooting
Front ballast with cast-iron blocks
2-16, 2-18
7-17
3-52
6-4
4-14
4-16
7-9
8-18
II
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.24.37
GENERAL INDEX
Front lift
Front one-piece ballast block
Front power take-off (1000 rpm)
Front PTO
Front wheel hub bearings (2WD)
Front-wheel drive troubleshooting
Fuel injection pump maintenance
Fuel technical characteristics
4-41
8-18
4-29
4-29
6-41
7-10
6-36
10-7
G
Gearbox troubleshooting
General information regarding tyres
General inspection of the tractor
General safety rules
Grease the rear axle
Greasing the front axle (2WD)
Greasing the front axle (4WD)
Greasing the rear 3-point linkage
Ground speed power take-off
7-8
8-2
6-10
2-4
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-19
4-27
H
Handling ballast weights
Hazard warning triangle
Headlight alignment
Heating system
Hydraulic front lift
Hydraulic lift
Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch
Hydraulic rear lift
Hydraulic remote valves troubleshooting
Hydraulic shuttle
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system troubleshooting
Hydraulic trailer braking
8-17
F1-1
3-53
9-14
3-43
4-41
4-32
4-71
4-32
7-14
4-11
4-47, 4-47
7-13
4-19
I
Identification plates
Implement attachment diagrams
Implement coupling holes diagram
Important
Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment
Instrument panel
Instrument panel alarms
Instruments and controls for cabbed tractors
Instruments and controls for platform tractors
Instruments and controls for tractors equipped with platform and safety roll bar
Instruments and tractor controls
Interior courtesy light
Introduction
1-3
10-19
10-19
F1-1
9-25
3-23
7-20
3-21, 3-21
3-19
3-19
3-23
9-22
2-2, 4-2, 8-2
K
Key to fuse and relay symbols
9-6
L
Lift troubleshooting
Lifting the tractor
Lights for road use
List of model serial numbers
7-12
7-5
9-12, 9-12
1-2
III
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.24.38
GENERAL INDEX
M
Maintenance
Maintenance and inspection schedule
Maintenance every 100 hours (1st service)
Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least every two years
Maintenance every 1200 hours or at least once a year
Maintenance every 300 hours
Maintenance intervals
Maintenance operations
Mechanical Pick-up Hitch
Mechanical shuttle
Mechanically controlled rear load sensing lift
Minimum track width
Mixed-automatic air braking system
2-15
6-7
6-21
6-45
6-36
6-30
6-14
6-32
6-3
6-2
4-69
4-11
4-32
8-10
4-20
N
Noise levels
10-12
O
Operation
Operation & Maintenance Manual
Operations prior to long term garaging
Operator Protective Structure (OPS)
Operator seat
Operator seats
Original spare parts
Other controls
Overturning
2-11
3-52
5-2
2-16, 2-19
3-7
3-7
1-5
3-55
2-13
P
Park Brake (EXPLORER 105 -> 20001)
Parking brake lever (EXPLORER 105 -> 15001, EXPLORER 90 -> 15001, EXPLORER 90 -> 20001)
Parking brake lever control - Park Brake control
Parking the tractor
Passenger seat (EXPLORER 105 -> 20001)
Passenger seat belt
Permissible tyre combinations
Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame
Post-warranty assistance
Power outlet sockets
Power take-off
Practical advice on safe working procedures
Preface
Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of inactivity
Protect the Environment
Protection and safety devices
PTO selfdiagnosis indicator light
Punctures
3-57
3-56
6-27
2-9
3-15
3-16
8-5
4-69
1-7
9-25
4-22
2-3
F1-1
5-3
2-3
2-8
7-22
8-3
R
Rear PTO
Rear PTO (540-1000 rpm)
Rear-view mirrors
Remote valve
Right-hand console
Road lights - North America version
Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS)
4-22
4-23
3-18
4-47
3-36
9-15
2-16, 2-18
IV
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 4
21/05/2012 13.24.38
GENERAL INDEX
S
Safe transport of the tractor
Safety cab
Safety clothing and equipment
Safety roll bar (ROPS)
Safety warning notices
Seat belt
Seat type GRAMMER MSG93/721 with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery
Semi-automatic towing hitch
Service intervals
Set engine valves clearance and fuel injectors
Spool valve controls
Standard long hitch support frame
Start
Starter motor maintenance
Starting - Stopping the engine
Starting fluids
Starting the engine:
Steering wheel
Steering wheel stalk control
Switching off the engine
7-4
2-18
2-7
2-16
2-22
3-15
3-12
4-67
6-6
6-32
4-51
4-66
2-11
6-40
4-3
2-11
4-3
3-17, 3-17
3-34
4-5
T
Technical data
Technical data of the tractor
Toolbox
Towing devices
Towing devices (EXPLORER 105 -> 15001, EXPLORER 105 -> 20001)
Towing devices (EXPLORER 90 -> 15001, EXPLORER 90 -> 20001)
Towing hitch with lock pin
Towing hitch with safety lock
Towing safely
Towing the tractor
Towing with the engine off
Towing with the engine running
Track width adjustment
Track width calculation
Tractor dimensions, weights and speeds
Tractor identification plate
Transmission
Transmission and hydraulic shuttle alarms
Transmission controls for tractors with hydraulic shuttle
Transmission controls for tractors with mechanical shuttle
Transport
Turbocharging using the turbocharger
Types of remote control valve
Tyre combinations
Tyre load capacities
10-4
10-4
F1-1
3-54
4-59
4-61
4-59
4-66
4-67
2-12
7-2
7-3
7-2
8-10
8-10
10-14
1-3
1-3
4-6, 4-6
7-18
3-62
3-61
1-7
4-5
4-49
8-5
8-8
U
Use of hazardous substances
2-17, 2-19
V
Ventilation system
Vibration referred to the operator position
3-40
10-13
W
Warnings
Warranty
F1-1
1-6
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 5
21/05/2012 13.24.38
GENERAL INDEX
Warranty procedure
Washing the tractor/attached implements
Wheel chock
Wheel nut/bolt tightening torques
Work lights
Work lights for tractors with cab
Work lights for tractors with platform
1-6
6-3
3-54
8-4
9-18
9-20
9-18
VI
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 6
21/05/2012 13.24.38
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 1
21/05/2012 13.24.38
*307.U.0801.en.0.01*
05/2012
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 2
21/05/2012 13.24.38
*307.U.0801.en.0.01*
05/2012
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.

Viale F. Cassani, 15 24047 Treviglio (BG) Italy Phone + 39.0363.4211 Fax + 39.0363.421638
www.samedeutz-fahr.com
307.U.0801.en.0.01.indb 3
21/05/2012 13.24.39

Explorer90 105en

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Explorer90 105en

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

USE AND MAINTENANCE

EXPLORER 90 -> 15001

USE AND MAINTENANCE

Handover of the tractor to the customer

To the owner of the new tractor

3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR

4 - USING THE TRACTOR

5 - STORING THE TRACTOR

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

This Operation and Maintenance Manual covers the following models:

Tab. 1 - Technical data

EXPLORER 105 -> 15001 EXPLORER 90 -> 20001

-> ZKDW7002W0TS 15001

-> ZKDW7302W0TS 15001

EXPLORER 105 -> 20001

Identifying serial number

-> ZKDW7602W0TS 20001 -> ZKDW7902W0TS 20001

1.2.1 - Tractor identification plate

Designation of the tractor

1.2.2 - Tractor serial number

1.2.3 - Engine number

1.2.5 - Cab/ROPS identification plate

on the RH side of the cab

1.3 - ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS

Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:

When ordering replacement parts, please supply the following information:

1.4.1 - Delivery and installation

The warranty will be invalidated also in the following situations:

Exclusions from the warranty:

1.4.2 - Warranty procedure

1.4.4 - Post-warranty assistance

2.2 - PRACTICAL ADVICE ON SAFE WORKING PROCEDURES

2.2.1 - Protect the Environment

Start engine ONLY when seated in operators seat.

Wear close-fitting clothing. Avoid wearing loose-fitting jackets, shirts or ties.

Perform maintenance work on the cardan shaft and on the power

2.4.1 - Safety clothing and equipment

2.4.2 - Exposure to noise

Anyone who uses the tractor must know that:

2.4.4 - Daily check of the tractor and implements

2.4.5 - Boarding and alighting from the tractor

DO NOT use the control levers for handholds.

Apply the parking brake.

2.4.6 - Parking the tractor

Parking the tractor with the engine off

Parking the tractor with the engine off

Apply the handbrake.

Parking the tractor with the engine running

Check that no-one is in the vicinity of the tractor;

Parking the tractor on steep slopes

adjust the seat to suit your requirements

2.5.2 - Checking indicator lights

In all cases, before starting the engine:

2.5.3 - Starting fluids

2.5.4 - Auxiliary equipment

2.5.5 - Towing safely

The following precautions should be taken to prevent the possibility of overturning:

Adjust the track width to suit the task in hand.

Incorrect connection of the battery terminals or incorrect connection of the

2.7.1 - Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS)

2.7.2 - Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS)

2.7.3 - Operator Protective Structure (OPS)

2.8.1 - Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS)